Arabic Language ‹ All units
Home

Arabic for English Speakers

العَرَبِيَّةُ لِغَيْرِ النَّاطِقِينَ بِهَا

Sheikh Mohamed Fawzy · الشيخ محمد فوزي

Two tracks, two ways to read

Study the Vocabulary and Grammar tracks side by side or on their own — each unit links to the lessons it needs. Open any unit as a Book to read and print, or as Slides to teach on a screen: use the arrow keys or the buttons, and tap Show answer on each question.

Vocabulary

مَسَارُ المُفْرَدَات

Sixteen topics from everyday life.

Grammar

مَسَارُ القَوَاعِد

Twenty lessons, from the parts of speech to comparing things.

Vocabulary · Unit 1 of 16

الأُسْرَة

The Family

Every member of the family, the two words for uncle and aunt, a family tree, and twelve family verbs in the past and present.

In this unit

  • Name every member of your family, from grandparents to cousins.
  • Know why Arabic has two words for uncle and two for aunt.
  • Say my father, her brother and our family with the possessive endings.
  • Use twelve family verbs in the past and the present.
  • Ask and answer: Who is this? Do you have brothers? How many?

Grammar for this unitPronounsThe Nominal SentencePossession: the IdafaThe Past TenseThe Present Tense

أ

The immediate family

الأُسْرَةُ الصَّغِيرَة

Notice the pattern: the feminine word is usually the masculine word plus ة.

MaleEnglishFemaleEnglish
أَب / وَالِدfatherأُمّ / وَالِدَةmother
ابْنsonابْنَة / بِنْتdaughter
أَخbrotherأُخْتsister
زَوْجhusbandزَوْجَةwife
طِفْلchild (boy)طِفْلَةchild (girl)
رَجُلmanامْرَأَةwoman
وَلَدboyبِنْتgirl

Words for the whole group

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
أُسْرَة / عَائِلَةfamilyوَالِدَانparents
إِخْوَةbrothersأَخَوَاتsisters
أَوْلَادchildren, boysبَنَاتgirls

Two of anything — the dual

Family words are where the dual appears most. Arabic never says two brothers with a number word — it changes the noun itself by adding ـَانِ.

أَخ ← أَخَوَانِ
brother → two brothers
أُخْت ← أُخْتَانِ
sister → two sisters
ابْن ← ابْنَانِ
son → two sons
وَالِد ← وَالِدَانِ
parent → two parents
عِنْدِي أَخَوَانِ وَأُخْتَانِ.
I have two brothers and two sisters.

Two words for father and mother

أَب and أُمّ are the everyday words. وَالِد and وَالِدَة are more formal and polite — you will see them in writing and hear them in careful speech. Both are correct.

هَذَا أَبِي.
This is my father. (everyday)
هَذَا وَالِدِي.
This is my father. (formal)
ب

The extended family

الأَقَارِب
MaleEnglishFemaleEnglish
جَدّgrandfatherجَدَّةgrandmother
عَمّuncle (father's brother)عَمَّةaunt (father's sister)
خَالuncle (mother's brother)خَالَةaunt (mother's sister)
ابْنُ العَمِّcousin (m., father's side)ابْنَةُ العَمِّcousin (f., father's side)
ابْنُ الخَالِcousin (m., mother's side)ابْنَةُ الخَالِcousin (f., mother's side)
حَفِيدgrandsonحَفِيدَةgranddaughter
جَارneighbourجَارَةneighbour (f.)
صَدِيقfriendصَدِيقَةfriend (f.)

The biggest difference from English

English says uncle for both sides of the family. Arabic never does — you must know whose brother he is.

The same rule applies to aunts: عَمَّة is your father's sister, خَالَة is your mother's sister.

عَمّ
your father's brother
خَال
your mother's brother

A friendly note

In Arab culture خَالَة and عَمّ are also used politely for older people who are not relatives — like saying auntie or uncle to a family friend.

السَّلَامُ عَلَيْكُمْ يَا خَالَة!
Hello, auntie!
ج

A family tree

شَجَرَةُ العَائِلَة
جَدّ
grandfather
جَدَّة
grandmother
عَمّ
uncle (father's brother)
أَب
father
أُمّ
mother
خَال
uncle (mother's brother)
ابْنُ العَمِّ
cousin
أَخ
brother
أَنَا
me
أُخْت
sister

Read the tree aloud

Point at each box and say the sentence. Then replace the word with your own family.

هَذَا جَدِّي، وَهَذِهِ جَدَّتِي.
This is my grandfather, and this is my grandmother.
هَذَا أَبِي، وَهَذِهِ أُمِّي.
This is my father, and this is my mother.
هَذَا أَخِي، وَهَذِهِ أُخْتِي.
This is my brother, and this is my sister.
د

My family, your family

الأُسْرَةُ مَعَ الضَّمَائِر

Take any family word and add the endings you learned in Grammar 2.

EndingEnglishأُخْت — sisterعَائِلَة — familyMeaning
ـِيmyأُخْتِيعَائِلَتِيmy sister / my family
ـكَyour (m.)أُخْتُكَعَائِلَتُكَyour sister / family
ـكِyour (f.)أُخْتُكِعَائِلَتُكِyour sister / family
ـهُhisأُخْتُهُعَائِلَتُهُhis sister / family
ـهَاherأُخْتُهَاعَائِلَتُهَاher sister / family
ـهُمَاtheir (the two)أُخْتُهُمَاعَائِلَتُهُمَاthe sister / family of the two
ـنَاourأُخْتُنَاعَائِلَتُنَاour sister / family
ـهُمْtheirأُخْتُهُمْعَائِلَتُهُمْtheir sister / family

Two special words: أَب and أَخ

These two behave differently. With my they lose the vowel; with the other endings a long و appears:

أَبِي — أَبُوهُ — أَبُوهَا
my father — his father — her father
أَخِي — أَخُوهُ — أَخُوهَا
my brother — his brother — her brother

Remember the ة rule

Words ending in ة change it to ت before the ending:

جَدَّة ← جَدَّتِي
grandmother → my grandmother
خَالَة ← خَالَتُهُ
aunt → his aunt
هـ

Family verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ الأُسْرَة

Arabic verbs are listed in the he form, not with to. So أَحَبَّ literally means he loved, and يُحِبُّ means he loves.

PastPresentEnglishExample
أَحَبَّيُحِبُّto loveأُحِبُّ أُمِّي.
سَاعَدَيُسَاعِدُto helpأُسَاعِدُ أَبِي.
زَارَيَزُورُto visitنَزُورُ جَدَّتِي.
عَاشَيَعِيشُto liveنَعِيشُ مَعًا.
عَمِلَيَعْمَلُto workأَبِي يَعْمَلُ.
تَكَلَّمَيَتَكَلَّمُto speak, to talkنَتَكَلَّمُ كَثِيرًا.
لَعِبَيَلْعَبُto playأَلْعَبُ مَعَ أَخِي.
دَرَسَيَدْرُسُto studyأُخْتِي تَدْرُسُ.
سَأَلَيَسْأَلُto askسَأَلْتُ جَدِّي.
جَلَسَيَجْلِسُto sitنَجْلِسُ مَعًا.
أَكَلَيَأْكُلُto eatنَأْكُلُ مَعَ العَائِلَةِ.
تَزَوَّجَيَتَزَوَّجُto marryأَخِي تَزَوَّجَ.
و

One verb, all the pronouns

تَصْرِيفُ الفِعْل

Here is سَاعَدَ / يُسَاعِدُ (to help) with every pronoun. Learn this pattern and you can use most of the verbs above.

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
أَنَاسَاعَدْتُأُسَاعِدُI help
أَنْتَسَاعَدْتَتُسَاعِدُyou help (m.)
أَنْتِسَاعَدْتِتُسَاعِدِينَyou help (f.)
هُوَسَاعَدَيُسَاعِدُhe helps
هِيَسَاعَدَتْتُسَاعِدُshe helps
أَنْتُمَاسَاعَدْتُمَاتُسَاعِدَانِyou two help
هُمَاسَاعَدَايُسَاعِدَانِthe two of them help
نَحْنُسَاعَدْنَانُسَاعِدُwe help
أَنْتُمْسَاعَدْتُمْتُسَاعِدُونَyou help (pl.)
هُمْسَاعَدُوايُسَاعِدُونَthey help

The past tense — the ending tells you who

You do not always need the pronoun. Look at the last letters of the verb:

سَاعَدْتُ
I helped
سَاعَدْتَ / سَاعَدْتِ
you helped (m. / f.)
سَاعَدَتْ
she helped
سَاعَدَا
the two of them helped
سَاعَدْنَا
we helped
سَاعَدُوا
they helped

The present tense — the first letter tells you who

Exactly as in Grammar 2: أَ = I, نَ = we, يَ = he or they, تَ = you or she.

سَاعَدْتُ أُمِّي أَمْسِ.
I helped my mother yesterday.
أُسَاعِدُ أُمِّي كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
I help my mother every day.
ز

Asking about someone's family

أَسْئِلَةٌ عَنِ الأُسْرَة
QuestionEnglishPossible answer
مَنْ هَذَا؟Who is this? (male)هَذَا أَبِي.
مَنْ هَذِهِ؟Who is this? (female)هَذِهِ أُخْتِي.
هَلْ عِنْدَكَ إِخْوَة؟Do you have brothers?نَعَمْ، عِنْدِي أَخَوَانِ.
كَمْ أَخًا عِنْدَكَ؟How many brothers do you have?عِنْدِي ثَلَاثَةُ إِخْوَةٍ.
أَيْنَ تَعِيشُ عَائِلَتُكَ؟Where does your family live?تَعِيشُ فِي مِصْرَ.
مَاذَا يَعْمَلُ أَبُوكَ؟What does your father do?هُوَ مُهَنْدِسٌ.
مَا اسْمُ أُمِّكَ؟What is your mother's name?اسْمُهَا فَاطِمَةُ.

A short conversation

سَارَة: مَنْ هَذِهِ؟
Sara: Who is this?
عُمَر: هَذِهِ أُخْتِي، اسْمُهَا مَرْيَمُ.
Omar: This is my sister; her name is Maryam.
سَارَة: هَلْ عِنْدَكَ إِخْوَةٌ أَيْضًا؟
Sara: Do you have brothers too?
عُمَر: نَعَمْ، عِنْدِي أَخٌ وَاحِدٌ. هُوَ يَدْرُسُ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
Omar: Yes, I have one brother. He studies at school.
سَارَة: أَيْنَ تَعِيشُ عَائِلَتُكَ؟
Sara: Where does your family live?
عُمَر: نَعِيشُ مَعًا فِي بَيْتٍ كَبِيرٍ. نُحِبُّ بَعْضَنَا كَثِيرًا.
Omar: We live together in a big house. We love each other very much.
ح

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. عَائِلَتِي كَبِيرَةٌ وَسَعِيدَةٌ.
    My family is big and happy.
  2. أَبِي يَعْمَلُ، وَأُمِّي تَعْمَلُ أَيْضًا.
    My father works, and my mother works too.
  3. عِنْدِي أَخٌ وَاحِدٌ وَأُخْتَانِ.
    I have one brother and two sisters.
  4. أَخِي الصَّغِيرُ يَلْعَبُ مَعِي.
    My little brother plays with me.
  5. أُخْتِي تَدْرُسُ فِي الجَامِعَةِ.
    My sister studies at university.
  6. نَزُورُ جَدِّي وَجَدَّتِي كُلَّ أُسْبُوعٍ.
    We visit my grandfather and grandmother every week.
  7. أُحِبُّ خَالَتِي كَثِيرًا، هِيَ لَطِيفَةٌ.
    I love my aunt very much; she is kind.
  8. عَمِّي يَعِيشُ فِي مَدِينَةٍ بَعِيدَةٍ.
    My uncle lives in a faraway city.
  9. أُسَاعِدُ أُمِّي فِي البَيْتِ.
    I help my mother at home.
  10. أَمْسِ، تَكَلَّمْتُ مَعَ جَدَّتِي.
    Yesterday, I spoke with my grandmother.
  11. نَحْنُ نَأْكُلُ مَعًا كُلَّ مَسَاءٍ.
    We eat together every evening.
  12. هَذِهِ صُورَةُ عَائِلَتِي.
    This is a photo of my family.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

جَدَّةأُخْتخَال
ابْنزَوْجَةعَمَّة

جَدَّة = grandmother · أُخْت = sister · خَال = uncle (mother's brother) · ابْن = son · زَوْجَة = wife · عَمَّة = aunt (father's sister)

2Write عَمّ, عَمَّة, خَال or خَالَة.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اكْتُبِ الكَلِمَةَ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. أَخُو أَبِي هُوَ .
  2. أُخْتُ أُمِّي هِيَ .
  3. أَخُو أُمِّي هُوَ .
  4. أُخْتُ أَبِي هِيَ .
١) عَمِّي ٢) خَالَتِي ٣) خَالِي ٤) عَمَّتِي

3Add the possessive ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: أَضِفِ الضَّمِيرَ المُنَاسِب.

  1. أُخْت + أَنَا → (my sister)
  2. جَدّ + هُوَ → (his grandfather)
  3. عَائِلَة + نَحْنُ → (our family)
  4. خَالَة + هِيَ → (her aunt)
  5. ابْن + هُمْ → (their son)
  6. أَخ + هُمَا → (the brother of the two of them)
١) أُخْتِي ٢) جَدُّهُ ٣) عَائِلَتُنَا ٤) خَالَتُهَا ٥) ابْنُهُمْ ٦) أَخُوهُمَا

4Put the verb in the present tense.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: ضَعِ الفِعْلَ فِي المُضَارِع.

  1. أَنَا (سَاعَدَ) → أَنَا أُمِّي.
  2. هِيَ (دَرَسَ) → هِيَ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
  3. نَحْنُ (زَارَ) → نَحْنُ جَدَّتِي.
  4. هُمْ (لَعِبَ) → هُمْ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
  5. أَنْتِ (أَحَبَّ) → أَنْتِ عَائِلَتَكِ.
١) أُسَاعِدُ ٢) تَدْرُسُ ٣) نَزُورُ ٤) يَلْعَبُونَ ٥) تُحِبِّينَ

5Rewrite these sentences in the past tense.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: حَوِّلِ الجُمَلَ إِلَى المَاضِي.

  1. أَنَا أُسَاعِدُ أَبِي. →
  2. هُوَ يَزُورُ جَدَّهُ. →
  3. هِيَ تَتَكَلَّمُ مَعَ أُمِّهَا. →
  4. نَحْنُ نَأْكُلُ مَعًا. →
  5. هُمْ يَلْعَبُونَ. →
١) أَنَا سَاعَدْتُ أَبِي.
٢) هُوَ زَارَ جَدَّهُ.
٣) هِيَ تَكَلَّمَتْ مَعَ أُمِّهَا.
٤) نَحْنُ أَكَلْنَا مَعًا.
٥) هُمْ لَعِبُوا.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. This is my mother.
  2. My family is big.
  3. I have two sisters.
  4. We visit my grandmother.
  5. Her brother studies at school.
١) هَذِهِ أُمِّي.
٢) عَائِلَتِي كَبِيرَةٌ.
٣) عِنْدِي أُخْتَانِ.
٤) نَزُورُ جَدَّتِي.
٥) أَخُوهَا يَدْرُسُ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. grandmother
  2. son
  3. wife
  4. uncle (mother's brother)
  5. family

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أُخْتُ أَبِي هِيَ . ( خَالَتِي / عَمَّتِي / جَدَّتِي )
  2. جَدَّتِي. ( هَذَا / هَذِهِ / هُمْ )
  3. أَنَا أُمِّي كُلَّ يَوْمٍ. ( يُسَاعِدُ / أُسَاعِدُ / نُسَاعِدُ )
  4. أَمْسِ، جَدِّي. ( أَزُورُ / زُرْتُ / يَزُورُ )
  5. عِنْدِي أَخٌ . ( وَاحِدٌ / وَاحِدَةٌ / اثْنَتَانِ )

Question 3 — Complete the table. (5 marks)

PronounPast of زَارَPresent of يَزُورُEnglish
أَنَاأَزُورُI visit
هِيَزَارَتْshe visits
هُمَازَارَاthe two of them visit
نَحْنُwe visit
هُمْزَارُواthey visit

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your own family. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) جَدَّة ٢) ابْن ٣) زَوْجَة ٤) خَال ٥) أُسْرَة / عَائِلَة

Question 2

١) عَمَّتِي ٢) هَذِهِ ٣) أُسَاعِدُ ٤) زُرْتُ ٥) وَاحِدٌ

Question 3

أَنَا: زُرْتُ · هِيَ: تَزُورُ · نَحْنُ: زُرْنَا / نَزُورُ · هُمَا: يَزُورَانِ · هُمْ: يَزُورُونَ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 2 of 16

البَيْت

The Home

Rooms, furniture and household things, where things are, fourteen home verbs, and how to give an instruction.

In this unit

  • Name the rooms of a house and the things inside them.
  • Say exactly where something is: in, on, under, next to, between.
  • Ask and answer the question أَيْنَ …؟ (Where is …?).
  • Use fourteen everyday home verbs in the past and the present.
  • Give a simple instruction: open the door, close the window, sit down.

Grammar for this unitThe Nominal SentencePrepositions & AdverbsCommands & ProhibitionsThe Past TenseThe Present Tense

أ

Parts of the house

أَجْزَاءُ البَيْت
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
بَيْت / مَنْزِلhouse, homeشَقَّةapartment
غُرْفَةroomغُرْفَةُ النَّوْمbedroom
غُرْفَةُ الجُلُوسliving roomغُرْفَةُ الطَّعَامdining room
المَطْبَخkitchenالحَمَّامbathroom
بَابdoorشُبَّاك / نَافِذَةwindow
جِدَارwallسَقْفceiling
أَرْضِيَّةfloorسُلَّمstairs
حَدِيقَةgarden, yardمِفْتَاحkey

The word ال — a and the

Arabic has no word for a. A word on its own already means a house. Adding ال makes it the house.

بَيْتٌ ← البَيْتُ
a house → the house
غُرْفَةٌ ← الغُرْفَةُ
a room → the room

Counting rooms — the dual again

You met the dual with people in Grammar 2 and Vocabulary 1. It works the same way with things: add ـَانِ and never put a number word in front.

غُرْفَة ← غُرْفَتَانِ
room → two rooms
بَاب ← بَابَانِ
door → two doors
كَمْ غُرْفَةً فِي شَقَّتِكَ؟
How many rooms are in your apartment?
فِيهَا غُرْفَتَانِ وَمَطْبَخٌ.
It has two rooms and a kitchen.

Two words joined together

غُرْفَةُ النَّوْمِ is literally room of sleep. Arabic builds many names this way: the second word carries ال, the first one never does.

غُرْفَةُ الطَّعَامِ
room of food = dining room
بَابُ البَيْتِ
door of the house
ب

Furniture and household things

أَثَاثُ البَيْتِ وَأَدَوَاتُه
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
سَرِيرbedكُرْسِيّchair
طَاوِلَةtableمَكْتَبdesk
أَرِيكَةsofaخِزَانَةcupboard, closet
سَجَّادَةcarpet, rugسِتَارَةcurtain
مِرْآةmirrorمِصْبَاحlamp
سَاعَةclock, watchتِلْفَازtelevision
ثَلَّاجَةrefrigeratorفُرْنoven
صَحْن / طَبَقplate, dishكُوبcup, glass
مِلْعَقَةspoonسِكِّينknife
مِنْشَفَةtowelصَابُونsoap

Your own things

Add the endings from Grammar 2 to any of these words:

سَرِيرِي
my bed
غُرْفَتُهَا
her room
مَكْتَبُهُ
his desk
بَيْتُنَا
our house
ج

Where is it?

أَيْنَ؟ حُرُوفُ الجَرِّ وَالظُّرُوف

These small words tell you the position of something. In Arabic they come before the noun, exactly as in English.

WordEnglishExampleMeaning
فِيin, atالكِتَابُ فِي الحَقِيبَةِ.The book is in the bag.
عَلَىonالكِتَابُ عَلَى الطَّاوِلَةِ.The book is on the table.
تَحْتَunderالحِذَاءُ تَحْتَ السَّرِيرِ.The shoe is under the bed.
فَوْقَaboveالمِصْبَاحُ فَوْقَ المَكْتَبِ.The lamp is above the desk.
أَمَامَin front ofالسَّيَّارَةُ أَمَامَ البَيْتِ.The car is in front of the house.
خَلْفَbehindالحَدِيقَةُ خَلْفَ البَيْتِ.The garden is behind the house.
بِجَانِبِnext toالكُرْسِيُّ بِجَانِبِ الطَّاوِلَةِ.The chair is next to the table.
بَيْنَbetweenالأَرِيكَةُ بَيْنَ البَابِ وَالشُّبَّاكِ.The sofa is between the door and the window.
دَاخِلَinsideالطَّعَامُ دَاخِلَ الثَّلَّاجَةِ.The food is inside the refrigerator.
خَارِجَoutsideالأَوْلَادُ خَارِجَ البَيْتِ.The children are outside the house.

Asking and answering

Use أَيْنَ to ask where something is. The answer needs no verb at all.

أَيْنَ الكِتَابُ؟
Where is the book?
الكِتَابُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.
The book is on the desk.
أَيْنَ أُمُّكَ؟
Where is your mother?
هِيَ فِي المَطْبَخِ.
She is in the kitchen.
د

Home verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ البَيْت

Remember: Arabic lists a verb in the he form. So فَتَحَ means he opened, and يَفْتَحُ means he opens.

PastPresentEnglishExample
سَكَنَيَسْكُنُto live, to resideأَسْكُنُ فِي شَقَّةٍ.
دَخَلَيَدْخُلُto enterدَخَلْتُ الغُرْفَةَ.
خَرَجَيَخْرُجُto go outخَرَجَ مِنَ البَيْتِ.
فَتَحَيَفْتَحُto openأَفْتَحُ الشُّبَّاكَ.
أَغْلَقَيُغْلِقُto closeأُغْلِقُ البَابَ.
جَلَسَيَجْلِسُto sitنَجْلِسُ عَلَى الأَرِيكَةِ.
نَامَيَنَامُto sleepأَنَامُ مُبَكِّرًا.
اسْتَيْقَظَيَسْتَيْقِظُto wake upأَسْتَيْقِظُ فِي السَّابِعَةِ.
طَبَخَيَطْبُخُto cookأُمِّي تَطْبُخُ.
غَسَلَيَغْسِلُto washأَغْسِلُ الصُّحُونَ.
نَظَّفَيُنَظِّفُto cleanنُنَظِّفُ البَيْتَ.
رَتَّبَيُرَتِّبُto tidy upأُرَتِّبُ غُرْفَتِي.
شَاهَدَيُشَاهِدُto watchنُشَاهِدُ التِّلْفَازَ.
دَقَّيَدُقُّto knock, to ringدَقَّ البَابَ.
هـ

One verb, all the pronouns · giving an instruction

تَصْرِيفُ الفِعْل · فِعْلُ الأَمْر

Here is فَتَحَ / يَفْتَحُ (to open). Compare it with سَاعَدَ in Vocabulary 1 — the endings are exactly the same.

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
أَنَافَتَحْتُأَفْتَحُI open
أَنْتَفَتَحْتَتَفْتَحُyou open (m.)
أَنْتِفَتَحْتِتَفْتَحِينَyou open (f.)
هُوَفَتَحَيَفْتَحُhe opens
هِيَفَتَحَتْتَفْتَحُshe opens
أَنْتُمَافَتَحْتُمَاتَفْتَحَانِyou two open
هُمَافَتَحَايَفْتَحَانِthe two of them open
نَحْنُفَتَحْنَانَفْتَحُwe open
أَنْتُمْفَتَحْتُمْتَفْتَحُونَyou open (pl.)
هُمْفَتَحُوايَفْتَحُونَthey open

Giving an instruction — فِعْلُ الأَمْر

To tell someone to do something, use the command form. There is one form for a man and one for a woman — just add ـِي for a woman.

MaleFemaleEnglishExample
اِفْتَحْاِفْتَحِيopen!اِفْتَحِ البَابَ.
أَغْلِقْأَغْلِقِيclose!أَغْلِقِ الشُّبَّاكَ.
اِجْلِسْاِجْلِسِيsit down!اِجْلِسْ هُنَا.
نَظِّفْنَظِّفِيclean!نَظِّفْ غُرْفَتَكَ.
تَعَالَتَعَالَيْcome!تَعَالَ إِلَى المَطْبَخِ.

Telling two people

To give an instruction to two people, add ـَا:

اِفْتَحَا البَابَ.
You two, open the door.
اِجْلِسَا هُنَا.
You two, sit here.

Being polite

Add مِنْ فَضْلِكَ (to a man) or مِنْ فَضْلِكِ (to a woman) to make any instruction polite.

اِفْتَحِ البَابَ، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
Open the door, please.
و

Talking about your home

حِوَارٌ عَنِ البَيْت
QuestionEnglishPossible answer
أَيْنَ تَسْكُنُ؟Where do you live?أَسْكُنُ فِي فِرْجِينْيَا.
هَلْ تَسْكُنُ فِي بَيْتٍ؟Do you live in a house?لَا، أَسْكُنُ فِي شَقَّةٍ.
كَمْ غُرْفَةً فِي بَيْتِكَ؟How many rooms are in your house?فِي بَيْتِي أَرْبَعُ غُرَفٍ.
هَلْ عِنْدَكُمْ حَدِيقَةٌ؟Do you have a garden?نَعَمْ، عِنْدَنَا حَدِيقَةٌ صَغِيرَةٌ.
أَيْنَ تَدْرُسُ فِي البَيْتِ؟Where do you study at home?أَدْرُسُ عَلَى مَكْتَبِي.

A short conversation

لَيْلَى: أَيْنَ تَسْكُنِينَ يَا مَرْيَمُ؟
Layla: Where do you live, Maryam?
مَرْيَم: أَسْكُنُ فِي شَقَّةٍ قَرِيبَةٍ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
Maryam: I live in an apartment near the school.
لَيْلَى: كَمْ غُرْفَةً فِيهَا؟
Layla: How many rooms does it have?
مَرْيَم: فِيهَا ثَلَاثُ غُرَفٍ وَمَطْبَخٌ صَغِيرٌ.
Maryam: It has three rooms and a small kitchen.
لَيْلَى: وَأَيْنَ تَدْرُسِينَ؟
Layla: And where do you study?
مَرْيَم: أَدْرُسُ فِي غُرْفَتِي، عَلَى المَكْتَبِ بِجَانِبِ الشُّبَّاكِ.
Maryam: I study in my room, at the desk next to the window.
ز

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. هَذَا بَيْتِي، وَهُوَ بَيْتٌ كَبِيرٌ.
    This is my house, and it is a big house.
  2. أَسْكُنُ فِي شَقَّةٍ صَغِيرَةٍ.
    I live in a small apartment.
  3. فِي الشَّقَّةِ غُرْفَتَانِ وَحَمَّامٌ.
    The apartment has two rooms and a bathroom.
  4. فِي بَيْتِنَا أَرْبَعُ غُرَفٍ.
    In our house there are four rooms.
  5. أُمِّي تَطْبُخُ فِي المَطْبَخِ.
    My mother cooks in the kitchen.
  6. أَبِي يَجْلِسُ عَلَى الأَرِيكَةِ.
    My father sits on the sofa.
  7. أَنَامُ فِي غُرْفَةِ النَّوْمِ.
    I sleep in the bedroom.
  8. الكِتَابُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ، وَالحَقِيبَةُ تَحْتَهُ.
    The book is on the desk, and the bag is under it.
  9. السَّاعَةُ عَلَى الجِدَارِ بَيْنَ الشُّبَّاكِ وَالبَابِ.
    The clock is on the wall between the window and the door.
  10. أُرَتِّبُ غُرْفَتِي كُلَّ صَبَاحٍ.
    I tidy my room every morning.
  11. أَمْسِ، نَظَّفْنَا البَيْتَ مَعًا.
    Yesterday, we cleaned the house together.
  12. اِفْتَحِ الشُّبَّاكَ، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
    Open the window, please.
  13. أَيْنَ المِفْتَاحُ؟ — هُوَ دَاخِلَ الحَقِيبَةِ.
    Where is the key? — It is inside the bag.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

مَطْبَخسَرِيرثَلَّاجَة
حَدِيقَةشُبَّاكسَجَّادَة

مَطْبَخ = kitchen · سَرِير = bed · ثَلَّاجَة = refrigerator · حَدِيقَة = garden · شُبَّاك = window · سَجَّادَة = carpet

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

المَطْبَخِ — السَّرِيرِ — الحَدِيقَةِ — الشُّبَّاكَ — الحَمَّامِ
  1. أُمِّي تَطْبُخُ فِي .
  2. أَنَامُ عَلَى .
  3. أَغْسِلُ يَدَيَّ فِي .
  4. الأَزْهَارُ فِي .
  5. اِفْتَحِ ، الجَوُّ حَارٌّ.
١) المَطْبَخِ ٢) السَّرِيرِ ٣) الحَمَّامِ ٤) الحَدِيقَةِ ٥) الشُّبَّاكَ

3Choose the correct preposition.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرْ حَرْفَ الجَرِّ الصَّحِيح.

  1. الكِتَابُ الطَّاوِلَةِ. ( عَلَى / فِي )
  2. الحِذَاءُ السَّرِيرِ. ( تَحْتَ / فَوْقَ )
  3. السَّيَّارَةُ البَيْتِ. ( أَمَامَ / دَاخِلَ )
  4. الطَّعَامُ الثَّلَّاجَةِ. ( خَارِجَ / دَاخِلَ )
  5. الكُرْسِيُّ المَكْتَبِ. ( بِجَانِبِ / بَيْنَ )
١) عَلَى ٢) تَحْتَ ٣) أَمَامَ ٤) دَاخِلَ ٥) بِجَانِبِ

4Put the verb in the present tense.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: ضَعِ الفِعْلَ فِي المُضَارِع.

  1. أَنَا (فَتَحَ) → أَنَا البَابَ.
  2. هِيَ (طَبَخَ) → هِيَ الطَّعَامَ.
  3. نَحْنُ (نَظَّفَ) → نَحْنُ البَيْتَ.
  4. هُمْ (جَلَسَ) → هُمْ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
  5. أَنْتِ (نَامَ) → أَنْتِ مُبَكِّرًا.
١) أَفْتَحُ ٢) تَطْبُخُ ٣) نُنَظِّفُ ٤) يَجْلِسُونَ ٥) تَنَامِينَ

5Rewrite these sentences in the past tense.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: حَوِّلِ الجُمَلَ إِلَى المَاضِي.

  1. أَنَا أَفْتَحُ الشُّبَّاكَ. →
  2. هُوَ يَجْلِسُ عَلَى الكُرْسِيِّ. →
  3. هِيَ تُنَظِّفُ غُرْفَتَهَا. →
  4. نَحْنُ نُشَاهِدُ التِّلْفَازَ. →
  5. هُمْ يَخْرُجُونَ مِنَ البَيْتِ. →
١) أَنَا فَتَحْتُ الشُّبَّاكَ.
٢) هُوَ جَلَسَ عَلَى الكُرْسِيِّ.
٣) هِيَ نَظَّفَتْ غُرْفَتَهَا.
٤) نَحْنُ شَاهَدْنَا التِّلْفَازَ.
٥) هُمْ خَرَجُوا مِنَ البَيْتِ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. This is my room.
  2. The book is on the table.
  3. Where is the key?
  4. I live in a small apartment.
  5. Close the door, please. (to a woman)
١) هَذِهِ غُرْفَتِي.
٢) الكِتَابُ عَلَى الطَّاوِلَةِ.
٣) أَيْنَ المِفْتَاحُ؟
٤) أَسْكُنُ فِي شَقَّةٍ صَغِيرَةٍ.
٥) أَغْلِقِي البَابَ، مِنْ فَضْلِكِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. kitchen
  2. window
  3. bed
  4. refrigerator
  5. garden

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أَنَامُ فِي . ( المَطْبَخِ / غُرْفَةِ النَّوْمِ / الحَدِيقَةِ )
  2. السَّجَّادَةُ الأَرْضِيَّةِ. ( عَلَى / فَوْقَ / خَلْفَ )
  3. أُمِّي الطَّعَامَ. ( يَطْبُخُ / تَطْبُخُ / نَطْبُخُ )
  4. يَا مَرْيَمُ، البَابَ مِنْ فَضْلِكِ. ( اِفْتَحْ / اِفْتَحِي / فَتَحَ )
  5. أَمْسِ، البَيْتَ. ( أُنَظِّفُ / نَظَّفْتُ / يُنَظِّفُ )

Question 3 — Complete the table. (5 marks)

PronounPast of فَتَحَPresent of يَفْتَحُEnglish
أَنَاأَفْتَحُI open
هِيَفَتَحَتْshe opens
هُمَافَتَحَاthe two of them open
نَحْنُwe open
هُمْفَتَحُواthey open

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your own home. Use a preposition in each one. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) مَطْبَخ ٢) شُبَّاك / نَافِذَة ٣) سَرِير ٤) ثَلَّاجَة ٥) حَدِيقَة

Question 2

١) غُرْفَةِ النَّوْمِ ٢) عَلَى ٣) تَطْبُخُ ٤) اِفْتَحِي ٥) نَظَّفْتُ

Question 3

أَنَا: فَتَحْتُ · هِيَ: تَفْتَحُ · نَحْنُ: فَتَحْنَا / نَفْتَحُ · هُمَا: يَفْتَحَانِ · هُمْ: يَفْتَحُونَ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate use of prepositions and vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 3 of 16

المَدْرَسَةُ وَالفَصْل

School & Classroom

Places, people and things at school, singular, dual and plural, question words, and the phrases you need inside the classroom.

In this unit

  • Name the places, the people and the things you meet every school day.
  • Say one, two and many: singular, dual and plural.
  • Use fourteen school verbs in the past and the present.
  • Ask any question: who, what, where, when, why, how and how many.
  • Speak Arabic in the classroom: ask permission, ask for a word, say I don't understand.

Grammar for this unitSingular, Dual & PluralAsking QuestionsCommands & Prohibitions

أ

Places at school

أَمَاكِنُ فِي المَدْرَسَة
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
مَدْرَسَةschoolفَصْل / صَفّclassroom, class
مَكْتَبَةlibraryمُخْتَبَرlaboratory
مَلْعَبplayground, fieldمَقْصَفcafeteria
مَكْتَبُ المُدِيرِprincipal's officeمَمَرّhallway, corridor
قَاعَةhallحَافِلَةbus
مَسْجِدmosque, prayer roomبَوَّابَةgate
ب

People at school

أَشْخَاصٌ فِي المَدْرَسَة
MaleEnglishFemaleEnglish
مُعَلِّمteacherمُعَلِّمَةteacher (f.)
طَالِبstudentطَالِبَةstudent (f.)
مُدِيرprincipalمُدِيرَةprincipal (f.)
زَمِيلclassmateزَمِيلَةclassmate (f.)
حَارِسguardمُمَرِّضَةnurse (f.)
ج

Things in the classroom

أَدَوَاتُ الفَصْل
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
كِتَابbookدَفْتَرnotebook
قَلَمpenقَلَمُ رَصَاصٍpencil
مِمْحَاةeraserمِسْطَرَةruler
مِقَصّscissorsصَمْغglue
وَرَقَةsheet of paperحَقِيبَةbag, backpack
سَبُّورَةboardطَبَاشِيرchalk
مَكْتَبdeskكُرْسِيّchair
حَاسُوبcomputerخَرِيطَةmap
سَاعَةclockعَلَمflag
دَرْسlessonوَاجِبhomework

The مِـ pattern — tools

Many Arabic tools begin with مِـ. Once you notice the pattern, you can often guess that a word is an instrument:

مِمْحَاة
eraser — a thing that erases
مِسْطَرَة
ruler — a thing that draws lines
مِقَصّ
scissors — a thing that cuts
مِفْتَاح
key — a thing that opens
د

One, two, and more than one

المُفْرَدُ وَالمُثَنَّى وَالجَمْع

English has two numbers: one book, many books. Arabic has three — one, exactly two, and three or more. Learn the dual first, because it is the one English speakers forget.

Exactly two — the dual: add ـَانِ

SingularTwoEnglish
كِتَابكِتَابَانِbook → two books
طَالِبطَالِبَانِstudent → two students
مُعَلِّمَةمُعَلِّمَتَانِteacher (f.) → two teachers
سَاعَةسَاعَتَانِclock → two clocks
قَلَمقَلَمَانِpen → two pens

Never say the number two

Arabic does not put a number word in front of the noun for two. The ending ـَانِ already carries the meaning. And when the word is the object of a verb, or comes after a preposition, that ending changes to ـَيْنِ.

عِنْدِي كِتَابَانِ.
I have two books.
قَرَأْتُ كِتَابَيْنِ.
I read two books. (object → ـَيْنِ)
فِي الصَّفِّ سَبُّورَتَانِ.
There are two boards in the classroom.

Three or more — the plural

1. Feminine words: add ـَات

SingularPluralEnglish
مُعَلِّمَةمُعَلِّمَاتteacher → teachers (f.)
طَالِبَةطَالِبَاتstudent → students (f.)
سَبُّورَةسَبُّورَاتboard → boards
سَاعَةسَاعَاتclock → clocks

2. Masculine people: add ـُونَ

SingularPluralEnglish
مُعَلِّممُعَلِّمُونَteacher → teachers (m.)
مُسْلِممُسْلِمُونَMuslim → Muslims

3. Broken plurals: the word changes shape inside

SingularPluralEnglishMore
كِتَابكُتُبbook → booksقَلَم ← أَقْلَام
دَفْتَردَفَاتِرnotebook → notebooksبَاب ← أَبْوَاب
طَالِبطُلَّابstudent → studentsصَفّ ← صُفُوف
كُرْسِيّكَرَاسِيّchair → chairsحَقِيبَة ← حَقَائِب
مَدْرَسَةمَدَارِسschool → schoolsوَرَقَة ← أَوْرَاق

Don't panic about broken plurals

There is no rule you can apply — every broken plural is learned together with its singular, exactly like child → children in English. From now on, learn each new noun with its plural.

عِنْدِي كِتَابٌ.
I have a book.
عِنْدِي كُتُبٌ كَثِيرَةٌ.
I have many books.
هـ

School verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ المَدْرَسَة
PastPresentEnglishExample
دَرَسَيَدْرُسُto studyأَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ.
تَعَلَّمَيَتَعَلَّمُto learnنَتَعَلَّمُ كَلِمَاتٍ جَدِيدَةً.
عَلَّمَيُعَلِّمُto teachالمُعَلِّمُ يُعَلِّمُنَا.
كَتَبَيَكْتُبُto writeأَكْتُبُ فِي الدَّفْتَرِ.
قَرَأَيَقْرَأُto readتَقْرَأُ الكِتَابَ.
سَأَلَيَسْأَلُto askسَأَلْتُ المُعَلِّمَ.
أَجَابَيُجِيبُto answerأَجَابَ الطَّالِبُ.
سَمِعَيَسْمَعُto hear, to listenاِسْمَعْ جَيِّدًا.
فَهِمَيَفْهَمُto understandلَا أَفْهَمُ السُّؤَالَ.
حَفِظَيَحْفَظُto memoriseحَفِظْتُ الدَّرْسَ.
نَجَحَيَنْجَحُto pass, to succeedنَجَحَتْ فِي الاخْتِبَارِ.
تَأَخَّرَيَتَأَخَّرُto be lateتَأَخَّرْتُ الْيَوْمَ.
بَدَأَيَبْدَأُto beginيَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ.
انْتَهَىيَنْتَهِيto finish, to endاِنْتَهَتِ الحِصَّةُ.
و

Asking questions

أَدَوَاتُ الاسْتِفْهَام

Put the question word first, exactly as in English. No extra word like do or does is needed.

WordEnglishExampleMeaning
مَنْwhoمَنْ مُعَلِّمُكَ؟Who is your teacher?
مَاwhat (before a noun)مَا اسْمُكَ؟What is your name?
مَاذَاwhat (before a verb)مَاذَا تَدْرُسُ؟What do you study?
أَيْنَwhereأَيْنَ الفَصْلُ؟Where is the classroom?
مَتَىwhenمَتَى يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ؟When does the lesson start?
كَيْفَhowكَيْفَ حَالُكَ؟How are you?
لِمَاذَاwhyلِمَاذَا تَأَخَّرْتَ؟Why were you late?
كَمْhow manyكَمْ طَالِبًا فِي الصَّفِّ؟How many students are in the class?
أَيّwhichأَيُّ كِتَابٍ؟Which book?
هَلْ(yes / no question)هَلْ فَهِمْتَ؟Did you understand?

مَا or مَاذَا?

Use مَا when the next word is a noun. Use مَاذَا when the next word is a verb.

مَا هَذَا؟
What is this? — noun follows
مَاذَا تَكْتُبُ؟
What are you writing? — verb follows

Answering هَلْ

A هَلْ question is answered with نَعَمْ (yes) or لَا (no).

هَلْ عِنْدَكَ قَلَمٌ؟ — نَعَمْ، عِنْدِي قَلَمٌ.
Do you have a pen? — Yes, I have a pen.
هَلْ فَهِمْتِ الدَّرْسَ؟ — لَا، لَمْ أَفْهَمْ.
Did you understand the lesson? — No, I did not.
ز

Classroom language

لُغَةُ الفَصْل

What the teacher says

ArabicEnglish
اِفْتَحُوا كُتُبَكُمْ.Open your books.
أَغْلِقُوا الدَّفَاتِرَ.Close your notebooks.
اُكْتُبُوا فِي الدَّفْتَرِ.Write in your notebook.
اِقْرَأْ، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.Read, please.
اِسْمَعُوا جَيِّدًا.Listen carefully.
اُنْظُرُوا إِلَى السَّبُّورَةِ.Look at the board.
مَنْ يَعْرِفُ الإِجَابَةَ؟Who knows the answer?
أَحْسَنْتَ! / أَحْسَنْتِ!Well done! (to a boy / to a girl)
هَذَا وَاجِبُكُمْ لِلْغَدِ.This is your homework for tomorrow.

What the student says

ArabicEnglish
لَا أَفْهَمُ.I don't understand.
أَعِدْ مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.Please repeat.
مَا مَعْنَى هَذِهِ الكَلِمَةِ؟What does this word mean?
كَيْفَ نَقُولُ … بِالعَرَبِيَّةِ؟How do we say … in Arabic?
هَلْ يُمْكِنُنِي الذَّهَابُ إِلَى الحَمَّامِ؟May I go to the bathroom?
نَسِيتُ وَاجِبِي.I forgot my homework.
عِنْدِي سُؤَالٌ.I have a question.
عَفْوًا، تَأَخَّرْتُ.Sorry, I am late.

A day at school

المُعَلِّم: صَبَاحَ الخَيْرِ يَا طُلَّاب. اِفْتَحُوا كُتُبَكُمْ.
Teacher: Good morning, students. Open your books.
الطُّلَّاب: صَبَاحَ النُّورِ يَا أُسْتَاذ.
Students: Good morning, sir.
يُوسُف: عَفْوًا، تَأَخَّرْتُ. الحَافِلَةُ تَأَخَّرَتْ.
Yusuf: Sorry, I am late. The bus was late.
المُعَلِّم: لَا بَأْسَ، اِجْلِسْ مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
Teacher: No problem, sit down please.
المُعَلِّم: مَنْ يَعْرِفُ مَعْنَى كَلِمَةِ «مَكْتَبَة»؟
Teacher: Who knows the meaning of the word maktaba?
سَلْمَى: أَنَا أَعْرِفُ! مَعْنَاهَا library.
Salma: I know! It means library.
المُعَلِّم: أَحْسَنْتِ يَا سَلْمَى!
Teacher: Well done, Salma!
يُوسُف: عِنْدِي سُؤَالٌ. كَيْفَ نَقُولُ homework بِالعَرَبِيَّةِ؟
Yusuf: I have a question. How do we say homework in Arabic?
المُعَلِّم: نَقُولُ: وَاجِب. اُكْتُبُوا الكَلِمَةَ فِي دَفَاتِرِكُمْ.
Teacher: We say wājib. Write the word in your notebooks.
ح

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. أَنَا طَالِبٌ فِي الصَّفِّ السَّادِسِ.
    I am a student in the sixth grade.
  2. مَدْرَسَتِي كَبِيرَةٌ وَفِيهَا مَكْتَبَةٌ.
    My school is big and it has a library.
  3. فِي حَقِيبَتِي كُتُبٌ وَدَفَاتِرُ وَأَقْلَامٌ.
    In my bag there are books, notebooks and pens.
  4. المُعَلِّمُ يَكْتُبُ عَلَى السَّبُّورَةِ.
    The teacher writes on the board.
  5. نَحْنُ نَتَعَلَّمُ اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ.
    We are learning the Arabic language.
  6. كَمْ طَالِبًا فِي صَفِّكَ؟ — عِنْدَنَا عِشْرُونَ طَالِبًا.
    How many students are in your class? — We have twenty.
  7. مَتَى يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ؟ — يَبْدَأُ فِي الثَّامِنَةِ.
    When does the lesson start? — It starts at eight.
  8. لَا أَفْهَمُ هَذِهِ الكَلِمَةَ، مَا مَعْنَاهَا؟
    I don't understand this word; what does it mean?
  9. أَمْسِ، حَفِظْتُ الدَّرْسَ وَكَتَبْتُ الوَاجِبَ.
    Yesterday, I memorised the lesson and wrote the homework.
  10. فِي حَقِيبَتِي دَفْتَرَانِ وَقَلَمَانِ.
    In my bag there are two notebooks and two pens.
  11. زَمِيلِي يَجْلِسُ بِجَانِبِي فِي الفَصْلِ.
    My classmate sits next to me in the classroom.
  12. نَلْعَبُ فِي المَلْعَبِ بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ.
    We play in the playground after the lesson.
  13. نَجَحَتْ أُخْتِي فِي الاخْتِبَارِ.
    My sister passed the exam.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

مَكْتَبَةدَفْتَرمِسْطَرَة
سَبُّورَةوَاجِبمَلْعَب

مَكْتَبَة = library · دَفْتَر = notebook · مِسْطَرَة = ruler · سَبُّورَة = board · وَاجِب = homework · مَلْعَب = playground

2Write the dual, then the plural.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اكْتُبِ المُثَنَّى ثُمَّ الجَمْع.

  1. كِتَاب →
  2. طَالِبَة →
  3. قَلَم →
  4. مُعَلِّم →
  5. دَفْتَر →
  6. مَدْرَسَة →
١) كِتَابَانِ — كُتُب
٢) طَالِبَتَانِ — طَالِبَات
٣) قَلَمَانِ — أَقْلَام
٤) مُعَلِّمَانِ — مُعَلِّمُونَ
٥) دَفْتَرَانِ — دَفَاتِر
٦) مَدْرَسَتَانِ — مَدَارِس

3Choose the correct question word.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرْ أَدَاةَ الاسْتِفْهَامِ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. اسْمُكَ؟ ( مَا / أَيْنَ )
  2. المَكْتَبَةُ؟ ( مَتَى / أَيْنَ )
  3. تَأَخَّرْتَ؟ ( لِمَاذَا / مَنْ )
  4. طَالِبًا فِي الصَّفِّ؟ ( كَمْ / كَيْفَ )
  5. تَكْتُبُ؟ ( مَا / مَاذَا )
١) مَا ٢) أَيْنَ ٣) لِمَاذَا ٤) كَمْ ٥) مَاذَا

4Put the verb in the present tense.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: ضَعِ الفِعْلَ فِي المُضَارِع.

  1. أَنَا (كَتَبَ) → أَنَا الوَاجِبَ.
  2. هِيَ (قَرَأَ) → هِيَ الكِتَابَ.
  3. نَحْنُ (تَعَلَّمَ) → نَحْنُ العَرَبِيَّةَ.
  4. هُمْ (لَعِبَ) → هُمْ فِي المَلْعَبِ.
  5. أَنْتَ (فَهِمَ) → أَنْتَ الدَّرْسَ.
١) أَكْتُبُ ٢) تَقْرَأُ ٣) نَتَعَلَّمُ ٤) يَلْعَبُونَ ٥) تَفْهَمُ

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

لَا أَفْهَمُ. — عِنْدِي سُؤَالٌ. — أَعِدْ مِنْ فَضْلِكَ. — عَفْوًا، تَأَخَّرْتُ. — مَا مَعْنَى هَذِهِ الكَلِمَةِ؟
  1. You arrive after the lesson has started.
  2. The teacher spoke too fast.
  3. You want to know what a word means.
  4. You want to ask the teacher something.
  5. The explanation was not clear to you.
١) عَفْوًا، تَأَخَّرْتُ.
٢) أَعِدْ مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
٣) مَا مَعْنَى هَذِهِ الكَلِمَةِ؟
٤) عِنْدِي سُؤَالٌ.
٥) لَا أَفْهَمُ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. Where is the library?
  2. I have many books.
  3. The teacher writes on the board.
  4. How many students are in the class?
  5. I don't understand this word.
١) أَيْنَ المَكْتَبَةُ؟
٢) عِنْدِي كُتُبٌ كَثِيرَةٌ.
٣) المُعَلِّمُ يَكْتُبُ عَلَى السَّبُّورَةِ.
٤) كَمْ طَالِبًا فِي الصَّفِّ؟
٥) لَا أَفْهَمُ هَذِهِ الكَلِمَةَ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. library
  2. notebook
  3. board
  4. homework
  5. classmate

Question 2 — Write the dual and the plural. (5 marks)

  1. قَلَم →
  2. مُعَلِّمَة →
  3. طَالِب →
  4. كُرْسِيّ →
  5. بَاب →

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. مُعَلِّمُكَ؟ ( مَنْ / مَا / أَيْنَ )
  2. تَقْرَأُ؟ ( مَا / مَاذَا / كَمْ )
  3. نَحْنُ العَرَبِيَّةَ. ( يَتَعَلَّمُ / نَتَعَلَّمُ / أَتَعَلَّمُ )
  4. أَمْسِ، الوَاجِبَ. ( أَكْتُبُ / كَتَبْتُ / يَكْتُبُ )
  5. فِي حَقِيبَتِي ثَلَاثَةُ . ( كِتَاب / كُتُبٍ / كَاتِب )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your school. Use one question word in one of them. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) مَكْتَبَة ٢) دَفْتَر ٣) سَبُّورَة ٤) وَاجِب ٥) زَمِيل / زَمِيلَة

Question 2

١) قَلَمَانِ — أَقْلَام · ٢) مُعَلِّمَتَانِ — مُعَلِّمَات · ٣) طَالِبَانِ — طُلَّاب
٤) كُرْسِيَّانِ — كَرَاسِيّ · ٥) بَابَانِ — أَبْوَاب

Question 3

١) مَنْ ٢) مَاذَا ٣) نَتَعَلَّمُ ٤) كَتَبْتُ ٥) كُتُبٍ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 4 of 16

الأَرْقَامُ وَالوَقْت

Numbers & Time

Count from zero to a thousand, say the days of the week, tell the time, and talk about when things happen.

In this unit

  • Count from 0 to 100 and read Arabic numerals.
  • Name the seven days of the week and the parts of the day.
  • Ask and answer: What time is it? What day is it today?
  • Use seven time verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitNumbers & CountingAsking QuestionsThe Past TenseThe Present Tense

أ

Numbers 0 to 10

الأَعْدَادُ مِنْ ٠ إِلَى ١٠

Arabic numerals are written left to right, exactly like English numbers, even inside an Arabic sentence.

NumberNumeralWordEnglish
0٠صِفْرzero
1١وَاحِدone
2٢اثْنَانِtwo
3٣ثَلَاثَةthree
4٤أَرْبَعَةfour
5٥خَمْسَةfive
6٦سِتَّةsix
7٧سَبْعَةseven
8٨ثَمَانِيَةeight
9٩تِسْعَةnine
10١٠عَشَرَةten

Two numbers you already know

You met the dual in Grammar 2. The number two is the same idea — and with a noun you normally do not say اثْنَانِ at all. The ending does the counting.

كِتَابٌ وَاحِدٌ
one book
كِتَابَانِ
two books
ب

Numbers 11 to 1,000

الأَعْدَادُ مِنْ ١١ إِلَى ١٠٠٠

From 21 onwards Arabic says the units first and the tens second, joined by وَ — like four-and-twenty in old English.

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
أَحَدَ عَشَرَ11اثْنَا عَشَرَ12
ثَلَاثَةَ عَشَرَ13خَمْسَةَ عَشَرَ15
عِشْرُونَ20ثَلَاثُونَ30
أَرْبَعُونَ40خَمْسُونَ50
سِتُّونَ60سَبْعُونَ70
ثَمَانُونَ80تِسْعُونَ90
مِائَة100أَلْف1,000

Units first, then tens

وَاحِدٌ وَعِشْرُونَ
21 — one and twenty
خَمْسَةٌ وَثَلَاثُونَ
35 — five and thirty
تِسْعَةٌ وَتِسْعُونَ
99 — nine and ninety
ج

Days of the week

أَيَّامُ الأُسْبُوع

The week begins on Sunday. Most day names come from the numbers: الأَحَد from one, الاثْنَيْن from two, الثُّلَاثَاء from three.

DayEnglishComes from
يَوْمُ الأَحَدِSundayone — day one
يَوْمُ الاثْنَيْنِMondaytwo — day two
يَوْمُ الثُّلَاثَاءِTuesdaythree
يَوْمُ الأَرْبِعَاءِWednesdayfour
يَوْمُ الخَمِيسِThursdayfive
يَوْمُ الجُمُعَةِFridaythe day of gathering
يَوْمُ السَّبْتِSaturdaythe day of rest

Talking about days

مَا اليَوْمُ؟
What day is it?
اليَوْمُ يَوْمُ الخَمِيسِ.
Today is Thursday.
غَدًا يَوْمُ الجُمُعَةِ.
Tomorrow is Friday.
د

Words for time

كَلِمَاتُ الوَقْت
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
وَقْتtimeسَاعَةhour, clock
دَقِيقَةminuteنِصْفhalf
رُبْعquarterإِلَّاminus, to (the hour)
صَبَاحmorningظُهْرnoon
مَسَاءeveningلَيْلnight
اليَوْمَtodayأَمْسِyesterday
غَدًاtomorrowالآنَnow
أُسْبُوعweekشَهْرmonth
سَنَةyearمُبَكِّرًاearly
هـ

Telling the time

كَمِ السَّاعَةُ؟

To tell the time Arabic uses ordinal numbers — the third hour, the fourth hour — with ال in front.

ArabicTime
السَّاعَةُ الوَاحِدَةُ1:00
السَّاعَةُ الثَّانِيَةُ2:00
السَّاعَةُ الثَّالِثَةُ3:00
السَّاعَةُ الرَّابِعَةُ4:00
السَّاعَةُ الخَامِسَةُ5:00
السَّاعَةُ السَّادِسَةُ6:00
السَّاعَةُ السَّابِعَةُ7:00
السَّاعَةُ الثَّامِنَةُ8:00
السَّاعَةُ التَّاسِعَةُ9:00
السَّاعَةُ العَاشِرَةُ10:00
السَّاعَةُ الحَادِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ11:00
السَّاعَةُ الثَّانِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ12:00

Half past, quarter past, quarter to

Add the fraction after the hour with وَ (and). For quarter to, use إِلَّا (minus).

السَّاعَةُ الثَّالِثَةُ وَالنِّصْفُ
3:30 — three and a half
السَّاعَةُ الثَّالِثَةُ وَالرُّبْعُ
3:15 — three and a quarter
السَّاعَةُ الرَّابِعَةُ إِلَّا رُبْعًا
3:45 — four minus a quarter
فِي السَّاعَةِ الثَّامِنَةِ
at eight o'clock
و

Time verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ الوَقْت

These verbs answer the question when? Then one of them is shown with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
ذَهَبَيَذْهَبُto goأَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ صَبَاحًا.
رَجَعَيَرْجِعُto come backيَرْجِعُ أَبِي مَسَاءً.
وَصَلَيَصِلُto arriveوَصَلْتُ فِي السَّاعَةِ الثَّامِنَةِ.
انْتَظَرَيَنْتَظِرُto waitنَنْتَظِرُ الحَافِلَةَ.
عَدَّيَعُدُّto countأَعُدُّ مِنْ وَاحِدٍ إِلَى عَشَرَةٍ.
بَدَأَيَبْدَأُto beginيَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ فِي التَّاسِعَةِ.
انْتَهَىيَنْتَهِيto endانْتَهَى اليَوْمُ الدِّرَاسِيُّ.

One verb, all the pronouns: ذَهَبَ / يَذْهَبُ (to go)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاذَهَبْتُأَذْهَبُI go
أَنْتَذَهَبْتَتَذْهَبُyou go (m.)
أَنْتِذَهَبْتِتَذْهَبِينَyou go (f.)
هُوَذَهَبَيَذْهَبُhe goes
هِيَذَهَبَتْتَذْهَبُshe goes
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاذَهَبْتُمَاتَذْهَبَانِyou two go
هُمَاذَهَبَايَذْهَبَانِthe two of them go
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُذَهَبْنَانَذْهَبُwe go
أَنْتُمْذَهَبْتُمْتَذْهَبُونَyou go (pl.)
هُمْذَهَبُوايَذْهَبُونَthey go
ز

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
آدَم: يَا عُمَرُ، كَمِ السَّاعَةُ الآنَ؟
Adam: Omar, what time is it now?
عُمَر: السَّاعَةُ الثَّامِنَةُ إِلَّا رُبْعًا.
Omar: It is a quarter to eight.
آدَم: مَتَى يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ؟
Adam: When does the lesson start?
عُمَر: يَبْدَأُ فِي السَّاعَةِ الثَّامِنَةِ.
Omar: It starts at eight o'clock.
آدَم: وَمَا اليَوْمُ؟
Adam: And what day is it?
عُمَر: اليَوْمُ يَوْمُ الخَمِيسِ، وَغَدًا يَوْمُ الجُمُعَةِ.
Omar: Today is Thursday, and tomorrow is Friday.

Model sentences

  1. أَعُدُّ مِنْ وَاحِدٍ إِلَى مِائَةٍ.
    I count from one to a hundred.
  2. فِي الأُسْبُوعِ سَبْعَةُ أَيَّامٍ.
    There are seven days in a week.
  3. فِي السَّنَةِ اثْنَا عَشَرَ شَهْرًا.
    There are twelve months in a year.
  4. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ يَوْمَ الاثْنَيْنِ.
    I go to school on Monday.
  5. نُصَلِّي الجُمُعَةَ فِي المَسْجِدِ.
    We pray the Friday prayer at the masjid.
  6. أَسْتَيْقِظُ فِي السَّاعَةِ السَّادِسَةِ وَالنِّصْفِ.
    I wake up at half past six.
  7. رَجَعَ أَبِي مِنَ العَمَلِ مَسَاءً.
    My father came back from work in the evening.
  8. وَصَلْنَا مُبَكِّرًا، وَانْتَظَرْنَا المُعَلِّمَ.
    We arrived early, and we waited for the teacher.
  9. كَمْ عُمْرُكَ؟ — عُمْرِي عَشْرُ سَنَوَاتٍ.
    How old are you? — I am ten years old.
  10. الدَّرْسُ سَاعَةٌ وَاحِدَةٌ.
    The lesson is one hour long.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write each number in Arabic numerals.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ الرَّقْمَ.

WordNumeralWordNumeral
سَبْعَةعِشْرُونَ
تِسْعَةخَمْسُونَ
أَرْبَعَةمِائَة
سَبْعَة ٧ · تِسْعَة ٩ · أَرْبَعَة ٤ · عِشْرُونَ ٢٠ · خَمْسُونَ ٥٠ · مِائَة ١٠٠

2Which day comes next?

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: مَا اليَوْمُ التَّالِي؟

  1. اليَوْمُ يَوْمُ الأَحَدِ، وَغَدًا يَوْمُ .
  2. اليَوْمُ يَوْمُ الأَرْبِعَاءِ، وَغَدًا يَوْمُ .
  3. اليَوْمُ يَوْمُ الجُمُعَةِ، وَغَدًا يَوْمُ .
  4. اليَوْمُ يَوْمُ السَّبْتِ، وَغَدًا يَوْمُ .
١) الاثْنَيْنِ ٢) الخَمِيسِ ٣) السَّبْتِ ٤) الأَحَدِ

3What time is it? Write the time in Arabic.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: كَمِ السَّاعَةُ؟

  1. 5:00
  2. 9:30
  3. 2:15
  4. 7:45
  5. 12:00
١) السَّاعَةُ الخَامِسَةُ.
٢) السَّاعَةُ التَّاسِعَةُ وَالنِّصْفُ.
٣) السَّاعَةُ الثَّانِيَةُ وَالرُّبْعُ.
٤) السَّاعَةُ الثَّامِنَةُ إِلَّا رُبْعًا.
٥) السَّاعَةُ الثَّانِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ.

4Choose the right form of ذَهَبَ / يَذْهَبُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ. ( أَذْهَبُ / يَذْهَبُ )
  2. هِيَ إِلَى السُّوقِ أَمْسِ. ( ذَهَبَتْ / ذَهَبْتُ )
  3. هُمَا مَعًا. ( يَذْهَبُونَ / يَذْهَبَانِ )
  4. نَحْنُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ. ( نَذْهَبُ / تَذْهَبُ )
  5. أَنْتِ مُبَكِّرًا. ( تَذْهَبِينَ / تَذْهَبُ )
١) أَذْهَبُ ٢) ذَهَبَتْ ٣) يَذْهَبَانِ ٤) نَذْهَبُ ٥) تَذْهَبِينَ

5Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

أَمْسِغَدًامَسَاء
أُسْبُوعدَقِيقَةنِصْف

أَمْسِ = yesterday · غَدًا = tomorrow · مَسَاء = evening · أُسْبُوع = week · دَقِيقَة = minute · نِصْف = half

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. What time is it?
  2. Today is Monday.
  3. The lesson starts at nine o'clock.
  4. I went to school yesterday.
  5. There are seven days in a week.
١) كَمِ السَّاعَةُ؟
٢) اليَوْمُ يَوْمُ الاثْنَيْنِ.
٣) يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ فِي السَّاعَةِ التَّاسِعَةِ.
٤) ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ أَمْسِ.
٥) فِي الأُسْبُوعِ سَبْعَةُ أَيَّامٍ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the number in Arabic words. (5 marks)

  1. 3
  2. 8
  3. 10
  4. 30
  5. 100

Question 2 — Write the Arabic day. (5 marks)

  1. Friday
  2. Sunday
  3. Tuesday
  4. Saturday
  5. Thursday

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. السَّاعَةُ وَالنِّصْفُ. ( الثَّالِثَةُ / ثَلَاثَة / ثَلَاثُونَ )
  2. أَمْسِ إِلَى البَيْتِ مُبَكِّرًا. ( أَرْجِعُ / رَجَعْتُ / يَرْجِعُ )
  3. يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ؟ ( مَتَى / مَنْ / أَيْنَ )
  4. فِي السَّنَةِ اثْنَا عَشَرَ . ( شَهْرًا / يَوْمًا / سَاعَةً )
  5. هُمَا الحَافِلَةَ. ( يَنْتَظِرُ / يَنْتَظِرَانِ / نَنْتَظِرُ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your week. Say what you do and on which day. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) ثَلَاثَة ٢) ثَمَانِيَة ٣) عَشَرَة ٤) ثَلَاثُونَ ٥) مِائَة

Question 2

١) الجُمُعَة ٢) الأَحَد ٣) الثُّلَاثَاء ٤) السَّبْت ٥) الخَمِيس

Question 3

١) الثَّالِثَةُ ٢) رَجَعْتُ ٣) مَتَى ٤) شَهْرًا ٥) يَنْتَظِرَانِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 5 of 16

الطَّعَامُ وَالشَّرَاب

Food & Drink

Name the food and drink on your table, talk about meals, say what you like and what you don't, and ask for something to eat.

In this unit

  • Name about forty foods, drinks, fruits and vegetables.
  • Talk about breakfast, lunch and dinner.
  • Say I am hungry, I am thirsty, and I like / I don't like.
  • Use eight food verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitThe Present TenseSaying No: NegationWant to, Like to, CanSingular, Dual & Plural

أ

Food

الطَّعَام
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
طَعَامfoodخُبْزbread
أَرُزّriceلَحْمmeat
دَجَاجchickenسَمَكfish
بَيْضeggsجُبْنcheese
زُبْدَةbutterعَسَلhoney
حَسَاءsoupسَلَطَةsalad
سُكَّرsugarمِلْحsalt
فَوَاكِهfruitخُضَارvegetables

Halal food

Muslims eat halal food. حَلَال means permitted and حَرَام means forbidden. Before eating we say the name of Allah, and after eating we thank Him.

هَذَا اللَّحْمُ حَلَالٌ.
This meat is halal.
بِسْمِ اللهِ.
In the name of Allah. — said before eating
الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ.
All praise is for Allah. — said after eating
ب

Fruit and vegetables

الفَوَاكِهُ وَالخُضَار
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
تُفَّاحapplesمَوْزbananas
بُرْتُقَالorangesعِنَبgrapes
فَرَاوِلَةstrawberriesبِطِّيخwatermelon
تَمْرdatesلَيْمُونlemons
طَمَاطِمtomatoesخِيَارcucumbers
بَطَاطِسpotatoesجَزَرcarrots
بَصَلonionsخَسّlettuce

One apple, many apples

Many fruits and foods are group words: تُفَّاح means apples in general. To talk about one piece, add ة to the end.

تُفَّاح ← تُفَّاحَة
apples → one apple
مَوْز ← مَوْزَة
bananas → one banana
بَيْض ← بَيْضَة
eggs → one egg
تَمْر ← تَمْرَة
dates → one date
أَكَلْتُ تُفَّاحَةً وَاحِدَةً.
I ate one apple.
ج

Drinks, meals and the table

المَشْرُوبَاتُ وَالوَجَبَات
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
مَاءwaterحَلِيبmilk
عَصِيرjuiceشَايtea
قَهْوَةcoffeeوَجْبَةmeal
فَطُورbreakfastغَدَاءlunch
عَشَاءdinnerمَطْعَمrestaurant
شَوْكَةforkمِنْدِيلnapkin

How do you feel?

MaleFemaleEnglish
جَائِعجَائِعَةhungry
عَطْشَانعَطْشَىthirsty
شَبْعَانشَبْعَىfull

Liking and not liking

Use أُحِبُّ for I like and لَا أُحِبُّ for I don't like. The food comes after with ال. See Grammar 14 for لَا.

أُحِبُّ السَّمَكَ.
I like fish.
لَا أُحِبُّ البَصَلَ.
I don't like onions.
هَذَا الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ!
This food is delicious!
د

Food verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ الطَّعَام

Eight verbs for the kitchen and the table, then one of them with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
أَكَلَيَأْكُلُto eatآكُلُ الفَطُورَ فِي السَّابِعَةِ.
شَرِبَيَشْرَبُto drinkأَشْرَبُ الحَلِيبَ كُلَّ صَبَاحٍ.
طَبَخَيَطْبُخُto cookتَطْبُخُ أُمِّي الأَرُزَّ.
جَاعَيَجُوعُto get hungryجَاعَ أَخِي بَعْدَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
أَحَبَّيُحِبُّto like, to loveأُحِبُّ التُّفَّاحَ.
طَلَبَيَطْلُبُto order, to ask forطَلَبْتُ عَصِيرَ بُرْتُقَالٍ.
غَسَلَيَغْسِلُto washنَغْسِلُ الفَوَاكِهَ قَبْلَ الأَكْلِ.
قَطَعَيَقْطَعُto cutيَقْطَعُ أَبِي الخُبْزَ.

One verb, all the pronouns: أَكَلَ / يَأْكُلُ (to eat)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاأَكَلْتُآكُلُI eat
أَنْتَأَكَلْتَتَأْكُلُyou eat (m.)
أَنْتِأَكَلْتِتَأْكُلِينَyou eat (f.)
هُوَأَكَلَيَأْكُلُhe eats
هِيَأَكَلَتْتَأْكُلُshe eats
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاأَكَلْتُمَاتَأْكُلَانِyou two eat
هُمَاأَكَلَايَأْكُلَانِthe two of them eat
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُأَكَلْنَانَأْكُلُwe eat
أَنْتُمْأَكَلْتُمْتَأْكُلُونَyou eat (pl.)
هُمْأَكَلُوايَأْكُلُونَthey eat

Why آكُلُ and not أَأْكُلُ?

When the I-letter أَ meets the first letter of أَكَلَ, the two hamzas join into one long آ.

أَ + أْكُلُ ← آكُلُ
I eat
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
الأُمّ: هَلْ أَنْتَ جَائِعٌ يَا يُوسُفُ؟
Mother: Are you hungry, Yusuf?
يُوسُف: نَعَمْ، أَنَا جَائِعٌ جِدًّا! مَاذَا لِلْغَدَاءِ؟
Yusuf: Yes, I am very hungry! What is for lunch?
الأُمّ: دَجَاجٌ وَأَرُزٌّ وَسَلَطَةٌ.
Mother: Chicken, rice and salad.
يُوسُف: لَذِيذٌ! وَمَاذَا نَشْرَبُ؟
Yusuf: Delicious! And what will we drink?
الأُمّ: عِنْدَنَا عَصِيرُ بُرْتُقَالٍ وَمَاءٌ.
Mother: We have orange juice and water.
يُوسُف: أُرِيدُ عَصِيرًا، مِنْ فَضْلِكِ.
Yusuf: I would like juice, please.
الأُمّ: تَفَضَّلْ. قُلْ: بِسْمِ اللهِ.
Mother: Here you are. Say: Bismillah.

Model sentences

  1. آكُلُ الفَطُورَ مَعَ عَائِلَتِي.
    I eat breakfast with my family.
  2. أَشْرَبُ كُوبًا مِنَ الحَلِيبِ كُلَّ صَبَاحٍ.
    I drink a glass of milk every morning.
  3. تَطْبُخُ أُمِّي الدَّجَاجَ وَالأَرُزَّ.
    My mother cooks chicken and rice.
  4. أُحِبُّ التُّفَّاحَ وَالمَوْزَ.
    I like apples and bananas.
  5. لَا أُحِبُّ البَصَلَ.
    I don't like onions.
  6. أَنَا جَائِعٌ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ آكُلَ.
    I am hungry; I want to eat.
  7. هِيَ عَطْشَى، تُرِيدُ مَاءً.
    She is thirsty; she wants water.
  8. هَذَا الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ جِدًّا.
    This food is very delicious.
  9. نَأْكُلُ العَشَاءَ فِي السَّاعَةِ السَّابِعَةِ.
    We eat dinner at seven o'clock.
  10. أَمْسِ، أَكَلْنَا سَمَكًا فِي المَطْعَمِ.
    Yesterday, we ate fish at the restaurant.
  11. غَسَلْتُ الخُضَارَ قَبْلَ الطَّبْخِ.
    I washed the vegetables before cooking.
  12. نَقُولُ «بِسْمِ اللهِ» قَبْلَ الأَكْلِ.
    We say Bismillah before eating.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

خُبْزجُبْنعَصِير
بَصَلغَدَاءلَذِيذ

خُبْز = bread · جُبْن = cheese · عَصِير = juice · بَصَل = onions · غَدَاء = lunch · لَذِيذ = delicious

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

الحَلِيبَ — الخُبْزَ — جَائِعٌ — عَطْشَانُ — العَشَاءَ
  1. أَنَا ، أُرِيدُ مَاءً.
  2. أَنَا ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ آكُلَ.
  3. أَشْرَبُ فِي الصَّبَاحِ.
  4. نَأْكُلُ فِي المَسَاءِ.
  5. يَقْطَعُ أَبِي بِالسِّكِّينِ.
١) عَطْشَانُ ٢) جَائِعٌ ٣) الحَلِيبَ ٤) العَشَاءَ ٥) الخُبْزَ

3Write the word for one piece.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اكْتُبِ المُفْرَد.

  1. تُفَّاح ← (one apple)
  2. مَوْز ← (one banana)
  3. بَيْض ← (one egg)
  4. تَمْر ← (one date)
  5. بُرْتُقَال ← (one orange)
١) تُفَّاحَة ٢) مَوْزَة ٣) بَيْضَة ٤) تَمْرَة ٥) بُرْتُقَالَة

4Choose the right form of أَكَلَ / يَأْكُلُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا التُّفَّاحَ. ( آكُلُ / يَأْكُلُ )
  2. هُمْ الغَدَاءَ الآنَ. ( يَأْكُلُونَ / تَأْكُلُ )
  3. هِيَ سَمَكًا أَمْسِ. ( أَكَلَتْ / أَكَلْتُ )
  4. أَنْتُمَا مَعًا. ( تَأْكُلَانِ / يَأْكُلُونَ )
  5. أَنْتِ الخُبْزَ. ( تَأْكُلِينَ / تَأْكُلُ )
١) آكُلُ ٢) يَأْكُلُونَ ٣) أَكَلَتْ ٤) تَأْكُلَانِ ٥) تَأْكُلِينَ

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

بِسْمِ اللهِ. — الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ. — أَنَا جَائِعٌ. — أَنَا عَطْشَانُ. — هَذَا لَذِيذٌ!
  1. You are about to start eating.
  2. You have just finished your meal.
  3. You want a glass of water.
  4. You have not eaten since the morning.
  5. You really like the food.
١) بِسْمِ اللهِ.
٢) الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ.
٣) أَنَا عَطْشَانُ.
٤) أَنَا جَائِعٌ.
٥) هَذَا لَذِيذٌ!

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I drink tea.
  2. My mother cooks fish.
  3. I like bananas.
  4. We eat lunch at school.
  5. This food is halal.
١) أَشْرَبُ الشَّايَ.
٢) تَطْبُخُ أُمِّي السَّمَكَ.
٣) أُحِبُّ المَوْزَ.
٤) نَأْكُلُ الغَدَاءَ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
٥) هَذَا الطَّعَامُ حَلَالٌ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. water
  2. bread
  3. apples
  4. breakfast
  5. chicken

Question 2 — Write the English meaning. (5 marks)

عَشَاءسَمَكجَزَر
حَلِيبعِنَب

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أُمِّي الطَّعَامَ. ( تَطْبُخُ / يَطْبُخُ / أَطْبُخُ )
  2. هِيَ ، تُرِيدُ مَاءً. ( عَطْشَى / عَطْشَانُ / شَبْعَانُ )
  3. أَمْسِ، الغَدَاءَ فِي المَطْعَمِ. ( نَأْكُلُ / أَكَلْنَا / يَأْكُلُ )
  4. هُمَا العَصِيرَ. ( يَشْرَبَانِ / يَشْرَبُونَ / تَشْرَبُ )
  5. تُحِبُّ؟ — أُحِبُّ السَّمَكَ. ( مَاذَا / مَنْ / أَيْنَ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about what you eat and drink in one day. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) مَاء ٢) خُبْز ٣) تُفَّاح ٤) فَطُور ٥) دَجَاج

Question 2

عَشَاء = dinner · سَمَك = fish · جَزَر = carrots · حَلِيب = milk · عِنَب = grapes

Question 3

١) تَطْبُخُ ٢) عَطْشَى ٣) أَكَلْنَا ٤) يَشْرَبَانِ ٥) مَاذَا

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 6 of 16

التَّسَوُّق

Shopping

Find your way around an American supermarket, ask how much something costs, say prices in dollars, and pay at the checkout.

In this unit

  • Name the things and people you meet in a supermarket.
  • Ask بِكَمْ هَذَا؟ and understand the answer.
  • Say prices from one dollar to a hundred.
  • Use eight shopping verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitNumbers & CountingAsking QuestionsThe Past TenseThe Present Tense

أ

At the supermarket

فِي المَتْجَر
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
مَتْجَرstore, supermarketسُوقmarket
عَرَبَةcartسَلَّةbasket
رَفّshelfقِسْمaisle, section
صُنْدُوقُ الدَّفْعِcheckoutكِيسbag
إِيصَالreceiptبِطَاقَةcard
نُقُودmoneyقَائِمَةُ المُشْتَرَيَاتِshopping list

People in the store

MaleEnglishFemaleEnglish
مُحَاسِبcashierمُحَاسِبَةcashier (f.)
زَبُونcustomerزَبُونَةcustomer (f.)
بَائِعsalesman, sellerبَائِعَةsaleswoman
ب

Money and prices

النُّقُودُ وَالأَسْعَار
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
دُولَارdollarسِنْتcent
سِعْرpriceالمَجْمُوعthe total
رَخِيصcheapغَالٍexpensive
تَخْفِيضsale, discountنَقْدًاin cash

Saying a price

ArabicPrice
دُولَارٌ وَاحِدٌ$1
دُولَارَانِ$2
ثَلَاثَةُ دُولَارَاتٍ$3
خَمْسَةُ دُولَارَاتٍ$5
عَشَرَةُ دُولَارَاتٍ$10
عِشْرُونَ دُولَارًا$20
مِائَةُ دُولَارٍ$100

Three patterns for prices

Look at the noun after the number: from 3 to 10 it is plural (دُولَارَاتٍ), from 11 to 99 it is singular with ـًا (دُولَارًا), and after مِائَة it is singular (دُولَارٍ). The full rules are in Grammar 17.

بِكَمْ هَذَا؟
How much is this?
هَذَا بِخَمْسَةِ دُولَارَاتٍ.
This is five dollars.
هَذَا رَخِيصٌ، وَذَلِكَ غَالٍ.
This is cheap, and that is expensive.
ج

Shopping verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ التَّسَوُّق

Eight verbs for a trip to the store, then one of them with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
اشْتَرَىيَشْتَرِيto buyاشْتَرَيْتُ خُبْزًا وَحَلِيبًا.
بَاعَيَبِيعُto sellيَبِيعُ المَتْجَرُ الفَوَاكِهَ.
دَفَعَيَدْفَعُto payدَفَعَ أَبِي بِالبِطَاقَةِ.
اخْتَارَيَخْتَارُto chooseتَخْتَارُ أُخْتِي التُّفَّاحَ الأَحْمَرَ.
وَجَدَيَجِدُto findوَجَدْتُ الأَرُزَّ فِي القِسْمِ الخَامِسِ.
بَحَثَيَبْحَثُto look forأَبْحَثُ عَنِ الحَلِيبِ.
وَضَعَيَضَعُto putأَضَعُ الخُبْزَ فِي السَّلَّةِ.
حَمَلَيَحْمِلُto carryنَحْمِلُ الأَكْيَاسَ إِلَى السَّيَّارَةِ.

Two verbs that change shape

اشْتَرَى and بَاعَ are weak verbs: a letter changes inside them. Learn the forms you need most:

اشْتَرَيْتُ · أَشْتَرِي
I bought · I buy
بِعْتُ · أَبِيعُ
I sold · I sell

One verb, all the pronouns: دَفَعَ / يَدْفَعُ (to pay)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَادَفَعْتُأَدْفَعُI pay
أَنْتَدَفَعْتَتَدْفَعُyou pay (m.)
أَنْتِدَفَعْتِتَدْفَعِينَyou pay (f.)
هُوَدَفَعَيَدْفَعُhe pays
هِيَدَفَعَتْتَدْفَعُshe pays
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَادَفَعْتُمَاتَدْفَعَانِyou two pay
هُمَادَفَعَايَدْفَعَانِthe two of them pay
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُدَفَعْنَانَدْفَعُwe pay
أَنْتُمْدَفَعْتُمْتَدْفَعُونَyou pay (pl.)
هُمْدَفَعُوايَدْفَعُونَthey pay
د

Useful phrases in a store

عِبَارَاتٌ مُفِيدَة
ArabicEnglish
بِكَمْ هَذَا؟How much is this?
أُرِيدُ كِيسًا، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.I would like a bag, please.
أَيْنَ الحَلِيبُ؟Where is the milk?
فِي القِسْمِ الثَّالِثِ.In aisle three.
هَلْ عِنْدَكُمْ تَمْرٌ؟Do you have dates?
كَيْفَ تَدْفَعُ؟ — بِالبِطَاقَةِ.How are you paying? — By card.
هَذَا غَالٍ جِدًّا!This is very expensive!
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
المُحَاسِبَة: السَّلَامُ عَلَيْكُمْ. هَلْ وَجَدْتَ كُلَّ شَيْءٍ؟
Cashier: Peace be upon you. Did you find everything?
عَلِيّ: وَعَلَيْكُمُ السَّلَامُ. نَعَمْ، شُكْرًا. بِكَمْ هَذَا الجُبْنُ؟
Ali: And peace be upon you. Yes, thank you. How much is this cheese?
المُحَاسِبَة: بِأَرْبَعَةِ دُولَارَاتٍ.
Cashier: Four dollars.
عَلِيّ: وَكَمِ المَجْمُوعُ؟
Ali: And how much is the total?
المُحَاسِبَة: عِشْرُونَ دُولَارًا. كَيْفَ تَدْفَعُ؟
Cashier: Twenty dollars. How are you paying?
عَلِيّ: بِالبِطَاقَةِ. وَأُرِيدُ كِيسًا، مِنْ فَضْلِكِ.
Ali: By card. And I would like a bag, please.
المُحَاسِبَة: تَفَضَّلْ. هَذَا الإِيصَالُ.
Cashier: Here you are. This is the receipt.

Model sentences

  1. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَتْجَرِ مَعَ أُمِّي يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ.
    I go to the store with my mother on Saturday.
  2. أَكْتُبُ قَائِمَةَ المُشْتَرَيَاتِ قَبْلَ التَّسَوُّقِ.
    I write the shopping list before shopping.
  3. نَضَعُ الطَّعَامَ فِي العَرَبَةِ.
    We put the food in the cart.
  4. بِكَمْ هَذَا الكِتَابُ؟ — بِعَشَرَةِ دُولَارَاتٍ.
    How much is this book? — Ten dollars.
  5. هَذَا رَخِيصٌ، وَذَلِكَ غَالٍ.
    This is cheap, and that is expensive.
  6. اشْتَرَيْتُ حَلِيبًا وَخُبْزًا وَبَيْضًا.
    I bought milk, bread and eggs.
  7. دَفَعَ أَبِي بِالبِطَاقَةِ.
    My father paid by card.
  8. اليَوْمَ تَخْفِيضٌ عَلَى الفَوَاكِهِ.
    Today there is a sale on fruit.
  9. أَيْنَ الأَرُزُّ؟ — فِي القِسْمِ الرَّابِعِ.
    Where is the rice? — In aisle four.
  10. أَعْطَتْنِي المُحَاسِبَةُ الإِيصَالَ.
    The cashier gave me the receipt.
  11. حَمَلْنَا الأَكْيَاسَ إِلَى السَّيَّارَةِ.
    We carried the bags to the car.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

عَرَبَةرَفّإِيصَال
رَخِيصمُحَاسِبتَخْفِيض

عَرَبَة = cart · رَفّ = shelf · إِيصَال = receipt · رَخِيص = cheap · مُحَاسِب = cashier · تَخْفِيض = sale

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

العَرَبَةِ — بِكَمْ — بِالبِطَاقَةِ — الإِيصَالَ — غَالٍ
  1. هَذَا؟
  2. نَضَعُ الطَّعَامَ فِي .
  3. دَفَعْتُ .
  4. هَذَا القَمِيصُ جِدًّا.
  5. أَعْطَتْنِي المُحَاسِبَةُ .
١) بِكَمْ ٢) العَرَبَةِ ٣) بِالبِطَاقَةِ ٤) غَالٍ ٥) الإِيصَالَ

3Choose the right form of دَفَعَ / يَدْفَعُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا نَقْدًا. ( أَدْفَعُ / يَدْفَعُ )
  2. هِيَ بِالبِطَاقَةِ أَمْسِ. ( دَفَعَتْ / دَفَعْتُ )
  3. نَحْنُ الآنَ. ( نَدْفَعُ / تَدْفَعُونَ )
  4. هُمْ عِشْرِينَ دُولَارًا. ( دَفَعُوا / دَفَعَا )
  5. هُمَا مَعًا. ( يَدْفَعَانِ / يَدْفَعُونَ )
١) أَدْفَعُ ٢) دَفَعَتْ ٣) نَدْفَعُ ٤) دَفَعُوا ٥) يَدْفَعَانِ

4Write each price in Arabic words.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اكْتُبِ السِّعْرَ بِالكَلِمَات.

  1. $1
  2. $2
  3. $5
  4. $10
  5. $20
١) دُولَارٌ وَاحِدٌ
٢) دُولَارَانِ
٣) خَمْسَةُ دُولَارَاتٍ
٤) عَشَرَةُ دُولَارَاتٍ
٥) عِشْرُونَ دُولَارًا

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

بِكَمْ هَذَا؟ — أُرِيدُ كِيسًا، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ. — أَيْنَ الحَلِيبُ؟ — هَذَا غَالٍ جِدًّا! — بِالبِطَاقَةِ.
  1. You want to know the price of something.
  2. You need a bag for your shopping.
  3. You cannot find the milk.
  4. The price is much too high.
  5. The cashier asks how you will pay.
١) بِكَمْ هَذَا؟
٢) أُرِيدُ كِيسًا، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
٣) أَيْنَ الحَلِيبُ؟
٤) هَذَا غَالٍ جِدًّا!
٥) بِالبِطَاقَةِ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. How much is this?
  2. I bought bread and milk.
  3. The cart is big.
  4. My father paid by card.
  5. This book is cheap.
١) بِكَمْ هَذَا؟
٢) اشْتَرَيْتُ خُبْزًا وَحَلِيبًا.
٣) العَرَبَةُ كَبِيرَةٌ.
٤) دَفَعَ أَبِي بِالبِطَاقَةِ.
٥) هَذَا الكِتَابُ رَخِيصٌ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. price
  2. cart
  3. bag
  4. receipt
  5. cheap

Question 2 — Write each price in Arabic words. (5 marks)

  1. $3
  2. $2
  3. $10
  4. $20
  5. $1

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. هَذَا الجُبْنُ؟ ( بِكَمْ / أَيْنَ / مَنْ )
  2. أَمْسِ، خُبْزًا. ( أَشْتَرِي / اشْتَرَيْتُ / يَشْتَرِي )
  3. هَذَا لَيْسَ رَخِيصًا، هُوَ . ( غَالٍ / نَقْدًا / رَخِيصٌ )
  4. هُمْ بِالبِطَاقَةِ. ( يَدْفَعُونَ / يَدْفَعُ / نَدْفَعُ )
  5. نَضَعُ الطَّعَامَ فِي . ( السَّلَّةِ / الإِيصَالِ / السِّعْرِ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about a trip to the supermarket. Say what you bought and how much it cost. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) سِعْر ٢) عَرَبَة ٣) كِيس ٤) إِيصَال ٥) رَخِيص

Question 2

١) ثَلَاثَةُ دُولَارَاتٍ ٢) دُولَارَانِ ٣) عَشَرَةُ دُولَارَاتٍ ٤) عِشْرُونَ دُولَارًا ٥) دُولَارٌ وَاحِدٌ

Question 3

١) بِكَمْ ٢) اشْتَرَيْتُ ٣) غَالٍ ٤) يَدْفَعُونَ ٥) السَّلَّةِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 7 of 16

المَلَابِسُ وَالأَلْوَان

Clothes & Colours

Name the clothes you wear every day and for special occasions, describe them with colours and other adjectives, and talk about getting dressed.

In this unit

  • Name about twenty items of clothing.
  • Use eleven colours, with their masculine and feminine forms.
  • Describe clothes: new, old, long, short, tight, loose.
  • Use eight clothing verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitMasculine & FeminineAdjectives & AgreementThe Present TenseThe Past Tense

أ

Clothes

المَلَابِس
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
مَلَابِسclothesقَمِيصshirt
بِنْطَالtrousers, pantsفُسْتَانdress
تَنُّورَةskirtسُتْرَةjacket
مِعْطَفcoatحِذَاءshoe, pair of shoes
جَوَارِبsocksقُبَّعَةhat, cap
وِشَاحscarfقُفَّازglove
حِزَامbeltنَظَّارَةglasses
ثَوْبthobe, long robeحِجَابhijab
عَبَاءَةabayaالزِّيُّ المَدْرَسِيُّschool uniform
ب

Colours

الأَلْوَان

The six basic colours have a special feminine form ending in ـَاء. Other colours end in ـِيّ and simply add ة for the feminine.

MasculineFeminineEnglish
أَحْمَرحَمْرَاءred
أَزْرَقزَرْقَاءblue
أَخْضَرخَضْرَاءgreen
أَصْفَرصَفْرَاءyellow
أَبْيَضبَيْضَاءwhite
أَسْوَدسَوْدَاءblack
بُنِّيّبُنِّيَّةbrown
رَمَادِيّرَمَادِيَّةgrey
بُرْتُقَالِيّبُرْتُقَالِيَّةorange
وَرْدِيّوَرْدِيَّةpink
بَنَفْسَجِيّبَنَفْسَجِيَّةpurple

The colour follows the noun

A colour comes after the noun and matches it: a masculine noun takes the masculine colour, a feminine noun takes the feminine colour. If the noun has ال, the colour has ال too. See Grammar 6 and Grammar 7.

قَمِيصٌ أَحْمَرُ
a red shirt
تَنُّورَةٌ حَمْرَاءُ
a red skirt
الحِذَاءُ الأَسْوَدُ
the black shoes
القُبَّعَةُ الزَّرْقَاءُ
the blue cap

Asking about colour

مَا لَوْنُ قَمِيصِكَ؟
What colour is your shirt?
لَوْنُهُ أَزْرَقُ.
It is blue. — its colour is blue
ج

Describing clothes

وَصْفُ المَلَابِس
MasculineFeminineEnglish
جَدِيدجَدِيدَةnew
قَدِيمقَدِيمَةold
طَوِيلطَوِيلَةlong
قَصِيرقَصِيرَةshort
وَاسِعوَاسِعَةloose, wide
ضَيِّقضَيِّقَةtight
نَظِيفنَظِيفَةclean
جَمِيلجَمِيلَةbeautiful
د

Clothing verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ المَلَابِس

Eight verbs for getting dressed and looking after your clothes, then one of them with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
لَبِسَيَلْبَسُto wear, to put onأَلْبَسُ الزِّيَّ المَدْرَسِيَّ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
خَلَعَيَخْلَعُto take offنَخْلَعُ الأَحْذِيَةَ قَبْلَ دُخُولِ المَسْجِدِ.
غَسَلَيَغْسِلُto washتَغْسِلُ أُمِّي المَلَابِسَ.
اشْتَرَىيَشْتَرِيto buyاشْتَرَيْتُ حِذَاءً جَدِيدًا.
كَوَىيَكْوِيto ironيَكْوِي أَبِي قَمِيصَهُ.
طَوَىيَطْوِيto foldأَطْوِي مَلَابِسِي.
عَلَّقَيُعَلِّقُto hang upعَلَّقْتُ المِعْطَفَ فِي الخِزَانَةِ.
جَرَّبَيُجَرِّبُto try onجَرَّبَتْ أُخْتِي الفُسْتَانَ.

One verb, all the pronouns: لَبِسَ / يَلْبَسُ (to wear)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَالَبِسْتُأَلْبَسُI wear
أَنْتَلَبِسْتَتَلْبَسُyou wear (m.)
أَنْتِلَبِسْتِتَلْبَسِينَyou wear (f.)
هُوَلَبِسَيَلْبَسُhe wears
هِيَلَبِسَتْتَلْبَسُshe wears
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَالَبِسْتُمَاتَلْبَسَانِyou two wear
هُمَالَبِسَايَلْبَسَانِthe two of them wear
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُلَبِسْنَانَلْبَسُwe wear
أَنْتُمْلَبِسْتُمْتَلْبَسُونَyou wear (pl.)
هُمْلَبِسُوايَلْبَسُونَthey wear

Clothes as a group

مَلَابِس is the plural of things, not people. Its adjective is feminine singular — so white clothes is مَلَابِسُ بَيْضَاءُ, not a masculine plural. See Grammar 7.

غَسَلَتْ أُمِّي مَلَابِسِي البَيْضَاءَ.
My mother washed my white clothes.
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
مَرْيَم: أُرِيدُ فُسْتَانًا لِلْعِيدِ.
Maryam: I would like a dress for Eid.
البَائِعَة: أَيَّ لَوْنٍ تُرِيدِينَ؟
Saleswoman: Which colour do you want?
مَرْيَم: أُحِبُّ اللَّوْنَ الأَزْرَقَ.
Maryam: I like blue.
البَائِعَة: هَذَا فُسْتَانٌ أَزْرَقُ. هَلْ تُرِيدِينَ أَنْ تُجَرِّبِيهِ؟
Saleswoman: This is a blue dress. Would you like to try it on?
مَرْيَم: نَعَمْ... هُوَ طَوِيلٌ قَلِيلًا.
Maryam: Yes... it is a little long.
البَائِعَة: عِنْدَنَا فُسْتَانٌ قَصِيرٌ بِاللَّوْنِ نَفْسِهِ.
Saleswoman: We have a short dress in the same colour.
مَرْيَم: مُمْتَازٌ! بِكَمْ هُوَ؟
Maryam: Excellent! How much is it?
البَائِعَة: بِثَلَاثِينَ دُولَارًا.
Saleswoman: Thirty dollars.

Model sentences

  1. أَلْبَسُ قَمِيصًا أَبْيَضَ وَبِنْطَالًا أَسْوَدَ.
    I wear a white shirt and black trousers.
  2. تَلْبَسُ أُخْتِي حِجَابًا أَزْرَقَ.
    My sister wears a blue hijab.
  3. حِذَائِي جَدِيدٌ.
    My shoes are new.
  4. مَا لَوْنُ سَيَّارَتِكُمْ؟ — لَوْنُهَا أَبْيَضُ.
    What colour is your car? — It is white.
  5. السَّيَّارَةُ الحَمْرَاءُ لِعَمِّي.
    The red car belongs to my uncle.
  6. فِي الشِّتَاءِ نَلْبَسُ المَعَاطِفَ وَالقُفَّازَاتِ.
    In winter we wear coats and gloves.
  7. خَلَعْتُ حِذَائِي قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
    I took off my shoes before the prayer.
  8. هَذَا القَمِيصُ ضَيِّقٌ، أُرِيدُ قَمِيصًا وَاسِعًا.
    This shirt is tight; I want a loose shirt.
  9. لَبِسَ أَبِي الثَّوْبَ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ.
    My father wore the thobe on Friday.
  10. السَّمَاءُ زَرْقَاءُ، وَالشَّجَرَةُ خَضْرَاءُ.
    The sky is blue, and the tree is green.
  11. غَسَلَتْ أُمِّي مَلَابِسِي البَيْضَاءَ.
    My mother washed my white clothes.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

قَمِيصحِذَاءمِعْطَف
قُبَّعَةجَوَارِبفُسْتَان

قَمِيص = shirt · حِذَاء = shoes · مِعْطَف = coat · قُبَّعَة = hat · جَوَارِب = socks · فُسْتَان = dress

2Write the feminine form of each colour.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اكْتُبِ المُؤَنَّث.

  1. أَحْمَر ←
  2. أَزْرَق ←
  3. أَخْضَر ←
  4. أَبْيَض ←
  5. أَسْوَد ←
  6. بُنِّيّ ←
١) حَمْرَاء ٢) زَرْقَاء ٣) خَضْرَاء ٤) بَيْضَاء ٥) سَوْدَاء ٦) بُنِّيَّة

3Choose the colour that matches the noun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ اللَّوْنَ المُنَاسِب.

  1. قَمِيصٌ ( أَحْمَرُ / حَمْرَاءُ )
  2. حَقِيبَةٌ ( سَوْدَاءُ / أَسْوَدُ )
  3. حِذَاءٌ ( بُنِّيٌّ / بُنِّيَّةٌ )
  4. قُبَّعَةٌ ( زَرْقَاءُ / أَزْرَقُ )
  5. بِنْطَالٌ ( رَمَادِيٌّ / رَمَادِيَّةٌ )
١) أَحْمَرُ ٢) سَوْدَاءُ ٣) بُنِّيٌّ ٤) زَرْقَاءُ ٥) رَمَادِيٌّ

4Choose the right form of لَبِسَ / يَلْبَسُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا مِعْطَفِي. ( أَلْبَسُ / يَلْبَسُ )
  2. هِيَ فُسْتَانًا أَخْضَرَ. ( تَلْبَسُ / يَلْبَسُ )
  3. هُمْ الزِّيَّ المَدْرَسِيَّ. ( يَلْبَسُونَ / يَلْبَسَانِ )
  4. أَمْسِ، أَبِي ثَوْبًا أَبْيَضَ. ( لَبِسَ / يَلْبَسُ )
  5. أَنْتِ حِجَابًا جَمِيلًا. ( تَلْبَسِينَ / تَلْبَسُ )
١) أَلْبَسُ ٢) تَلْبَسُ ٣) يَلْبَسُونَ ٤) لَبِسَ ٥) تَلْبَسِينَ

5What do you wear? Write one sentence in Arabic for each situation.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَلْبَسُ؟

  1. To the masjid on Friday.
  2. When it snows.
  3. To school.
  4. To play football.
  5. To an Eid party.

Sample answers:

١) أَلْبَسُ ثَوْبًا أَبْيَضَ.
٢) أَلْبَسُ مِعْطَفًا وَقُفَّازَاتٍ.
٣) أَلْبَسُ الزِّيَّ المَدْرَسِيَّ.
٤) أَلْبَسُ قَمِيصًا رِيَاضِيًّا وَحِذَاءً رِيَاضِيًّا.
٥) أَلْبَسُ مَلَابِسَ جَدِيدَةً.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. My shirt is white.
  2. She wears a blue hijab.
  3. I bought new shoes.
  4. the red car
  5. We take off our shoes before the prayer.
١) قَمِيصِي أَبْيَضُ.
٢) تَلْبَسُ حِجَابًا أَزْرَقَ.
٣) اشْتَرَيْتُ حِذَاءً جَدِيدًا.
٤) السَّيَّارَةُ الحَمْرَاءُ
٥) نَخْلَعُ أَحْذِيَتَنَا قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. shirt
  2. dress
  3. coat
  4. socks
  5. hat

Question 2 — Write each colour in Arabic: masculine and feminine. (5 marks)

  1. red
  2. green
  3. black
  4. white
  5. yellow

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. السَّمَاءُ . ( زَرْقَاءُ / أَزْرَقُ / زُرْقٌ )
  2. لَوْنُ قَمِيصِكَ؟ ( مَا / مَنْ / كَمْ )
  3. أَمْسِ، مِعْطَفِي. ( أَلْبَسُ / لَبِسْتُ / يَلْبَسُ )
  4. هَذِهِ تَنُّورَةٌ . ( طَوِيلَةٌ / طَوِيلٌ / طِوَالٌ )
  5. هُمَا الحِذَاءَ. ( يَخْلَعُونَ / يَخْلَعَانِ / تَخْلَعِينَ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about what you are wearing today. Use a colour in each one. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) قَمِيص ٢) فُسْتَان ٣) مِعْطَف ٤) جَوَارِب ٥) قُبَّعَة

Question 2

١) أَحْمَر / حَمْرَاء ٢) أَخْضَر / خَضْرَاء ٣) أَسْوَد / سَوْدَاء ٤) أَبْيَض / بَيْضَاء ٥) أَصْفَر / صَفْرَاء

Question 3

١) زَرْقَاءُ ٢) مَا ٣) لَبِسْتُ ٤) طَوِيلَةٌ ٥) يَخْلَعَانِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct colour agreement and vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 8 of 16

الجِسْمُ وَالصِّحَّة

The Body & Health

Name the parts of the body, say where it hurts, and get through a visit to the doctor and the pharmacy.

In this unit

  • Name about twenty parts of the body.
  • Know which body parts are feminine and how to say two of them.
  • Say what is wrong: عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي… , عِنْدِي صُدَاعٌ.
  • Use seven health verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitSingular, Dual & PluralMasculine & FemininePronounsThe Present Tense

أ

The body

الجِسْم
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
جِسْمbodyرَأْسhead
وَجْهfaceشَعْرhair
عَيْنeyeأُذُنear
أَنْفnoseفَمmouth
أَسْنَانteethرَقَبَةneck
كَتِفshoulderصَدْرchest
قَلْبheartبَطْنstomach, belly
ظَهْرbackيَدhand
ذِرَاعarmإِصْبَعfinger
رِجْلlegرُكْبَةknee
قَدَمfoot

Pairs of the body are feminine

Most parts of the body that come in pairs are feminine, even without ة: عَيْن، أُذُن، يَد، رِجْل، قَدَم. Their adjectives are feminine, and two of them is a dual. See Grammar 6 and Grammar 8.

عَيْنَانِ · أُذُنَانِ · يَدَانِ
two eyes · two ears · two hands
يَدِي اليُمْنَى
my right hand
رِجْلِي اليُسْرَى
my left leg
لِلْإِنْسَانِ عَيْنَانِ وَأُذُنَانِ.
A person has two eyes and two ears.
ب

Feeling ill

المَرَض
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
أَلَمpainصُدَاعheadache
حُمَّىfeverسُعَالcough
زُكَامa coldجُرْحwound, cut
صِحَّةhealthبِخَيْرwell, fine
MaleFemaleEnglish
مَرِيضمَرِيضَةsick
مُتْعَبمُتْعَبَةtired

Saying what is wrong

Use عِنْدِي (I have) for an illness, and عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي… for pain in a part of the body. Add my to the body part.

عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي رَأْسِي.
I have a pain in my head.
عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي بَطْنِي.
I have a stomach ache.
عِنْدِي صُدَاعٌ وَحُمَّى.
I have a headache and a fever.
أَشْعُرُ بِالتَّعَبِ.
I feel tired.

Kind words for someone who is ill

سَلَامَتُكَ!
Get well soon! — to a man or boy
سَلَامَتُكِ!
Get well soon! — to a woman or girl
شَفَاكَ اللهُ.
May Allah heal you.
ج

At the doctor and the pharmacy

عِنْدَ الطَّبِيبِ وَفِي الصَّيْدَلِيَّة
MaleEnglishFemaleEnglish
طَبِيبdoctorطَبِيبَةdoctor (f.)
مُمَرِّضnurseمُمَرِّضَةnurse (f.)
صَيْدَلِيّpharmacistصَيْدَلِيَّةpharmacist (f.) — also means pharmacy
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
عِيَادَةclinicمُسْتَشْفَىhospital
دَوَاءmedicineحَبَّةpill, tablet
مَوْعِدappointmentطَبِيبُ الأَسْنَانِdentist
د

Health verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ الصِّحَّة

Seven verbs for feeling ill and getting better, then one of them with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
شَعَرَيَشْعُرُto feelأَشْعُرُ بِأَلَمٍ فِي ظَهْرِي.
مَرِضَيَمْرَضُto get sickمَرِضَ أَخِي أَمْسِ.
فَحَصَيَفْحَصُto examineيَفْحَصُ الطَّبِيبُ أُذُنِي.
وَصَفَيَصِفُto prescribeوَصَفَتِ الطَّبِيبَةُ دَوَاءً.
أَخَذَيَأْخُذُto takeآخُذُ حَبَّةً بَعْدَ الأَكْلِ.
نَظَّفَيُنَظِّفُto clean, to brushأُنَظِّفُ أَسْنَانِي كُلَّ صَبَاحٍ.
اسْتَرَاحَيَسْتَرِيحُto restاسْتَرَحْتُ فِي البَيْتِ.

One verb, all the pronouns: شَعَرَ / يَشْعُرُ (to feel)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاشَعَرْتُأَشْعُرُI feel
أَنْتَشَعَرْتَتَشْعُرُyou feel (m.)
أَنْتِشَعَرْتِتَشْعُرِينَyou feel (f.)
هُوَشَعَرَيَشْعُرُhe feels
هِيَشَعَرَتْتَشْعُرُshe feels
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاشَعَرْتُمَاتَشْعُرَانِyou two feel
هُمَاشَعَرَايَشْعُرَانِthe two of them feel
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُشَعَرْنَانَشْعُرُwe feel
أَنْتُمْشَعَرْتُمْتَشْعُرُونَyou feel (pl.)
هُمْشَعَرُوايَشْعُرُونَthey feel

شَعَرَ needs بِـ

The thing you feel always comes after بِـ (with).

أَشْعُرُ بِالبَرْدِ.
I feel cold.
هَلْ تَشْعُرِينَ بِالجُوعِ؟
Do you feel hungry? — to a girl
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
الطَّبِيبَة: مَا بِكَ يَا خَالِدُ؟
Doctor: What is wrong, Khalid?
خَالِد: عِنْدِي صُدَاعٌ وَحُمَّى.
Khalid: I have a headache and a fever.
الطَّبِيبَة: مُنْذُ مَتَى؟
Doctor: Since when?
خَالِد: مُنْذُ يَوْمَيْنِ.
Khalid: For two days.
الطَّبِيبَة: اِفْتَحْ فَمَكَ، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ… عِنْدَكَ زُكَامٌ.
Doctor: Open your mouth, please… You have a cold.
خَالِد: هَلْ أَحْتَاجُ إِلَى دَوَاءٍ؟
Khalid: Do I need medicine?
الطَّبِيبَة: نَعَمْ. خُذْ حَبَّةً بَعْدَ الأَكْلِ، وَاشْرَبْ مَاءً كَثِيرًا، وَاسْتَرِحْ.
Doctor: Yes. Take a pill after eating, drink a lot of water, and rest.
خَالِد: شُكْرًا يَا طَبِيبَةُ.
Khalid: Thank you, doctor.

Model sentences

  1. عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي رَأْسِي.
    I have a pain in my head.
  2. لِلْإِنْسَانِ عَيْنَانِ وَأُذُنَانِ.
    A person has two eyes and two ears.
  3. أَخِي مَرِيضٌ، هُوَ فِي البَيْتِ اليَوْمَ.
    My brother is sick; he is at home today.
  4. ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى العِيَادَةِ صَبَاحًا.
    We went to the clinic in the morning.
  5. فَحَصَ الطَّبِيبُ صَدْرِي.
    The doctor examined my chest.
  6. اشْتَرَتْ أُمِّي الدَّوَاءَ مِنَ الصَّيْدَلِيَّةِ.
    My mother bought the medicine from the pharmacy.
  7. أَغْسِلُ يَدَيَّ قَبْلَ الأَكْلِ.
    I wash my hands before eating.
  8. أَشْعُرُ بِالتَّعَبِ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَنَامَ.
    I feel tired; I want to sleep.
  9. عِنْدِي مَوْعِدٌ مَعَ طَبِيبِ الأَسْنَانِ.
    I have an appointment with the dentist.
  10. كَيْفَ حَالُكَ اليَوْمَ؟ — الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ، أَنَا بِخَيْرٍ.
    How are you today? — Praise be to Allah, I am well.
  11. سَلَامَتُكَ يَا صَدِيقِي!
    Get well soon, my friend!
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

رَأْسعَيْنيَد
بَطْنرِجْلأَنْف

رَأْس = head · عَيْن = eye · يَد = hand · بَطْن = stomach · رِجْل = leg · أَنْف = nose

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

صُدَاعٌ — الصَّيْدَلِيَّةِ — الطَّبِيبُ — دَوَاءً — أَسْنَانِي
  1. رَأْسِي يُؤْلِمُنِي، عِنْدِي .
  2. يَفْحَصُ المَرِيضَ.
  3. نَشْتَرِي الدَّوَاءَ مِنَ .
  4. وَصَفَ الطَّبِيبُ .
  5. أُنَظِّفُ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
١) صُدَاعٌ ٢) الطَّبِيبُ ٣) الصَّيْدَلِيَّةِ ٤) دَوَاءً ٥) أَسْنَانِي

3Write the dual — two of each.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اكْتُبِ المُثَنَّى.

  1. عَيْن ←
  2. يَد ←
  3. أُذُن ←
  4. رِجْل ←
  5. كَتِف ←
١) عَيْنَانِ ٢) يَدَانِ ٣) أُذُنَانِ ٤) رِجْلَانِ ٥) كَتِفَانِ

4Choose the right form of شَعَرَ / يَشْعُرُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا بِالبَرْدِ. ( أَشْعُرُ / يَشْعُرُ )
  2. هِيَ بِالتَّعَبِ. ( تَشْعُرُ / يَشْعُرُونَ )
  3. أَمْسِ، بِأَلَمٍ فِي ظَهْرِي. ( شَعَرْتُ / شَعَرَتْ )
  4. هُمَا بِالحَرِّ. ( يَشْعُرَانِ / يَشْعُرُ )
  5. هَلْ بِالجُوعِ يَا سَارَةُ؟ ( تَشْعُرِينَ / تَشْعُرُ )
١) أَشْعُرُ ٢) تَشْعُرُ ٣) شَعَرْتُ ٤) يَشْعُرَانِ ٥) تَشْعُرِينَ

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

عِنْدِي صُدَاعٌ. — سَلَامَتُكَ! — أَشْعُرُ بِالبَرْدِ. — أَنَا بِخَيْرٍ، الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ. — عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي بَطْنِي.
  1. Your head hurts.
  2. Your friend Ahmad is sick.
  3. It is winter and you are shivering.
  4. Someone asks how you are, and you feel fine.
  5. You ate too much and your stomach hurts.
١) عِنْدِي صُدَاعٌ.
٢) سَلَامَتُكَ!
٣) أَشْعُرُ بِالبَرْدِ.
٤) أَنَا بِخَيْرٍ، الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ.
٥) عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي بَطْنِي.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I have a pain in my leg.
  2. My sister is sick.
  3. The doctor examined my ear.
  4. I wash my hands.
  5. We went to the pharmacy.
١) عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ فِي رِجْلِي.
٢) أُخْتِي مَرِيضَةٌ.
٣) فَحَصَ الطَّبِيبُ أُذُنِي.
٤) أَغْسِلُ يَدَيَّ.
٥) ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى الصَّيْدَلِيَّةِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. head
  2. mouth
  3. back
  4. heart
  5. finger

Question 2 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. doctor (m.)
  2. nurse (f.)
  3. medicine
  4. fever
  5. clinic

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. عِنْدِي أَلَمٌ بَطْنِي. ( فِي / عَلَى / مِنْ )
  2. أَرَى بِـ . ( عَيْنَيَّ / أُذُنَيَّ / يَدَيَّ )
  3. أَخِي ، هُوَ فِي البَيْتِ. ( مَرِيضٌ / مَرِيضَةٌ / مَرْضَى )
  4. أَمْسِ، الطَّبِيبُ أُذُنِي. ( فَحَصَ / يَفْحَصُ / نَفْحَصُ )
  5. هِيَ بِالتَّعَبِ. ( تَشْعُرُ / يَشْعُرُ / أَشْعُرُ )

Question 4 — You are at the doctor. Write three sentences: say what is wrong and how you feel. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) رَأْس ٢) فَم ٣) ظَهْر ٤) قَلْب ٥) إِصْبَع

Question 2

١) طَبِيب ٢) مُمَرِّضَة ٣) دَوَاء ٤) حُمَّى ٥) عِيَادَة

Question 3

١) فِي ٢) عَيْنَيَّ ٣) مَرِيضٌ ٤) فَحَصَ ٥) تَشْعُرُ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 9 of 16

المَدِينَةُ وَالاتِّجَاهَات

The City & Directions

Name the places in an American town, say where they are, and ask for and give directions.

In this unit

  • Name about twenty places and things in a town.
  • Say right, left, straight ahead, near and far.
  • Give directions with commands: walk, turn, cross, stop.
  • Use eight verbs for moving around town in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitCommands & ProhibitionsPrepositions & AdverbsAsking QuestionsThe Past Tense

أ

Places in town

أَمَاكِنُ فِي المَدِينَة
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
مَدِينَةcityبَلْدَةtown
مَسْجِدmasjidمُسْتَشْفَىhospital
مَكْتَبُ البَرِيدِpost officeمَكْتَبَةٌ عَامَّةٌpublic library
حَدِيقَةٌ عَامَّةٌparkمَحَطَّةُ الوَقُودِgas station
مَصْرِفbankمَطْعَمrestaurant
مَتْجَرstoreمَرْكَزُ الشُّرْطَةِpolice station
ب

On the street

فِي الشَّارِع
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
شَارِعstreetطَرِيقroad, way
رَصِيفsidewalkزَاوِيَةcorner
تَقَاطُعintersectionإِشَارَةُ المُرُورِtraffic light
جِسْرbridgeمَوْقِفُ السَّيَّارَاتِparking lot
شُرْطِيّpolice officerخَرِيطَةmap
ج

Directions

الاتِّجَاهَات
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
يَمِينrightيَسَارleft
مُسْتَقِيمًاstraight aheadهُنَاhere
قَرِيب مِنْnear, close toبَعِيد عَنْfar from
مُقَابِلَoppositeبِجَانِبِnext to
عَلَى اليَمِينِon the rightعَلَى اليَسَارِon the left
فِي نِهَايَةِ الشَّارِعِat the end of the streetثُمَّthen

Giving directions — commands

To a manTo a womanEnglish
اِذْهَبْاِذْهَبِيgo
اِمْشِاِمْشِيwalk
اِنْعَطِفْاِنْعَطِفِيturn
اُعْبُرْاُعْبُرِيcross
قِفْقِفِيstop
اِسْأَلْاِسْأَلِيask

Asking the way

Start with عَفْوًا (excuse me). In directions, right and left take ـًا: يَمِينًا، يَسَارًا. See Grammar 13 for commands.

عَفْوًا، أَيْنَ مَكْتَبُ البَرِيدِ؟
Excuse me, where is the post office?
اِمْشِ مُسْتَقِيمًا، ثُمَّ انْعَطِفْ يَمِينًا.
Walk straight ahead, then turn right.
هُوَ عَلَى اليَسَارِ، بِجَانِبِ المَصْرِفِ.
It is on the left, next to the bank.
هَلِ المُسْتَشْفَى قَرِيبٌ مِنْ هُنَا؟
Is the hospital near here?
د

Verbs in town: past and present

أَفْعَالٌ فِي المَدِينَة

Eight verbs for moving around town, then one of them with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
مَشَىيَمْشِيto walkأَمْشِي إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
عَبَرَيَعْبُرُto crossنَعْبُرُ الشَّارِعَ عِنْدَ الإِشَارَةِ.
انْعَطَفَيَنْعَطِفُto turnانْعَطَفَ أَبِي يَسَارًا.
وَجَدَيَجِدُto findوَجَدْتُ المَكْتَبَةَ بِسُهُولَةٍ.
سَأَلَيَسْأَلُto askسَأَلْتُ الشُّرْطِيَّ عَنِ الطَّرِيقِ.
وَقَفَيَقِفُto stop, to standتَقِفُ السَّيَّارَاتُ عِنْدَ الإِشَارَةِ الحَمْرَاءِ.
ضَاعَيَضِيعُto get lostضَاعَ أَخِي الصَّغِيرُ فِي السُّوقِ.
زَارَيَزُورُto visitزُرْنَا المَكْتَبَةَ العَامَّةَ.

One verb, all the pronouns: عَبَرَ / يَعْبُرُ (to cross)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاعَبَرْتُأَعْبُرُI cross
أَنْتَعَبَرْتَتَعْبُرُyou cross (m.)
أَنْتِعَبَرْتِتَعْبُرِينَyou cross (f.)
هُوَعَبَرَيَعْبُرُhe crosses
هِيَعَبَرَتْتَعْبُرُshe crosses
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاعَبَرْتُمَاتَعْبُرَانِyou two cross
هُمَاعَبَرَايَعْبُرَانِthe two of them cross
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُعَبَرْنَانَعْبُرُwe cross
أَنْتُمْعَبَرْتُمْتَعْبُرُونَyou cross (pl.)
هُمْعَبَرُوايَعْبُرُونَthey cross

Crossing safely

اُنْظُرْ يَمِينًا وَيَسَارًا قَبْلَ أَنْ تَعْبُرَ.
Look right and left before you cross.
لَا تَعْبُرْ عِنْدَ الإِشَارَةِ الحَمْرَاءِ.
Do not cross at the red light.
اِمْشِ عَلَى الرَّصِيفِ.
Walk on the sidewalk.
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
عُثْمَان: عَفْوًا، أَيْنَ المَكْتَبَةُ العَامَّةُ؟
Uthman: Excuse me, where is the public library?
الرَّجُل: اِمْشِ مُسْتَقِيمًا إِلَى الإِشَارَةِ.
Man: Walk straight ahead to the traffic light.
عُثْمَان: وَبَعْدَ الإِشَارَةِ؟
Uthman: And after the traffic light?
الرَّجُل: اُعْبُرِ الشَّارِعَ، ثُمَّ انْعَطِفْ يَمِينًا.
Man: Cross the street, then turn right.
عُثْمَان: هَلْ هِيَ بَعِيدَةٌ؟
Uthman: Is it far?
الرَّجُل: لَا، هِيَ قَرِيبَةٌ، بِجَانِبِ مَكْتَبِ البَرِيدِ.
Man: No, it is close, next to the post office.
عُثْمَان: شُكْرًا جَزِيلًا.
Uthman: Thank you very much.
الرَّجُل: عَفْوًا.
Man: You are welcome.

Model sentences

  1. أَسْكُنُ فِي بَلْدَةٍ صَغِيرَةٍ فِي فِرْجِينْيَا.
    I live in a small town in Virginia.
  2. المَسْجِدُ قَرِيبٌ مِنْ بَيْتِنَا.
    The masjid is close to our house.
  3. المُسْتَشْفَى بَعِيدٌ عَنِ المَدْرَسَةِ.
    The hospital is far from the school.
  4. مَكْتَبُ البَرِيدِ مُقَابِلَ المَصْرِفِ.
    The post office is opposite the bank.
  5. فِي نِهَايَةِ الشَّارِعِ حَدِيقَةٌ عَامَّةٌ كَبِيرَةٌ.
    At the end of the street there is a big park.
  6. اِمْشِ مُسْتَقِيمًا، ثُمَّ انْعَطِفْ يَسَارًا.
    Walk straight ahead, then turn left.
  7. نَعْبُرُ الشَّارِعَ عِنْدَ الإِشَارَةِ.
    We cross the street at the traffic light.
  8. وَقَفَ أَبِي فِي مَحَطَّةِ الوَقُودِ.
    My father stopped at the gas station.
  9. مَشَيْنَا عَلَى الرَّصِيفِ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ.
    We walked on the sidewalk to the library.
  10. ضِعْتُ، فَسَأَلْتُ عَنِ الطَّرِيقِ.
    I got lost, so I asked for the way.
  11. السَّيَّارَاتُ كَثِيرَةٌ فِي هَذَا الشَّارِعِ.
    There are many cars on this street.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

شَارِعرَصِيفمُسْتَشْفَى
جِسْرزَاوِيَةمَصْرِف

شَارِع = street · رَصِيف = sidewalk · مُسْتَشْفَى = hospital · جِسْر = bridge · زَاوِيَة = corner · مَصْرِف = bank

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

يَمِينًا — مُسْتَقِيمًا — الشَّارِعَ — قَرِيبٌ — مَكْتَبِ البَرِيدِ
  1. اِمْشِ ، لَا تَنْعَطِفْ.
  2. اُعْبُرِ عِنْدَ الإِشَارَةِ.
  3. المَسْجِدُ مِنْ هُنَا، خَمْسُ دَقَائِقَ فَقَطْ.
  4. انْعَطِفْ ، ثُمَّ يَسَارًا.
  5. أُرْسِلُ الرَّسَائِلَ مِنْ .
١) مُسْتَقِيمًا ٢) الشَّارِعَ ٣) قَرِيبٌ ٤) يَمِينًا ٥) مَكْتَبِ البَرِيدِ

3Change each command so that you are speaking to a girl.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: حَوِّلِ الأَمْرَ إِلَى المُؤَنَّث.

  1. اِذْهَبْ ←
  2. اِمْشِ ←
  3. اُعْبُرْ ←
  4. اِنْعَطِفْ ←
  5. قِفْ ←
١) اِذْهَبِي ٢) اِمْشِي ٣) اُعْبُرِي ٤) اِنْعَطِفِي ٥) قِفِي

4Choose the right form of عَبَرَ / يَعْبُرُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا الشَّارِعَ بِحَذَرٍ. ( أَعْبُرُ / يَعْبُرُ )
  2. هِيَ الجِسْرَ أَمْسِ. ( عَبَرَتْ / عَبَرْتُ )
  3. نَحْنُ عِنْدَ الإِشَارَةِ. ( نَعْبُرُ / يَعْبُرُونَ )
  4. هُمَا الشَّارِعَ مَعًا. ( يَعْبُرَانِ / يَعْبُرُونَ )
  5. أَنْتُمْ الشَّارِعَ كُلَّ صَبَاحٍ. ( تَعْبُرُونَ / تَعْبُرِينَ )
١) أَعْبُرُ ٢) عَبَرَتْ ٣) نَعْبُرُ ٤) يَعْبُرَانِ ٥) تَعْبُرُونَ

5What do you say? Write it in Arabic.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟

  1. Tell a boy: Walk straight ahead.
  2. Tell a girl: Turn right.
  3. Tell a boy: Cross the street.
  4. Ask: Where is the hospital?
  5. Say: The masjid is near.
١) اِمْشِ مُسْتَقِيمًا.
٢) اِنْعَطِفِي يَمِينًا.
٣) اُعْبُرِ الشَّارِعَ.
٤) أَيْنَ المُسْتَشْفَى؟
٥) المَسْجِدُ قَرِيبٌ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. The library is next to the park.
  2. Where is the post office?
  3. Walk to the traffic light. (to a boy)
  4. The hospital is far.
  5. We crossed the street.
١) المَكْتَبَةُ بِجَانِبِ الحَدِيقَةِ.
٢) أَيْنَ مَكْتَبُ البَرِيدِ؟
٣) اِمْشِ إِلَى الإِشَارَةِ.
٤) المُسْتَشْفَى بَعِيدٌ.
٥) عَبَرْنَا الشَّارِعَ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. street
  2. hospital
  3. park
  4. gas station
  5. corner

Question 2 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. right
  2. left
  3. straight ahead
  4. near
  5. far

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. المَسْجِدُ المَدْرَسَةِ. ( بِجَانِبِ / يَمِينًا / مُسْتَقِيمًا )
  2. يَا فَاطِمَةُ، يَسَارًا. ( اِنْعَطِفِي / اِنْعَطِفْ / انْعَطَفَ )
  3. أَمْسِ، الشَّارِعَ مَعَ أَبِي. ( أَعْبُرُ / عَبَرْتُ / يَعْبُرُ )
  4. المُسْتَشْفَى بَعِيدٌ هُنَا. ( عَنْ / فِي / عَلَى )
  5. مَكْتَبُ البَرِيدِ؟ ( أَيْنَ / مَتَى / كَمْ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences: give directions from your school to a place near it. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) شَارِع ٢) مُسْتَشْفَى ٣) حَدِيقَةٌ عَامَّةٌ ٤) مَحَطَّةُ الوَقُودِ ٥) زَاوِيَة

Question 2

١) يَمِين ٢) يَسَار ٣) مُسْتَقِيمًا ٤) قَرِيب ٥) بَعِيد

Question 3

١) بِجَانِبِ ٢) اِنْعَطِفِي ٣) عَبَرْتُ ٤) عَنْ ٥) أَيْنَ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct commands and vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 10 of 16

المُوَاصَلَاتُ وَالسَّفَر

Transport & Travel

Talk about how you get around — by car, bus, train or plane — and get through a trip from the ticket to the airport gate.

In this unit

  • Name about twenty kinds of transport and the people who use them.
  • Say how you travel: by car, by bus, on foot.
  • Use the words you need at a station and an airport.
  • Use eight travel verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitPrepositions & AdverbsThe Past TenseThe Present TenseAsking Questions

أ

Getting around

المُوَاصَلَات
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
سَيَّارَةcarحَافِلَةbus
حَافِلَةُ المَدْرَسَةِschool busسَيَّارَةُ أُجْرَةٍtaxi
قِطَارtrainطَائِرَةplane
دَرَّاجَةbicycleدَرَّاجَةٌ نَارِيَّةٌmotorcycle
سَفِينَةshipمَحَطَّةstation
مَوْقِفُ الحَافِلَةِbus stopطَرِيقٌ سَرِيعٌhighway
MaleEnglishFemaleEnglish
سَائِقdriverسَائِقَةdriver (f.)
رَاكِبpassengerرَاكِبَةpassenger (f.)
مُسَافِرtravellerمُسَافِرَةtraveller (f.)
طَيَّارpilotطَيَّارَةpilot (f.)
ب

Travelling

السَّفَر
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
سَفَرtravelرِحْلَةtrip, flight
مَطَارairportتَذْكِرَةticket
جَوَازُ السَّفَرِpassportحَقِيبَةُ السَّفَرِsuitcase
مِقْعَدseatفُنْدُقhotel
إِجَازَةvacationبَلَدcountry
وُصُولarrivalمُغَادَرَةdeparture

How do you travel?

Use بِـ (by) with ال in front of the vehicle. On foot is مَشْيًا. See Grammar 16 for بِـ.

بِالسَّيَّارَةِ
by car
بِالحَافِلَةِ
by bus
بِالطَّائِرَةِ
by plane
مَشْيًا
on foot
كَيْفَ تَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ؟ — بِحَافِلَةِ المَدْرَسَةِ.
How do you go to school? — By school bus.
ج

Travel verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ السَّفَر

Eight verbs for getting from one place to another, then one of them with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
رَكِبَيَرْكَبُto ride, to get onأَرْكَبُ الحَافِلَةَ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
سَافَرَيُسَافِرُto travelسَافَرْنَا إِلَى مِصْرَ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
وَصَلَيَصِلُto arriveوَصَلَتِ الطَّائِرَةُ فِي المَوْعِدِ.
غَادَرَيُغَادِرُto leave, to departغَادَرَ القِطَارُ المَحَطَّةَ.
قَادَيَقُودُto driveيَقُودُ أَبِي السَّيَّارَةَ بِحَذَرٍ.
نَزَلَيَنْزِلُto get offنَزَلْتُ مِنَ الحَافِلَةِ عِنْدَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
حَجَزَيَحْجِزُto bookحَجَزَتْ أُمِّي التَّذَاكِرَ.
طَارَيَطِيرُto flyتَطِيرُ الطَّائِرَةُ فَوْقَ السَّحَابِ.

Verbs that start with أُ in the present

سَافَرَ and غَادَرَ have a long ا after the first letter. In the present they begin with أُ، تُ، يُ، نُ — with a damma.

سَافَرْتُ · أُسَافِرُ
I travelled · I travel
غَادَرْنَا · نُغَادِرُ
we left · we leave

One verb, all the pronouns: رَكِبَ / يَرْكَبُ (to ride)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَارَكِبْتُأَرْكَبُI ride
أَنْتَرَكِبْتَتَرْكَبُyou ride (m.)
أَنْتِرَكِبْتِتَرْكَبِينَyou ride (f.)
هُوَرَكِبَيَرْكَبُhe rides
هِيَرَكِبَتْتَرْكَبُshe rides
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَارَكِبْتُمَاتَرْكَبَانِyou two ride
هُمَارَكِبَايَرْكَبَانِthe two of them ride
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُرَكِبْنَانَرْكَبُwe ride
أَنْتُمْرَكِبْتُمْتَرْكَبُونَyou ride (pl.)
هُمْرَكِبُوايَرْكَبُونَthey ride
د

Useful phrases for a trip

عِبَارَاتٌ لِلسَّفَر
ArabicEnglish
تَذْكِرَةً وَاحِدَةً، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.One ticket, please.
مَتَى يُغَادِرُ القِطَارُ؟When does the train leave?
أَيْنَ مَوْقِفُ الحَافِلَةِ؟Where is the bus stop?
هَذَا جَوَازُ سَفَرِي.This is my passport.
رِحْلَةً سَعِيدَةً!Have a good trip!
الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ عَلَى السَّلَامَةِ.Thank Allah you arrived safely.
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
المُوَظَّفَة: جَوَازَ السَّفَرِ، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
Officer: Your passport, please.
إِبْرَاهِيم: تَفَضَّلِي. هَذَا جَوَازُ سَفَرِي، وَهَذِهِ تَذْكِرَتِي.
Ibrahim: Here you are. This is my passport, and this is my ticket.
المُوَظَّفَة: إِلَى أَيْنَ تُسَافِرُ؟
Officer: Where are you travelling to?
إِبْرَاهِيم: إِلَى القَاهِرَةِ.
Ibrahim: To Cairo.
المُوَظَّفَة: كَمْ حَقِيبَةً مَعَكَ؟
Officer: How many bags do you have with you?
إِبْرَاهِيم: حَقِيبَتَانِ.
Ibrahim: Two bags.
المُوَظَّفَة: تُغَادِرُ الطَّائِرَةُ فِي السَّاعَةِ الخَامِسَةِ. رِحْلَةً سَعِيدَةً!
Officer: The plane leaves at five o'clock. Have a good trip!

Model sentences

  1. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ بِالحَافِلَةِ.
    I go to school by bus.
  2. يَذْهَبُ أَبِي إِلَى العَمَلِ بِالسَّيَّارَةِ.
    My father goes to work by car.
  3. سَافَرَتْ عَائِلَتِي إِلَى مِصْرَ بِالطَّائِرَةِ.
    My family travelled to Egypt by plane.
  4. المَطَارُ بَعِيدٌ عَنْ بَيْتِنَا.
    The airport is far from our house.
  5. وَصَلَتِ الحَافِلَةُ مُتَأَخِّرَةً.
    The bus arrived late.
  6. اشْتَرَيْنَا تَذَاكِرَ القِطَارِ.
    We bought the train tickets.
  7. لَا تَنْسَ جَوَازَ السَّفَرِ!
    Don't forget the passport!
  8. أَرْكَبُ دَرَّاجَتِي فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
    I ride my bicycle in the park.
  9. السَّائِقُ يَقُودُ الحَافِلَةَ بِحَذَرٍ.
    The driver drives the bus carefully.
  10. تُغَادِرُ الطَّائِرَةُ فِي السَّاعَةِ التَّاسِعَةِ صَبَاحًا.
    The plane leaves at nine in the morning.
  11. نَزَلْنَا فِي فُنْدُقٍ قَرِيبٍ مِنَ البَحْرِ.
    We stayed in a hotel near the sea.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

قِطَارطَائِرَةتَذْكِرَة
مَطَاردَرَّاجَةسَائِق

قِطَار = train · طَائِرَة = plane · تَذْكِرَة = ticket · مَطَار = airport · دَرَّاجَة = bicycle · سَائِق = driver

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

بِالطَّائِرَةِ — جَوَازَ — المَحَطَّةِ — يَقُودُ — المَطَارِ
  1. نُسَافِرُ إِلَى مِصْرَ .
  2. لَا تَنْسَ السَّفَرِ!
  3. نَنْتَظِرُ القِطَارَ فِي .
  4. أَبِي السَّيَّارَةَ.
  5. وَصَلَتِ الطَّائِرَةُ إِلَى .
١) بِالطَّائِرَةِ ٢) جَوَازَ ٣) المَحَطَّةِ ٤) يَقُودُ ٥) المَطَارِ

3How do they travel? Complete with بِـ or مَشْيًا.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: كَيْفَ يُسَافِرُونَ؟

  1. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ . (by bus)
  2. يَذْهَبُ أَبِي إِلَى العَمَلِ . (by car)
  3. سَافَرْنَا إِلَى مَكَّةَ . (by plane)
  4. نَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدِينَةِ . (by train)
  5. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ . (on foot)
١) بِالحَافِلَةِ ٢) بِالسَّيَّارَةِ ٣) بِالطَّائِرَةِ ٤) بِالقِطَارِ ٥) مَشْيًا

4Choose the right form of رَكِبَ / يَرْكَبُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا الحَافِلَةَ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ. ( أَرْكَبُ / يَرْكَبُ )
  2. أَمْسِ، الطَّائِرَةَ لِأَوَّلِ مَرَّةٍ. ( رَكِبْتُ / أَرْكَبُ )
  3. هِيَ دَرَّاجَتَهَا. ( تَرْكَبُ / يَرْكَبُ )
  4. هُمَا القِطَارَ. ( يَرْكَبَانِ / يَرْكَبُونَ )
  5. هُمْ سَيَّارَةَ الأُجْرَةِ أَمْسِ. ( رَكِبُوا / رَكِبَا )
١) أَرْكَبُ ٢) رَكِبْتُ ٣) تَرْكَبُ ٤) يَرْكَبَانِ ٥) رَكِبُوا

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

تَذْكِرَةً وَاحِدَةً، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ. — مَتَى يُغَادِرُ القِطَارُ؟ — أَيْنَ مَوْقِفُ الحَافِلَةِ؟ — رِحْلَةً سَعِيدَةً! — هَذَا جَوَازُ سَفَرِي.
  1. You want to buy a ticket.
  2. You want to know when the train leaves.
  3. You are looking for the bus stop.
  4. Your friend is leaving on a trip.
  5. The officer at the airport asks for your passport.
١) تَذْكِرَةً وَاحِدَةً، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
٢) مَتَى يُغَادِرُ القِطَارُ؟
٣) أَيْنَ مَوْقِفُ الحَافِلَةِ؟
٤) رِحْلَةً سَعِيدَةً!
٥) هَذَا جَوَازُ سَفَرِي.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I go to school by bus.
  2. The plane arrived.
  3. My father drives the car.
  4. Where is the airport?
  5. We travelled to Egypt.
١) أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ بِالحَافِلَةِ.
٢) وَصَلَتِ الطَّائِرَةُ.
٣) يَقُودُ أَبِي السَّيَّارَةَ.
٤) أَيْنَ المَطَارُ؟
٥) سَافَرْنَا إِلَى مِصْرَ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. train
  2. airport
  3. ticket
  4. passport
  5. bicycle

Question 2 — How do you travel? Write it in Arabic. (5 marks)

  1. by car
  2. by plane
  3. by bus
  4. by train
  5. on foot

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ . ( بِالحَافِلَةِ / الحَافِلَةُ / حَافِلَةٌ )
  2. أَمْسِ، أَبِي إِلَى مِصْرَ. ( سَافَرَ / يُسَافِرُ / أُسَافِرُ )
  3. تُغَادِرُ الطَّائِرَةُ؟ ( مَتَى / مَنْ / مَا )
  4. هُمْ القِطَارَ. ( يَرْكَبُونَ / يَرْكَبُ / تَرْكَبَانِ )
  5. السَّائِقُ الحَافِلَةَ. ( يَقُودُ / تَقُودُ / أَقُودُ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about a trip you took. Say where you went and how. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) قِطَار ٢) مَطَار ٣) تَذْكِرَة ٤) جَوَازُ السَّفَرِ ٥) دَرَّاجَة

Question 2

١) بِالسَّيَّارَةِ ٢) بِالطَّائِرَةِ ٣) بِالحَافِلَةِ ٤) بِالقِطَارِ ٥) مَشْيًا

Question 3

١) بِالحَافِلَةِ ٢) سَافَرَ ٣) مَتَى ٤) يَرْكَبُونَ ٥) يَقُودُ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 11 of 16

الطَّقْسُ وَالفُصُول

Weather & Seasons

Describe the weather, name the four seasons and the twelve months, and say what you do when it is hot, cold, rainy or snowy.

In this unit

  • Name the four seasons and describe the weather in each one.
  • Use twenty weather words: hot, cold, rain, snow, wind, clouds and more.
  • Say the twelve months of the year.
  • Ask and answer: How is the weather today? What is the temperature?
  • Use seven weather verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitMasculine & FeminineAdjectives & AgreementNumbers & CountingThe Past Tense

أ

The four seasons

الفُصُولُ الأَرْبَعَة

Northern Virginia has four very different seasons: a cold winter with some snow, and a hot, humid summer.

SeasonEnglishIn Virginia
الرَّبِيعspringmild, flowers, some rain
الصَّيْفsummerhot and humid
الخَرِيفautumn (fall)cool, colourful leaves
الشِّتَاءwintercold, sometimes snow

In winter, in summer

Put فِي (in) before the season. The word after فِي ends in a kasra.

فِي الشِّتَاءِ الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ.
In winter the weather is cold.
فِي الصَّيْفِ الجَوُّ حَارٌّ وَرَطْبٌ.
In summer the weather is hot and humid.
فِي الخَرِيفِ تَتَغَيَّرُ أَلْوَانُ الأَشْجَارِ.
In autumn the colours of the trees change.
ب

Weather words

كَلِمَاتُ الطَّقْس
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
طَقْسweatherجَوّweather, air
شَمْسsunسَمَاءsky
مَطَرrainثَلْجsnow
رِيَاحwindsغُيُومclouds
عَاصِفَةstormدَرَجَةُ الحَرَارَةِtemperature
حَارّhotبَارِدcold
دَافِئwarmمُعْتَدِلmild
مُشْمِسsunnyمُمْطِرrainy
غَائِمcloudyرَطْبhumid
مِظَلَّةumbrellaمِعْطَفcoat

Hot and cold with feminine words

A weather adjective takes ة when the noun is feminine — exactly the rule in Grammar 6 and Grammar 7.

الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ.
The weather is cold.
اللَّيْلَةُ بَارِدَةٌ.
Tonight is cold.
الشَّمْسُ حَارَّةٌ.
The sun is hot.
ج

The months of the year

شُهُورُ السَّنَة

These are the names used in Egypt and many Arab countries. They sound close to the English names.

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
يَنَايِرJanuaryفِبْرَايِرFebruary
مَارِسMarchأَبْرِيلApril
مَايُوMayيُونْيُوJune
يُولْيُوJulyأُغُسْطُسAugust
سِبْتَمْبِرSeptemberأُكْتُوبَرOctober
نُوفَمْبِرNovemberدِيسَمْبِرDecember

In which month?

Muslims also count the Islamic months, such as رَمَضَان.

فِي أَيِّ شَهْرٍ يَبْدَأُ الشِّتَاءُ؟
In which month does winter begin?
يَبْدَأُ الشِّتَاءُ فِي شَهْرِ دِيسَمْبِر.
Winter begins in December.
د

Asking about the weather

كَيْفَ الطَّقْسُ اليَوْمَ؟
QuestionEnglishPossible answer
كَيْفَ الطَّقْسُ اليَوْمَ؟How is the weather today?الطَّقْسُ جَمِيلٌ وَمُشْمِسٌ.
هَلِ الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ؟Is it cold?نَعَمْ، الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ جِدًّا.
كَمْ دَرَجَةُ الحَرَارَةِ؟What is the temperature?دَرَجَةُ الحَرَارَةِ أَرْبَعُونَ دَرَجَةً.
هَلْ يَنْزِلُ المَطَرُ؟Is it raining?لَا، لَكِنَّ السَّمَاءَ غَائِمَةٌ.
مَا فَصْلُكَ المُفَضَّلُ؟What is your favourite season?فَصْلِي المُفَضَّلُ الخَرِيفُ.

There is no it in Arabic weather sentences

English says it is raining. Arabic says the rain comes down.

يَنْزِلُ المَطَرُ.
It is raining.
يَنْزِلُ الثَّلْجُ.
It is snowing.
الجَوُّ حَارٌّ.
It is hot.
هـ

Weather verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ الطَّقْس

Seven verbs for what the weather does, and what we do because of it.

PastPresentEnglishExample
نَزَلَيَنْزِلُto come down, to fallيَنْزِلُ المَطَرُ كَثِيرًا فِي الرَّبِيعِ.
هَبَّيَهُبُّto blow (wind)هَبَّتِ الرِّيَاحُ بِقُوَّةٍ.
أَشْرَقَيُشْرِقُto shine, to rise (sun)أَشْرَقَتِ الشَّمْسُ.
شَعَرَيَشْعُرُto feelأَشْعُرُ بِالبَرْدِ.
لَبِسَيَلْبَسُto wear, to put onأَلْبَسُ مِعْطَفًا فِي الشِّتَاءِ.
سَبَحَيَسْبَحُto swimنَسْبَحُ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
لَعِبَيَلْعَبُto playلَعِبْنَا فِي الثَّلْجِ.

One verb, all the pronouns: لَعِبَ / يَلْعَبُ (to play)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَالَعِبْتُأَلْعَبُI play
أَنْتَلَعِبْتَتَلْعَبُyou play (m.)
أَنْتِلَعِبْتِتَلْعَبِينَyou play (f.)
هُوَلَعِبَيَلْعَبُhe plays
هِيَلَعِبَتْتَلْعَبُshe plays
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَالَعِبْتُمَاتَلْعَبَانِyou two play
هُمَالَعِبَايَلْعَبَانِthe two of them play
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُلَعِبْنَانَلْعَبُwe play
أَنْتُمْلَعِبْتُمْتَلْعَبُونَyou play (pl.)
هُمْلَعِبُوايَلْعَبُونَthey play
و

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
يُوسُف: كَيْفَ الطَّقْسُ اليَوْمَ يَا زَيْنَبُ؟
Yusuf: How is the weather today, Zaynab?
زَيْنَب: الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ جِدًّا، وَيَنْزِلُ الثَّلْجُ.
Zaynab: It is very cold, and it is snowing.
يُوسُف: رَائِعٌ! هَلْ نَلْعَبُ فِي الثَّلْجِ بَعْدَ المَدْرَسَةِ؟
Yusuf: Great! Shall we play in the snow after school?
زَيْنَب: نَعَمْ، لَكِنِ الْبَسْ مِعْطَفَكَ أَوَّلًا.
Zaynab: Yes, but put on your coat first.
يُوسُف: وَأَنْتِ؟ مَا فَصْلُكِ المُفَضَّلُ؟
Yusuf: And you? What is your favourite season?
زَيْنَب: أُحِبُّ الرَّبِيعَ، لِأَنَّ الجَوَّ مُعْتَدِلٌ وَجَمِيلٌ.
Zaynab: I love spring, because the weather is mild and beautiful.

Model sentences

  1. فِي الشِّتَاءِ الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ، وَيَنْزِلُ الثَّلْجُ أَحْيَانًا.
    In winter the weather is cold, and sometimes it snows.
  2. فِي الصَّيْفِ الجَوُّ حَارٌّ وَرَطْبٌ فِي فِرْجِينْيَا.
    In summer the weather is hot and humid in Virginia.
  3. الشَّمْسُ مُشْرِقَةٌ اليَوْمَ.
    The sun is shining today.
  4. آخُذُ مِظَلَّتِي لِأَنَّ الجَوَّ مُمْطِرٌ.
    I take my umbrella because it is rainy.
  5. أَلْبَسُ مِعْطَفًا ثَقِيلًا فِي الشِّتَاءِ.
    I wear a heavy coat in winter.
  6. تَتَغَيَّرُ أَلْوَانُ الأَشْجَارِ فِي الخَرِيفِ.
    The colours of the trees change in autumn.
  7. دَرَجَةُ الحَرَارَةِ اليَوْمَ تِسْعُونَ دَرَجَةً.
    The temperature today is ninety degrees.
  8. هَبَّتِ الرِّيَاحُ بِقُوَّةٍ أَمْسِ.
    The wind blew strongly yesterday.
  9. لَعِبَ الأَوْلَادُ فِي الثَّلْجِ.
    The children played in the snow.
  10. فِي السَّنَةِ أَرْبَعَةُ فُصُولٍ.
    There are four seasons in a year.
  11. يَبْدَأُ الصَّيْفُ فِي شَهْرِ يُونْيُو.
    Summer begins in June.
  12. أَشْعُرُ بِالبَرْدِ، أَغْلِقِ الشُّبَّاكَ مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
    I feel cold; close the window, please.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

مَطَرثَلْجغُيُوم
رِيَاحمِظَلَّةسَمَاء

مَطَر = rain · ثَلْج = snow · غُيُوم = clouds · رِيَاح = winds · مِظَلَّة = umbrella · سَمَاء = sky

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

الشِّتَاءِ — الصَّيْفِ — مِظَلَّتِي — الثَّلْجِ — الخَرِيفِ
  1. أَسْبَحُ فِي البَحْرِ فِي .
  2. أَلْبَسُ مِعْطَفًا ثَقِيلًا فِي .
  3. الجَوُّ مُمْطِرٌ، آخُذُ .
  4. لَعِبْنَا فِي أَمْسِ.
  5. تَتَغَيَّرُ أَلْوَانُ الأَشْجَارِ فِي .
١) الصَّيْفِ ٢) الشِّتَاءِ ٣) مِظَلَّتِي ٤) الثَّلْجِ ٥) الخَرِيفِ

3Choose the right form of لَعِبَ / يَلْعَبُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ( أَلْعَبُ / يَلْعَبُ )
  2. الأَوْلَادُ فِي الثَّلْجِ أَمْسِ. ( لَعِبُوا / لَعِبَتْ )
  3. هِيَ مَعَ أُخْتِهَا. ( تَلْعَبُ / يَلْعَبُ )
  4. أَنْتُمَا كَثِيرًا. ( تَلْعَبَانِ / تَلْعَبُونَ )
  5. نَحْنُ بَعْدَ المَدْرَسَةِ. ( نَلْعَبُ / تَلْعَبُ )
١) أَلْعَبُ ٢) لَعِبُوا ٣) تَلْعَبُ ٤) تَلْعَبَانِ ٥) نَلْعَبُ

4Write the opposite.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اكْتُبِ العَكْسَ.

  1. عَكْسُ «حَارّ» هُوَ .
  2. عَكْسُ «الصَّيْف» هُوَ .
  3. عَكْسُ «الرَّبِيع» هُوَ .
  4. عَكْسُ «مُشْمِس» هُوَ .
١) بَارِد ٢) الشِّتَاء ٣) الخَرِيف ٤) غَائِم

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

الجَوُّ حَارٌّ جِدًّا. — يَنْزِلُ المَطَرُ. — كَيْفَ الطَّقْسُ اليَوْمَ؟ — أَشْعُرُ بِالبَرْدِ. — يَنْزِلُ الثَّلْجُ.
  1. You want to know about the weather before you go out.
  2. You are shivering in the classroom.
  3. You see white flakes falling outside.
  4. You see drops of water falling, so you take your umbrella.
  5. It is August and you are sweating.
١) كَيْفَ الطَّقْسُ اليَوْمَ؟
٢) أَشْعُرُ بِالبَرْدِ.
٣) يَنْزِلُ الثَّلْجُ.
٤) يَنْزِلُ المَطَرُ.
٥) الجَوُّ حَارٌّ جِدًّا.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. It is cold today.
  2. I love spring.
  3. It is snowing.
  4. Summer begins in June.
  5. We played in the snow.
١) الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ اليَوْمَ.
٢) أُحِبُّ الرَّبِيعَ.
٣) يَنْزِلُ الثَّلْجُ.
٤) يَبْدَأُ الصَّيْفُ فِي شَهْرِ يُونْيُو.
٥) لَعِبْنَا فِي الثَّلْجِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. winter
  2. rain
  3. sunny
  4. cold
  5. umbrella

Question 2 — Write the month in Arabic. (5 marks)

  1. January
  2. March
  3. July
  4. October
  5. December

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. فِي السَّنَةِ فُصُولٍ. ( أَرْبَعَةُ / أَرْبَعُ / أَرْبَعُونَ )
  2. الجَوُّ فِي الصَّيْفِ. ( بَارِدٌ / حَارٌّ / ثَلْجٌ )
  3. أَمْسِ فِي الثَّلْجِ. ( أَلْعَبُ / لَعِبْتُ / يَلْعَبُ )
  4. الطَّقْسُ اليَوْمَ؟ ( كَيْفَ / مَنْ / كَمْ )
  5. هُمَا فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ( يَلْعَبُونَ / يَلْعَبَانِ / تَلْعَبِينَ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences: the weather today, and your favourite season and why. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) الشِّتَاء ٢) مَطَر ٣) مُشْمِس ٤) بَارِد ٥) مِظَلَّة

Question 2

١) يَنَايِر ٢) مَارِس ٣) يُولْيُو ٤) أُكْتُوبَر ٥) دِيسَمْبِر

Question 3

١) أَرْبَعَةُ ٢) حَارٌّ ٣) لَعِبْتُ ٤) كَيْفَ ٥) يَلْعَبَانِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 12 of 16

يَوْمِي

My Day

Describe your day from waking up to going to sleep, say how often you do things, and put your day in order.

In this unit

  • Describe your morning, afternoon and evening in full sentences.
  • Use frequency words: always, usually, sometimes, never, every day.
  • Order your day with first, then, after that, finally.
  • Tell apart العَشَاء (dinner) and العِشَاء (the night prayer).
  • Use eight daily verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitThe Present TenseThe Past TenseSaying No: Negation

أ

My morning

صَبَاحِي

A daily routine is told in the present tense, with I: أَسْتَيْقِظُ, أَتَوَضَّأُ, أَخْرُجُ. For the time of each step, use the clock from Vocabulary 4.

ArabicEnglish
أَسْتَيْقِظُ مِنَ النَّوْمِ.I wake up.
أَغْسِلُ وَجْهِي.I wash my face.
أَتَوَضَّأُ.I make wudu.
أُصَلِّي الفَجْرَ.I pray the dawn prayer.
أُنَظِّفُ أَسْنَانِي.I brush my teeth.
أَلْبَسُ مَلَابِسِي.I get dressed.
أَتَنَاوَلُ الفَطُورَ.I have breakfast.
أَخْرُجُ مِنَ البَيْتِ.I leave the house.
أَرْكَبُ الحَافِلَةَ.I take the bus.
أَصِلُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.I arrive at school.
ب

My afternoon and evening

بَعْدَ الظُّهْرِ وَفِي المَسَاء
ArabicEnglish
أَرْجِعُ إِلَى البَيْتِ.I come back home.
أَتَنَاوَلُ الغَدَاءَ.I have lunch.
أَسْتَرِيحُ قَلِيلًا.I rest a little.
أَكْتُبُ وَاجِبَاتِي.I do my homework.
أَلْعَبُ مَعَ إِخْوَتِي.I play with my brothers.
أَقْرَأُ القُرْآنَ.I read the Quran.
أَتَنَاوَلُ العَشَاءَ مَعَ أُسْرَتِي.I have dinner with my family.
أَسْتَحِمُّ.I take a shower.
أُصَلِّي العِشَاءَ.I pray the night prayer.
أَنَامُ.I go to sleep.

One letter makes a big difference

Look carefully at the first vowel. With a fatha it is a meal; with a kasra it is a prayer.

العَشَاءُ
dinner — with a fatha
العِشَاءُ
the night prayer — with a kasra
بَعْدَ العِشَاءِ نَتَنَاوَلُ العَشَاءَ.
After the night prayer we have dinner.
ج

Words for the day

كَلِمَاتُ اليَوْم
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
فَطُورbreakfastغَدَاءlunch
عَشَاءdinnerوَجْهface
أَسْنَانteethفُرْشَاةُ أَسْنَانٍtoothbrush
مَعْجُونُ أَسْنَانٍtoothpasteمُنَبِّهalarm clock
وُضُوءwudu, washing before prayerصَلَاةprayer
نَوْمsleepعَادَةhabit
قَبْلَbeforeبَعْدَafter

How often?

ArabicEnglishExample
دَائِمًاalwaysأَسْتَيْقِظُ مُبَكِّرًا دَائِمًا.
عَادَةًusuallyعَادَةً أَرْكَبُ الحَافِلَةَ.
كَثِيرًاoften, a lotأَقْرَأُ كَثِيرًا.
أَحْيَانًاsometimesأَحْيَانًا أَتَأَخَّرُ.
نَادِرًاrarelyنَادِرًا مَا أُشَاهِدُ التِّلْفَازَ.
أَبَدًاnever (with لَا)لَا أَنَامُ فِي الفَصْلِ أَبَدًا.
كُلَّ يَوْمٍevery dayأُصَلِّي خَمْسَ مَرَّاتٍ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.

Never needs لَا

أَبَدًا means never only when the verb is negative. Put لَا before the verb and أَبَدًا at the end. See Grammar 14.

لَا أَتَأَخَّرُ أَبَدًا.
I am never late.
لَا أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ أَبَدًا.
I never drink coffee.

Putting your day in order

أَوَّلًا
first
ثُمَّ
then
بَعْدَ ذَلِكَ
after that
أَخِيرًا
finally
أَوَّلًا أَسْتَيْقِظُ، ثُمَّ أَتَوَضَّأُ.
First I wake up, then I make wudu.
د

Daily verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ اليَوْم

Eight verbs you use every day. Then one of them is shown with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
اسْتَيْقَظَيَسْتَيْقِظُto wake upأَسْتَيْقِظُ فِي السَّادِسَةِ.
اغْتَسَلَيَغْتَسِلُto wash, to batheيَغْتَسِلُ أَخِي كُلَّ مَسَاءٍ.
تَوَضَّأَيَتَوَضَّأُto make wuduأَتَوَضَّأُ قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
صَلَّىيُصَلِّيto prayصَلَّيْنَا الفَجْرَ مَعًا.
خَرَجَيَخْرُجُto go out, to leaveأَخْرُجُ مِنَ البَيْتِ فِي السَّابِعَةِ.
رَجَعَيَرْجِعُto come backيَرْجِعُ أَبِي مِنَ العَمَلِ مَسَاءً.
تَنَاوَلَيَتَنَاوَلُto have (a meal)نَتَنَاوَلُ العَشَاءَ مَعًا.
نَامَيَنَامُto sleepأَنَامُ فِي السَّاعَةِ التَّاسِعَةِ.

One verb, all the pronouns: اسْتَيْقَظَ / يَسْتَيْقِظُ (to wake up)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَااسْتَيْقَظْتُأَسْتَيْقِظُI wake up
أَنْتَاسْتَيْقَظْتَتَسْتَيْقِظُyou wake up (m.)
أَنْتِاسْتَيْقَظْتِتَسْتَيْقِظِينَyou wake up (f.)
هُوَاسْتَيْقَظَيَسْتَيْقِظُhe wakes up
هِيَاسْتَيْقَظَتْتَسْتَيْقِظُshe wakes up
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَااسْتَيْقَظْتُمَاتَسْتَيْقِظَانِyou two wake up
هُمَااسْتَيْقَظَايَسْتَيْقِظَانِthe two of them wake up
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُاسْتَيْقَظْنَانَسْتَيْقِظُwe wake up
أَنْتُمْاسْتَيْقَظْتُمْتَسْتَيْقِظُونَyou wake up (pl.)
هُمْاسْتَيْقَظُوايَسْتَيْقِظُونَthey wake up
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
بِلَال: مَتَى تَسْتَيْقِظُ يَا خَالِدُ؟
Bilal: When do you wake up, Khalid?
خَالِد: أَسْتَيْقِظُ عَادَةً قَبْلَ الفَجْرِ، ثُمَّ أَتَوَضَّأُ وَأُصَلِّي.
Khalid: I usually wake up before dawn, then I make wudu and pray.
بِلَال: جَمِيلٌ! وَمَاذَا تَفْعَلُ بَعْدَ ذَلِكَ؟
Bilal: Nice! And what do you do after that?
خَالِد: أَتَنَاوَلُ الفَطُورَ، وَأَلْبَسُ مَلَابِسِي، وَأَرْكَبُ الحَافِلَةَ.
Khalid: I have breakfast, get dressed and take the bus.
بِلَال: وَمَتَى تَنَامُ؟
Bilal: And when do you go to sleep?
خَالِد: أَنَامُ فِي السَّاعَةِ التَّاسِعَةِ وَالنِّصْفِ. لَا أَنَامُ مُتَأَخِّرًا أَبَدًا.
Khalid: I sleep at half past nine. I never go to bed late.

Model sentences

  1. أَسْتَيْقِظُ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ فِي السَّاعَةِ السَّادِسَةِ.
    I wake up every day at six o'clock.
  2. أَغْسِلُ وَجْهِي وَأُنَظِّفُ أَسْنَانِي.
    I wash my face and brush my teeth.
  3. أَتَوَضَّأُ ثُمَّ أُصَلِّي الفَجْرَ.
    I make wudu, then I pray the dawn prayer.
  4. نَتَنَاوَلُ الفَطُورَ مَعًا فِي المَطْبَخِ.
    We have breakfast together in the kitchen.
  5. تَخْرُجُ أُخْتِي مِنَ البَيْتِ فِي السَّابِعَةِ وَالنِّصْفِ.
    My sister leaves the house at half past seven.
  6. أَرْجِعُ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ فِي السَّاعَةِ الثَّالِثَةِ.
    I come back from school at three o'clock.
  7. أَكْتُبُ وَاجِبَاتِي قَبْلَ العَشَاءِ.
    I do my homework before dinner.
  8. أَحْيَانًا أَلْعَبُ مَعَ إِخْوَتِي فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
    Sometimes I play with my brothers in the garden.
  9. لَا أَنَامُ مُتَأَخِّرًا أَبَدًا.
    I never go to bed late.
  10. اسْتَيْقَظَ أَبِي مُبَكِّرًا أَمْسِ.
    My father woke up early yesterday.
  11. بَعْدَ صَلَاةِ العِشَاءِ أَقْرَأُ قَلِيلًا ثُمَّ أَنَامُ.
    After the night prayer I read a little, then I sleep.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

فَطُورعَشَاءأَسْنَان
مُنَبِّهوَجْهوُضُوء

فَطُور = breakfast · عَشَاء = dinner · أَسْنَان = teeth · مُنَبِّه = alarm clock · وَجْه = face · وُضُوء = wudu

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

أَتَوَضَّأُ — الفَطُورَ — أَسْنَانِي — أَنَامُ — الحَافِلَةَ
  1. أُنَظِّفُ بِالفُرْشَاةِ.
  2. قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
  3. أَتَنَاوَلُ فِي الصَّبَاحِ.
  4. أَرْكَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
  5. فِي السَّاعَةِ التَّاسِعَةِ لَيْلًا.
١) أَسْنَانِي ٢) أَتَوَضَّأُ ٣) الفَطُورَ ٤) الحَافِلَةَ ٥) أَنَامُ

3Choose the right form of اسْتَيْقَظَ / يَسْتَيْقِظُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا مُبَكِّرًا. ( أَسْتَيْقِظُ / يَسْتَيْقِظُ )
  2. هِيَ فِي السَّادِسَةِ أَمْسِ. ( اسْتَيْقَظَتْ / اسْتَيْقَظْتُ )
  3. هُمْ قَبْلَ الفَجْرِ. ( يَسْتَيْقِظُونَ / يَسْتَيْقِظَانِ )
  4. أَنْتِ مُتَأَخِّرَةً. ( تَسْتَيْقِظِينَ / تَسْتَيْقِظُ )
  5. نَحْنُ فِي الصَّبَاحِ. ( نَسْتَيْقِظُ / تَسْتَيْقِظُ )
١) أَسْتَيْقِظُ ٢) اسْتَيْقَظَتْ ٣) يَسْتَيْقِظُونَ ٤) تَسْتَيْقِظِينَ ٥) نَسْتَيْقِظُ

4How often? Use the word in brackets.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: أَكْمِلْ بِكَلِمَةٍ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

دَائِمًا — أَحْيَانًا — أَبَدًا — كُلَّ يَوْمٍ
  1. لَا أَتَأَخَّرُ عَنِ المَدْرَسَةِ . (never)
  2. أُنَظِّفُ أَسْنَانِي . (every day)
  3. أَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ. (sometimes)
  4. أَسْتَيْقِظُ مُبَكِّرًا . (always)
١) أَبَدًا ٢) كُلَّ يَوْمٍ ٣) أَحْيَانًا ٤) دَائِمًا

5Put the day in order. Write 1 to 5.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: رَتِّبِ اليَوْمَ مِنْ ١ إِلَى ٥.

ActivityOrder
أَتَنَاوَلُ الفَطُورَ.
أَسْتَيْقِظُ مِنَ النَّوْمِ.
أَنَامُ.
أَرْجِعُ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
أَتَوَضَّأُ وَأُصَلِّي الفَجْرَ.
أَسْتَيْقِظُ ١ · أَتَوَضَّأُ وَأُصَلِّي ٢ · أَتَنَاوَلُ الفَطُورَ ٣ · أَرْجِعُ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ ٤ · أَنَامُ ٥

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I wake up at six o'clock.
  2. I make wudu, then I pray.
  3. We have dinner together.
  4. I never go to bed late.
  5. My sister woke up early.
١) أَسْتَيْقِظُ فِي السَّاعَةِ السَّادِسَةِ.
٢) أَتَوَضَّأُ ثُمَّ أُصَلِّي.
٣) نَتَنَاوَلُ العَشَاءَ مَعًا.
٤) لَا أَنَامُ مُتَأَخِّرًا أَبَدًا.
٥) اسْتَيْقَظَتْ أُخْتِي مُبَكِّرًا.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. breakfast
  2. lunch
  3. dinner
  4. teeth
  5. face

Question 2 — Write the English meaning. (5 marks)

دَائِمًاعَادَةًأَحْيَانًا
أَبَدًاكُلَّ يَوْمٍ

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ. ( أَتَوَضَّأُ / أَنَامُ / أَلْعَبُ )
  2. أَمْسِ أَخِي مُبَكِّرًا. ( يَسْتَيْقِظُ / اسْتَيْقَظَ / أَسْتَيْقِظُ )
  3. نَتَنَاوَلُ فِي اللَّيْلِ. ( الفَطُورَ / العَشَاءَ / الغَدَاءَ )
  4. لَا أَتَأَخَّرُ . ( أَبَدًا / دَائِمًا / أَحْيَانًا )
  5. هُمَا مِنَ البَيْتِ فِي السَّابِعَةِ. ( يَخْرُجَانِ / يَخْرُجُونَ / تَخْرُجِينَ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your morning. Use ثُمَّ and one word for how often. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) فَطُور ٢) غَدَاء ٣) عَشَاء ٤) أَسْنَان ٥) وَجْه

Question 2

دَائِمًا = always · عَادَةً = usually · أَحْيَانًا = sometimes · أَبَدًا = never · كُلَّ يَوْمٍ = every day

Question 3

١) أَتَوَضَّأُ ٢) اسْتَيْقَظَ ٣) العَشَاءَ ٤) أَبَدًا ٥) يَخْرُجَانِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 13 of 16

الهِوَايَاتُ وَالرِّيَاضَة

Hobbies & Sport

Talk about the things you love doing in your free time, the sports you play and watch, and the matches your team wins or loses.

In this unit

  • Name fifteen hobbies and twenty words for sport.
  • Say what you like and do not like: أُحِبُّ / لَا أُحِبُّ.
  • Say what you love to do with أُحِبُّ أَنْ.
  • Ask and answer: What is your hobby?
  • Use eight hobby and sport verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitWant to, Like to, CanThe Present TenseThe Past TenseSingular, Dual & Plural

أ

Hobbies

الهِوَايَات

Most hobbies are nouns made from a verb: from قَرَأَ (he read) comes القِرَاءَة (reading).

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
هِوَايَةhobbyقِرَاءَةreading
كِتَابَةwritingرَسْمdrawing
تَلْوِينcolouringطَبْخcooking
زِرَاعَةgardening, plantingتَصْوِيرphotography
رُكُوبُ الدَّرَّاجَةِcyclingرُكُوبُ الخَيْلِhorse riding
أَلْعَابُ الفِيدْيُوvideo gamesحِفْظُ القُرْآنِmemorising the Quran
جَمْعُ الطَّوَابِعِcollecting stampsالشِّطْرَنْجchess
صَيْدُ السَّمَكِfishingالتَّخْيِيمcamping

Talking about your hobby

مَا هِوَايَتُكَ؟
What is your hobby? (to a boy)
مَا هِوَايَتُكِ؟
What is your hobby? (to a girl)
هِوَايَتِي القِرَاءَةُ.
My hobby is reading.
أُحِبُّ الرَّسْمَ.
I love drawing.
ب

Sport

الرِّيَاضَة
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
رِيَاضَةsportكُرَةball
كُرَةُ القَدَمِfootball (soccer)كُرَةُ السَّلَّةِbasketball
الكُرَةُ الطَّائِرَةُvolleyballالتِّنِسtennis
السِّبَاحَةswimmingالجَرْيrunning
فَرِيقteamلَاعِب / لَاعِبَةplayer (m./f.)
مُدَرِّبcoachمُبَارَاةmatch, game
مَلْعَبfield, stadiumمَسْبَحswimming pool
هَدَفgoalنَتِيجَةscore, result
فَائِزwinnerكَأْسcup, trophy
دَرَّاجَةbicycleصَافِرَةwhistle

Play, swim, run

Use يَلْعَبُ for games with a ball. Swimming and running have their own verbs.

أَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ.
I play basketball.
أَسْبَحُ فِي المَسْبَحِ.
I swim in the pool.
أَجْرِي فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
I run in the park.
ج

Likes and dislikes

مَا أُحِبُّ وَمَا لَا أُحِبُّ

After أُحِبُّ you can put a noun, or أَنْ with a verb.

ArabicEnglish
أُحِبُّ السِّبَاحَةَ.I love swimming.
أُحِبُّ أَنْ أَسْبَحَ.I love to swim.
لَا أُحِبُّ الجَرْيَ.I do not like running.
أُفَضِّلُ كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ.I prefer basketball.
هِوَايَتِي المُفَضَّلَةُ الرَّسْمُ.My favourite hobby is drawing.
هَلْ تُحِبُّ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ؟Do you like football?

After أَنْ the verb ends in a fatha

Say أَسْبَحَ, not أَسْبَحُ, after أَنْ. Grammar 20 explains this fully.

أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَلْعَبَ.
I want to play.
تُحِبُّ أُخْتِي أَنْ تَرْسُمَ.
My sister loves to draw.
د

Hobby and sport verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ الهِوَايَاتِ وَالرِّيَاضَة

Eight verbs for playing, winning and losing. Then one of them is shown with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
لَعِبَيَلْعَبُto playنَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ.
سَبَحَيَسْبَحُto swimأَسْبَحُ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
رَسَمَيَرْسُمُto drawتَرْسُمُ أُخْتِي صُورَةً جَمِيلَةً.
جَرَىيَجْرِيto runجَرَيْتُ فِي المَلْعَبِ.
فَازَيَفُوزُto winفَازَ فَرِيقُنَا فِي المُبَارَاةِ.
خَسِرَيَخْسَرُto loseخَسِرَ الفَرِيقُ الآخَرُ.
شَاهَدَيُشَاهِدُto watchنُشَاهِدُ المُبَارَاةَ مَعًا.
تَدَرَّبَيَتَدَرَّبُto train, to practiseيَتَدَرَّبُ الفَرِيقُ مَرَّتَيْنِ فِي الأُسْبُوعِ.

One verb, all the pronouns: سَبَحَ / يَسْبَحُ (to swim)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاسَبَحْتُأَسْبَحُI swim
أَنْتَسَبَحْتَتَسْبَحُyou swim (m.)
أَنْتِسَبَحْتِتَسْبَحِينَyou swim (f.)
هُوَسَبَحَيَسْبَحُhe swims
هِيَسَبَحَتْتَسْبَحُshe swims
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاسَبَحْتُمَاتَسْبَحَانِyou two swim
هُمَاسَبَحَايَسْبَحَانِthe two of them swim
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُسَبَحْنَانَسْبَحُwe swim
أَنْتُمْسَبَحْتُمْتَسْبَحُونَyou swim (pl.)
هُمْسَبَحُوايَسْبَحُونَthey swim
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
إِبْرَاهِيم: مَا هِوَايَتُكَ يَا حَمْزَةُ؟
Ibrahim: What is your hobby, Hamza?
حَمْزَة: أُحِبُّ كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ كَثِيرًا. أَلْعَبُ مَعَ فَرِيقِ المَدْرَسَةِ.
Hamza: I love basketball a lot. I play with the school team.
إِبْرَاهِيم: مَتَى تَتَدَرَّبُونَ؟
Ibrahim: When do you (all) practise?
حَمْزَة: نَتَدَرَّبُ يَوْمَ الاثْنَيْنِ وَيَوْمَ الأَرْبِعَاءِ. وَأَنْتَ؟
Hamza: We practise on Monday and Wednesday. And you?
إِبْرَاهِيم: أَنَا أُحِبُّ السِّبَاحَةَ وَالرَّسْمَ. هَلْ فَازَ فَرِيقُكُمْ أَمْسِ؟
Ibrahim: I love swimming and drawing. Did your team win yesterday?
حَمْزَة: نَعَمْ، الحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ! فُزْنَا فِي المُبَارَاةِ.
Hamza: Yes, praise be to Allah! We won the match.

Model sentences

  1. هِوَايَتِي المُفَضَّلَةُ القِرَاءَةُ.
    My favourite hobby is reading.
  2. أَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ مَعَ أَصْدِقَائِي.
    I play football with my friends.
  3. تُحِبُّ أُخْتِي الرَّسْمَ وَالتَّلْوِينَ.
    My sister loves drawing and colouring.
  4. نَسْبَحُ فِي المَسْبَحِ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
    We swim in the pool in summer.
  5. أَرْكَبُ دَرَّاجَتِي فِي الحَدِيقَةِ العَامَّةِ.
    I ride my bicycle in the park.
  6. فَازَ فَرِيقُ مَدْرَسَتِنَا بِالكَأْسِ.
    Our school team won the cup.
  7. فِي فَرِيقِ كُرَةِ السَّلَّةِ خَمْسَةُ لَاعِبِينَ.
    A basketball team has five players.
  8. المُدَرِّبُ يُسَاعِدُ اللَّاعِبِينَ.
    The coach helps the players.
  9. شَاهَدْنَا المُبَارَاةَ فِي التِّلْفَازِ.
    We watched the match on television.
  10. لَا أُحِبُّ أَلْعَابَ الفِيدْيُو كَثِيرًا.
    I do not like video games much.
  11. أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَتَعَلَّمَ الشِّطْرَنْجَ.
    I want to learn chess.
  12. يَتَدَرَّبُ أَخِي عَلَى السِّبَاحَةِ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
    My brother trains in swimming every day.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

رَسْمفَرِيقمُبَارَاة
هَدَفمَسْبَحدَرَّاجَة

رَسْم = drawing · فَرِيق = team · مُبَارَاة = match · هَدَف = goal · مَسْبَح = swimming pool · دَرَّاجَة = bicycle

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

كُرَةَ — المَسْبَحِ — الرَّسْمَ — المُبَارَاةَ — هِوَايَتُكَ
  1. مَا يَا عُمَرُ؟
  2. أَلْعَبُ القَدَمِ.
  3. أَسْبَحُ فِي .
  4. تُحِبُّ أُخْتِي بِالأَلْوَانِ.
  5. شَاهَدْنَا فِي التِّلْفَازِ.
١) هِوَايَتُكَ ٢) كُرَةَ ٣) المَسْبَحِ ٤) الرَّسْمَ ٥) المُبَارَاةَ

3Choose the right form of سَبَحَ / يَسْبَحُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا فِي الصَّيْفِ. ( أَسْبَحُ / يَسْبَحُ )
  2. هِيَ أَمْسِ. ( سَبَحَتْ / سَبَحْتُ )
  3. أَنْتُمْ جَيِّدًا. ( تَسْبَحُونَ / تَسْبَحَانِ )
  4. هُمَا فِي البَحْرِ. ( يَسْبَحَانِ / يَسْبَحُونَ )
  5. أَنْتِ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ. ( تَسْبَحِينَ / تَسْبَحُ )
١) أَسْبَحُ ٢) سَبَحَتْ ٣) تَسْبَحُونَ ٤) يَسْبَحَانِ ٥) تَسْبَحِينَ

4Choose the right verb for each hobby.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ المُنَاسِب.

  1. كُرَةَ القَدَمِ. ( أَلْعَبُ / أَسْبَحُ )
  2. فِي المَسْبَحِ. ( أَلْعَبُ / أَسْبَحُ )
  3. صُورَةً جَمِيلَةً. ( أَرْسُمُ / أَجْرِي )
  4. فِي الحَدِيقَةِ كُلَّ صَبَاحٍ. ( أَجْرِي / أَرْسُمُ )
  5. الكِتَابَ. ( أَقْرَأُ / أَلْعَبُ )
١) أَلْعَبُ ٢) أَسْبَحُ ٣) أَرْسُمُ ٤) أَجْرِي ٥) أَقْرَأُ

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

مَا هِوَايَتُكَ؟ — مَبْرُوكٌ! — هَيَّا نَلْعَبْ! — هِوَايَتِي الرَّسْمُ. — هَلْ تُحِبُّ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ؟
  1. You want to know a new classmate's hobby.
  2. Your friend's team has just won the cup.
  3. You want your friends to come and play with you.
  4. Someone asks about your hobby, and you love drawing.
  5. You want to know if your friend likes football.
١) مَا هِوَايَتُكَ؟
٢) مَبْرُوكٌ!
٣) هَيَّا نَلْعَبْ!
٤) هِوَايَتِي الرَّسْمُ.
٥) هَلْ تُحِبُّ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ؟

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. My hobby is reading.
  2. I play basketball.
  3. We swam in the pool.
  4. Our team won the match.
  5. I want to learn chess.
١) هِوَايَتِي القِرَاءَةُ.
٢) أَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ.
٣) سَبَحْنَا فِي المَسْبَحِ.
٤) فَازَ فَرِيقُنَا فِي المُبَارَاةِ.
٥) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَتَعَلَّمَ الشِّطْرَنْجَ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. football
  2. team
  3. match
  4. swimming
  5. drawing

Question 2 — Write the verb in the past tense. (5 marks)

  1. أَنَا (لَعِبَ) ←
  2. هِيَ (سَبَحَ) ←
  3. نَحْنُ (فَازَ) ←
  4. هُمْ (شَاهَدَ) ←
  5. هُوَ (رَسَمَ) ←

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أُحِبُّ أَنْ . ( أَسْبَحَ / سَبَحَ / سِبَاحَة )
  2. هِوَايَتُكَ؟ ( مَا / مَنْ / أَيْنَ )
  3. نَسْبَحُ فِي . ( المَسْبَحِ / المَطْبَخِ / المَكْتَبَةِ )
  4. أَنْتُمَا كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ. ( تَلْعَبَانِ / تَلْعَبُونَ / يَلْعَبُ )
  5. يُسَاعِدُ اللَّاعِبِينَ. ( المُدَرِّبُ / المَسْبَحُ / الهَدَفُ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your hobbies. Use أُحِبُّ and one verb in the past. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) كُرَةُ القَدَمِ ٢) فَرِيق ٣) مُبَارَاة ٤) السِّبَاحَة ٥) رَسْم

Question 2

١) لَعِبْتُ ٢) سَبَحَتْ ٣) فُزْنَا ٤) شَاهَدُوا ٥) رَسَمَ

Question 3

١) أَسْبَحَ ٢) مَا ٣) المَسْبَحِ ٤) تَلْعَبَانِ ٥) المُدَرِّبُ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 14 of 16

المِهَنُ وَالعَمَل

Jobs & Work

Name the jobs people do and the places where they work, ask someone what they do, and say what you want to be.

In this unit

  • Name more than twenty jobs, with the feminine form where it exists.
  • Name the places where people work.
  • Ask and answer: What do you do? What do you want to be?
  • Use eight work verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitMasculine & FeminineWant to, Like to, CanWas and Were: كَانَThe Present Tense

أ

Jobs for men and women

المِهَن

Most jobs take ة for a woman — the same rule as طَالِب / طَالِبَة in Grammar 6.

MaleEnglishFemaleEnglish
طَبِيبdoctorطَبِيبَةdoctor (f.)
مُهَنْدِسengineerمُهَنْدِسَةengineer (f.)
مُعَلِّمteacherمُعَلِّمَةteacher (f.)
مُمَرِّضnurseمُمَرِّضَةnurse (f.)
شُرْطِيّpolice officerشُرْطِيَّةpolice officer (f.)
طَبَّاخcook, chefطَبَّاخَةcook (f.)
مُزَارِعfarmerمُزَارِعَةfarmer (f.)
تَاجِرmerchant, shopkeeperتَاجِرَةmerchant (f.)
سَائِقdriverسَائِقَةdriver (f.)
مُوَظَّفemployee, office workerمُوَظَّفَةemployee (f.)
مُحَاسِبaccountantمُحَاسِبَةaccountant (f.)
ب

More jobs and places of work

مِهَنٌ أُخْرَى وَأَمَاكِنُ العَمَل
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
نَجَّارcarpenterخَبَّازbaker
حَلَّاقbarberسَبَّاكplumber
طَيَّارpilotكَهْرَبَائِيّelectrician
رَجُلُ إِطْفَاءٍfirefighterسَاعِي البَرِيدِmail carrier
مُبَرْمِجprogrammerإِمَامimam
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
مُسْتَشْفَىhospitalمَكْتَبoffice
مَصْنَعfactoryمَزْرَعَةfarm
مَطْعَمrestaurantمَخْبَزbakery
مَطَارairportشَرِكَةcompany
عَمَل / وَظِيفَةwork / jobرَاتِبsalary

The craft pattern: فَعَّال

Many crafts have a doubled middle letter and a long a. Once you know the pattern you can spot a job straight away.

خَبَزَ ← خَبَّاز
he baked → baker
طَبَخَ ← طَبَّاخ
he cooked → cook
حَلَقَ ← حَلَّاق
he shaved → barber
نَجَرَ ← نَجَّار
he carved wood → carpenter
ج

Who works where?

مَنْ يَعْمَلُ أَيْنَ؟
JobWorks inEnglish
الطَّبِيبُيَعْمَلُ فِي المُسْتَشْفَى.The doctor works in the hospital.
المُعَلِّمَةُتَعْمَلُ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.The teacher works at the school.
الطَّيَّارُيَعْمَلُ فِي المَطَارِ.The pilot works at the airport.
المُزَارِعُيَعْمَلُ فِي المَزْرَعَةِ.The farmer works on the farm.
الخَبَّازُيَعْمَلُ فِي المَخْبَزِ.The baker works in the bakery.
المُوَظَّفَةُتَعْمَلُ فِي المَكْتَبِ.The employee works in the office.
الطَّبَّاخُيَعْمَلُ فِي المَطْعَمِ.The cook works in the restaurant.

Asking about work

After أَعْمَلُ (I work as) and أَكُونَ (to be) the job ends in ـًا. See Grammar 18 and Grammar 20.

مَاذَا تَعْمَلُ؟
What do you do? (to a man)
مَاذَا تَعْمَلِينَ؟
What do you do? (to a woman)
أَعْمَلُ مُهَنْدِسًا.
I work as an engineer.
مَاذَا تُرِيدُ أَنْ تَكُونَ؟
What do you want to be?
أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَكُونَ طَبِيبًا.
I want to be a doctor.
د

Work verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ العَمَل

Eight verbs for what people do at work. Then one of them is shown with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
عَمِلَيَعْمَلُto workيَعْمَلُ أَبِي فِي شَرِكَةٍ كَبِيرَةٍ.
بَنَىيَبْنِيto buildيَبْنِي العُمَّالُ بَيْتًا جَدِيدًا.
عَالَجَيُعَالِجُto treat (a patient)يُعَالِجُ الطَّبِيبُ المَرْضَى.
زَرَعَيَزْرَعُto plant, to growيَزْرَعُ المُزَارِعُ القَمْحَ.
قَادَيَقُودُto drive, to leadيَقُودُ السَّائِقُ الحَافِلَةَ.
بَاعَيَبِيعُto sellيَبِيعُ التَّاجِرُ المَلَابِسَ.
خَبَزَيَخْبِزُto bakeيَخْبِزُ الخَبَّازُ الخُبْزَ.
أَصْلَحَيُصْلِحُto repair, to fixيُصْلِحُ السَّبَّاكُ الحَمَّامَ.

One verb, all the pronouns: عَمِلَ / يَعْمَلُ (to work)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاعَمِلْتُأَعْمَلُI work
أَنْتَعَمِلْتَتَعْمَلُyou work (m.)
أَنْتِعَمِلْتِتَعْمَلِينَyou work (f.)
هُوَعَمِلَيَعْمَلُhe works
هِيَعَمِلَتْتَعْمَلُshe works
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاعَمِلْتُمَاتَعْمَلَانِyou two work
هُمَاعَمِلَايَعْمَلَانِthe two of them work
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُعَمِلْنَانَعْمَلُwe work
أَنْتُمْعَمِلْتُمْتَعْمَلُونَyou work (pl.)
هُمْعَمِلُوايَعْمَلُونَthey work
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
المُعَلِّمَة: يَا سَلْمَانُ، مَاذَا يَعْمَلُ أَبُوكَ؟
Teacher: Salman, what does your father do?
سَلْمَان: أَبِي مُهَنْدِسٌ، يَعْمَلُ فِي شَرِكَةٍ كَبِيرَةٍ.
Salman: My father is an engineer; he works in a big company.
المُعَلِّمَة: وَمَاذَا تُرِيدُ أَنْ تَكُونَ؟
Teacher: And what do you want to be?
سَلْمَان: أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَكُونَ طَيَّارًا.
Salman: I want to be a pilot.
المُعَلِّمَة: وَأَنْتِ يَا فَاطِمَةُ؟
Teacher: And you, Fatima?
فَاطِمَة: أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَكُونَ طَبِيبَةً لِأُسَاعِدَ المَرْضَى.
Fatima: I want to be a doctor, to help sick people.

Model sentences

  1. أُمِّي مُعَلِّمَةٌ فِي مَدْرَسَةٍ قَرِيبَةٍ.
    My mother is a teacher at a nearby school.
  2. عَمِّي طَبِيبٌ، يَعْمَلُ فِي المُسْتَشْفَى.
    My uncle is a doctor; he works at the hospital.
  3. تُسَاعِدُ المُمَرِّضَةُ المَرْضَى.
    The nurse helps the patients.
  4. يَقُودُ السَّائِقُ الحَافِلَةَ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
    The driver drives the bus to school.
  5. يَخْبِزُ الخَبَّازُ الخُبْزَ فِي الصَّبَاحِ البَاكِرِ.
    The baker bakes bread early in the morning.
  6. يَعْمَلُ المُزَارِعُ فِي المَزْرَعَةِ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
    The farmer works on the farm every day.
  7. يُصْلِحُ السَّبَّاكُ الحَمَّامَ.
    The plumber repairs the bathroom.
  8. عَمِلَ جَدِّي تَاجِرًا فِي مِصْرَ.
    My grandfather worked as a merchant in Egypt.
  9. أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَكُونَ مُهَنْدِسًا.
    I want to be an engineer.
  10. مَاذَا تَعْمَلِينَ يَا خَالَتِي؟ — أَنَا مُحَاسِبَةٌ.
    What do you do, auntie? — I am an accountant.
  11. الشُّرْطِيُّ يُسَاعِدُ النَّاسَ فِي الشَّارِعِ.
    The police officer helps people in the street.
  12. يَبْدَأُ عَمَلُ أَبِي فِي السَّاعَةِ الثَّامِنَةِ.
    My father's work starts at eight o'clock.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the feminine form.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المُؤَنَّث.

  1. طَبِيب ←
  2. مُهَنْدِس ←
  3. مُعَلِّم ←
  4. سَائِق ←
  5. مُوَظَّف ←
١) طَبِيبَة ٢) مُهَنْدِسَة ٣) مُعَلِّمَة ٤) سَائِقَة ٥) مُوَظَّفَة

2Who works where? Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

المُسْتَشْفَى — المَزْرَعَةِ — المَطَارِ — المَخْبَزِ — المَدْرَسَةِ
  1. يَعْمَلُ الطَّبِيبُ فِي .
  2. يَعْمَلُ المُزَارِعُ فِي .
  3. يَعْمَلُ الطَّيَّارُ فِي .
  4. يَعْمَلُ الخَبَّازُ فِي .
  5. تَعْمَلُ المُعَلِّمَةُ فِي .
١) المُسْتَشْفَى ٢) المَزْرَعَةِ ٣) المَطَارِ ٤) المَخْبَزِ ٥) المَدْرَسَةِ

3Choose the right form of عَمِلَ / يَعْمَلُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا فِي مَكْتَبٍ. ( أَعْمَلُ / يَعْمَلُ )
  2. هِيَ مُمَرِّضَةً. ( تَعْمَلُ / يَعْمَلُ )
  3. هُمْ فِي المَصْنَعِ أَمْسِ. ( عَمِلُوا / عَمِلَا )
  4. أَنْتُمَا مَعًا. ( تَعْمَلَانِ / تَعْمَلُونَ )
  5. مَاذَا يَا مَرْيَمُ؟ ( تَعْمَلِينَ / تَعْمَلُ )
١) أَعْمَلُ ٢) تَعْمَلُ ٣) عَمِلُوا ٤) تَعْمَلَانِ ٥) تَعْمَلِينَ

4Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

نَجَّارخَبَّازحَلَّاق
مَصْنَعرَاتِبشَرِكَة

نَجَّار = carpenter · خَبَّاز = baker · حَلَّاق = barber · مَصْنَع = factory · رَاتِب = salary · شَرِكَة = company

5Who is it? Write the job in Arabic.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَنْ هُوَ؟ اكْتُبِ المِهْنَةَ.

  1. He treats sick people in a hospital.
  2. She teaches students at school.
  3. He flies planes.
  4. He bakes bread every morning.
  5. She helps the doctor and looks after the patients.
١) طَبِيب
٢) مُعَلِّمَة
٣) طَيَّار
٤) خَبَّاز
٥) مُمَرِّضَة

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. My father is an engineer.
  2. She works in a hospital.
  3. What do you want to be? (to a boy)
  4. I want to be a teacher. (a boy speaking)
  5. The farmer worked on the farm.
١) أَبِي مُهَنْدِسٌ.
٢) تَعْمَلُ فِي المُسْتَشْفَى.
٣) مَاذَا تُرِيدُ أَنْ تَكُونَ؟
٤) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَكُونَ مُعَلِّمًا.
٥) عَمِلَ المُزَارِعُ فِي المَزْرَعَةِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. doctor (f.)
  2. engineer
  3. pilot
  4. farm
  5. hospital

Question 2 — Where does each person work? (5 marks)

  1. الطَّبَّاخُ يَعْمَلُ فِي .
  2. المُوَظَّفُ يَعْمَلُ فِي .
  3. الخَبَّازُ يَعْمَلُ فِي .
  4. المُعَلِّمُ يَعْمَلُ فِي .
  5. الطَّيَّارُ يَعْمَلُ فِي .

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَكُونَ . ( طَبِيبًا / طَبِيبٌ / طَبِيبَانِ )
  2. مَاذَا يَا سَارَةُ؟ ( تَعْمَلِينَ / يَعْمَلُ / أَعْمَلُ )
  3. يَخْبِزُ الخُبْزَ. ( الخَبَّازُ / الحَلَّاقُ / النَّجَّارُ )
  4. أَمْسِ أَبِي فِي البَيْتِ. ( يَعْمَلُ / عَمِلَ / نَعْمَلُ )
  5. هُمَا فِي المُسْتَشْفَى. ( يَعْمَلَانِ / يَعْمَلُونَ / تَعْمَلُ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences: what your parents do, and what you want to be. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) طَبِيبَة ٢) مُهَنْدِس ٣) طَيَّار ٤) مَزْرَعَة ٥) مُسْتَشْفَى

Question 2

١) المَطْعَمِ ٢) المَكْتَبِ ٣) المَخْبَزِ ٤) المَدْرَسَةِ ٥) المَطَارِ

Question 3

١) طَبِيبًا ٢) تَعْمَلِينَ ٣) الخَبَّازُ ٤) عَمِلَ ٥) يَعْمَلَانِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 15 of 16

المَسْجِدُ وَالعِبَادَات

The Masjid & Worship

Name the parts of the masjid and the people in it, the five daily prayers, the movements of the prayer, and the main acts of worship.

In this unit

  • Name the parts of the masjid and the people who serve in it.
  • Say the names of the five daily prayers in order.
  • Name the washing of wudu and the positions of the prayer.
  • Use the phrases you hear and say at the masjid.
  • Use eight worship verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitThe Past TenseThe Present TenseNumbers & CountingSingular, Dual & Plural

أ

The masjid and its people

المَسْجِدُ وَأَهْلُه
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
مَسْجِدmasjid, mosqueمُصَلَّىprayer hall, prayer room
قِبْلَةdirection of prayerمِحْرَابprayer niche, where the imam stands
مِنْبَرpulpitمِئْذَنَةminaret
قُبَّةdomeمِيضَأَةwashing area for wudu
سَجَّادَةُ الصَّلَاةِprayer rugصَفّrow (of worshippers)
مُصْحَفcopy of the Quranحَلْقَةstudy circle

People at the masjid

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
إِمَامimam, the one who leads the prayerمُؤَذِّنthe one who calls to prayer
خَطِيبthe speaker of the Friday sermonالمُصَلِّي / المُصَلُّونَthe worshipper / the worshippers
أَذَانthe call to prayerإِقَامَةthe call to start the prayer
خُطْبَةsermonجَمَاعَةcongregation, group

One root, many words

The word مَسْجِد comes from سَجَدَ (he prostrated). A word on the pattern مَفْعِل often names a place.

سَجَدَ
he prostrated
سُجُود
prostration
مَسْجِد
place of prostration — masjid
سَجَّادَة
prayer rug
ب

The five daily prayers

الصَّلَوَاتُ الخَمْس

Each prayer is named after its time of day. Say صَلَاةُ before the name: صَلَاةُ الفَجْرِ.

PrayerEnglishWhen
الفَجْرthe dawn prayerbefore sunrise
الظُّهْرthe noon prayerjust after midday
العَصْرthe afternoon prayerlate afternoon
المَغْرِبthe sunset prayerjust after sunset
العِشَاءthe night prayerat night

Other prayers you will hear about

صَلَاةُ الجُمُعَةِ
the Friday prayer, with a sermon
صَلَاةُ الجَمَاعَةِ
prayer together in congregation
صَلَاةُ العِيدِ
the Eid prayer
ج

Wudu and the prayer

الوُضُوءُ وَالصَّلَاة
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
وُضُوءwudu, washing before prayerمَاءwater
وَجْهfaceيَدَانِtwo hands
ذِرَاعarmرَأْسhead
أُذُنَانِtwo earsقَدَمَانِtwo feet
ArabicEnglish
قِيَامstanding
رُكُوعbowing
سُجُودprostration
جُلُوسsitting
رَكْعَةone unit of the prayer
تَسْلِيمending the prayer with the greeting of peace
د

Acts of worship and phrases

العِبَادَاتُ وَعِبَارَاتٌ مُفِيدَة
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
عِبَادَةworshipصَلَاةprayer
صَوْم / صِيَامfastingزَكَاةobligatory charity
صَدَقَةcharityحَجّpilgrimage to Makkah
دُعَاءsupplication, personal prayerذِكْرremembrance of Allah
القُرْآنthe Quranسُورَةchapter of the Quran
آيَةverseرَمَضَانRamadan, the month of fasting
عِيدfestival, Eidمُسْلِم / مُسْلِمَةMuslim (m./f.)

What we say at the masjid

السَّلَامُ عَلَيْكُمْ
Peace be upon you.
وَعَلَيْكُمُ السَّلَامُ
And upon you be peace.
اللهُ أَكْبَرُ
Allah is the Greatest.
جَزَاكَ اللهُ خَيْرًا
May Allah reward you with good.
تَقَبَّلَ اللهُ
May Allah accept (your prayer).
هـ

Worship verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ العِبَادَة

Eight verbs for prayer and worship. Then one of them is shown with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
تَوَضَّأَيَتَوَضَّأُto make wuduأَتَوَضَّأُ فِي المِيضَأَةِ.
صَلَّىيُصَلِّيto prayنُصَلِّي فِي الصَّفِّ الأَوَّلِ.
رَكَعَيَرْكَعُto bowرَكَعَ الإِمَامُ فَرَكَعْنَا.
سَجَدَيَسْجُدُto prostrateيَسْجُدُ المُصَلِّي عَلَى السَّجَّادَةِ.
قَرَأَيَقْرَأُto read, to reciteقَرَأْتُ سُورَةَ الفَاتِحَةِ.
دَعَايَدْعُوto supplicateأَدْعُو لِوَالِدَيَّ.
صَامَيَصُومُto fastنَصُومُ شَهْرَ رَمَضَانَ.
أَذَّنَيُؤَذِّنُto call to prayerأَذَّنَ المُؤَذِّنُ لِصَلَاةِ الظُّهْرِ.

One verb, all the pronouns: سَجَدَ / يَسْجُدُ (to prostrate)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاسَجَدْتُأَسْجُدُI prostrate
أَنْتَسَجَدْتَتَسْجُدُyou prostrate (m.)
أَنْتِسَجَدْتِتَسْجُدِينَyou prostrate (f.)
هُوَسَجَدَيَسْجُدُhe prostrates
هِيَسَجَدَتْتَسْجُدُshe prostrates
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاسَجَدْتُمَاتَسْجُدَانِyou two prostrate
هُمَاسَجَدَايَسْجُدَانِthe two of them prostrate
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُسَجَدْنَانَسْجُدُwe prostrate
أَنْتُمْسَجَدْتُمْتَسْجُدُونَyou prostrate (pl.)
هُمْسَجَدُوايَسْجُدُونَthey prostrate
و

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
أَحْمَد: السَّلَامُ عَلَيْكُمْ يَا عَلِيُّ.
Ahmad: Peace be upon you, Ali.
عَلِيّ: وَعَلَيْكُمُ السَّلَامُ. هَلْ تَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ؟
Ali: And upon you be peace. Are you going to the masjid?
أَحْمَد: نَعَمْ، أَذَّنَ المُؤَذِّنُ لِصَلَاةِ العَصْرِ.
Ahmad: Yes, the call to the afternoon prayer has been made.
عَلِيّ: انْتَظِرْنِي، سَأَتَوَضَّأُ أَوَّلًا.
Ali: Wait for me, I will make wudu first.
أَحْمَد: هَيَّا بِسُرْعَةٍ، الإِقَامَةُ بَعْدَ عَشْرِ دَقَائِقَ.
Ahmad: Come on, quickly — the prayer starts in ten minutes.
عَلِيّ: جَزَاكَ اللهُ خَيْرًا.
Ali: May Allah reward you with good.

Model sentences

  1. نُصَلِّي خَمْسَ صَلَوَاتٍ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
    We pray five prayers every day.
  2. أَتَوَضَّأُ قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
    I make wudu before the prayer.
  3. يَقِفُ الإِمَامُ أَمَامَ المُصَلِّينَ.
    The imam stands in front of the worshippers.
  4. يُؤَذِّنُ المُؤَذِّنُ خَمْسَ مَرَّاتٍ فِي اليَوْمِ.
    The caller to prayer calls five times a day.
  5. نَخْلَعُ أَحْذِيَتَنَا عِنْدَ بَابِ المَسْجِدِ.
    We take off our shoes at the masjid door.
  6. نَقِفُ فِي صُفُوفٍ مُسْتَقِيمَةٍ.
    We stand in straight rows.
  7. يَخْطُبُ الخَطِيبُ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ.
    The speaker gives the sermon on Friday.
  8. أَقْرَأُ القُرْآنَ بَعْدَ صَلَاةِ الفَجْرِ.
    I read the Quran after the dawn prayer.
  9. نَصُومُ شَهْرَ رَمَضَانَ.
    We fast the month of Ramadan.
  10. رَكَعْنَا وَسَجَدْنَا مَعَ الإِمَامِ.
    We bowed and prostrated with the imam.
  11. يَدْرُسُ الطُّلَّابُ فِي حَلْقَةِ القُرْآنِ.
    The students study in the Quran circle.
  12. فِي مَسْجِدِنَا مِئْذَنَةٌ عَالِيَةٌ.
    Our masjid has a tall minaret.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

مِنْبَرقِبْلَةمِئْذَنَة
صَفّوُضُوءسُجُود

مِنْبَر = pulpit · قِبْلَة = direction of prayer · مِئْذَنَة = minaret · صَفّ = row · وُضُوء = wudu · سُجُود = prostration

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

الفَجْرِ — المِيضَأَةِ — الإِمَامُ — أَحْذِيَتَنَا — رَمَضَانَ
  1. أَتَوَضَّأُ فِي .
  2. نَخْلَعُ عِنْدَ البَابِ.
  3. يَقِفُ أَمَامَ المُصَلِّينَ.
  4. نَصُومُ شَهْرَ .
  5. أَسْتَيْقِظُ لِصَلَاةِ .
١) المِيضَأَةِ ٢) أَحْذِيَتَنَا ٣) الإِمَامُ ٤) رَمَضَانَ ٥) الفَجْرِ

3Choose the right form of سَجَدَ / يَسْجُدُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا عَلَى السَّجَّادَةِ. ( أَسْجُدُ / يَسْجُدُ )
  2. هُمْ مَعَ الإِمَامِ. ( سَجَدُوا / سَجَدَا )
  3. هِيَ فِي صَلَاتِهَا. ( تَسْجُدُ / أَسْجُدُ )
  4. أَنْتُمَا بَعْدَ الرُّكُوعِ. ( تَسْجُدَانِ / تَسْجُدُونَ )
  5. أَنْتِ بِهُدُوءٍ. ( تَسْجُدِينَ / تَسْجُدُ )
١) أَسْجُدُ ٢) سَجَدُوا ٣) تَسْجُدُ ٤) تَسْجُدَانِ ٥) تَسْجُدِينَ

4Put the five prayers in order. Write 1 to 5.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: رَتِّبِ الصَّلَوَاتِ مِنْ ١ إِلَى ٥.

PrayerOrder
العَصْر
الفَجْر
العِشَاء
الظُّهْر
المَغْرِب
الفَجْر ١ · الظُّهْر ٢ · العَصْر ٣ · المَغْرِب ٤ · العِشَاء ٥

5What do you say? Choose from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: مَاذَا تَقُولُ؟ اخْتَرْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

السَّلَامُ عَلَيْكُمْ — وَعَلَيْكُمُ السَّلَامُ — جَزَاكَ اللهُ خَيْرًا — تَقَبَّلَ اللهُ
  1. You walk into the masjid and meet a friend.
  2. Someone greets you first.
  3. A friend lends you his prayer rug.
  4. Your friend has just finished his prayer.
١) السَّلَامُ عَلَيْكُمْ
٢) وَعَلَيْكُمُ السَّلَامُ
٣) جَزَاكَ اللهُ خَيْرًا
٤) تَقَبَّلَ اللهُ

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I make wudu before the prayer.
  2. We pray five prayers every day.
  3. The imam stands in front of the worshippers.
  4. We fast in Ramadan.
  5. I read the Quran after the dawn prayer.
١) أَتَوَضَّأُ قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
٢) نُصَلِّي خَمْسَ صَلَوَاتٍ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
٣) يَقِفُ الإِمَامُ أَمَامَ المُصَلِّينَ.
٤) نَصُومُ فِي رَمَضَانَ.
٥) أَقْرَأُ القُرْآنَ بَعْدَ صَلَاةِ الفَجْرِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. masjid
  2. imam
  3. prayer
  4. fasting
  5. the Quran

Question 2 — Write the name of the prayer in Arabic. (5 marks)

  1. the dawn prayer
  2. the noon prayer
  3. the afternoon prayer
  4. the sunset prayer
  5. the night prayer

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. يُؤَذِّنُ لِلصَّلَاةِ. ( المُؤَذِّنُ / المِنْبَرُ / المِحْرَابُ )
  2. يَخْطُبُ الخَطِيبُ عَلَى . ( المِنْبَرِ / المِيضَأَةِ / الحِذَاءِ )
  3. أَمْسِ فِي الصَّفِّ الأَوَّلِ. ( أُصَلِّي / صَلَّيْتُ / يُصَلِّي )
  4. هُمَا مَعَ الإِمَامِ. ( يَسْجُدَانِ / يَسْجُدُونَ / تَسْجُدُ )
  5. نَتَّجِهُ فِي الصَّلَاةِ إِلَى . ( القِبْلَةِ / القُبَّةِ / المَكْتَبَةِ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about a visit to the masjid. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) مَسْجِد ٢) إِمَام ٣) صَلَاة ٤) صَوْم ٥) القُرْآن

Question 2

١) الفَجْر ٢) الظُّهْر ٣) العَصْر ٤) المَغْرِب ٥) العِشَاء

Question 3

١) المُؤَذِّنُ ٢) المِنْبَرِ ٣) صَلَّيْتُ ٤) يَسْجُدَانِ ٥) القِبْلَةِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Vocabulary · Unit 16 of 16

الهَاتِفُ وَالحَاسُوب

Phone & Computer

Name your devices and what is on them, send messages and make calls, save and print your work, and stay safe online.

In this unit

  • Name the parts of a phone and a computer.
  • Use internet words: website, app, message, email, password.
  • Say useful phrases: Where is the charger? The battery is low.
  • Follow simple rules for staying safe online.
  • Use eight technology verbs in the past and the present.

Grammar for this unitThe Present TenseCommands & ProhibitionsSaying No: NegationThe Past Tense

أ

Devices

الأَجْهِزَة
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
هَاتِفphoneهَاتِف مَحْمُولmobile phone
حَاسُوبcomputerحَاسُوب مَحْمُولlaptop
جِهَاز لَوْحِيّtabletشَاشَةscreen
لَوْحَةُ المَفَاتِيحِkeyboardفَأْرَةmouse
شَاحِنchargerبَطَّارِيَّةbattery
سَمَّاعَةheadphones, speakerكَامِيرَاcamera
طَابِعَةprinterزِرّbutton
سِلْكcable, wireجِهَازdevice

Machines named after what they do

Many devices use the pattern فَاعِل / فَاعِلَة — the one that does the action.

طَبَعَ ← طَابِعَة
he printed → printer
شَحَنَ ← شَاحِن
he charged → charger
ب

The internet

الإِنْتَرْنِت
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
الإِنْتَرْنِتthe internetشَبَكَةnetwork, Wi-Fi
مَوْقِعwebsiteتَطْبِيقapp
رِسَالَةmessageالبَرِيدُ الإِلِكْتُرُونِيُّemail
كَلِمَةُ المُرُورِpasswordحِسَابaccount
مِلَفّfileصُورَةphoto, picture
فِيدْيُوvideoبَحْثsearch
رَابِطlinkرَقْمُ الهَاتِفِphone number
مُكَالَمَةphone callكَلِمَةword
ج

Useful phrases and staying safe

عِبَارَاتٌ مُفِيدَةٌ وَالأَمَان
ArabicEnglish
أَيْنَ الشَّاحِنُ؟Where is the charger?
البَطَّارِيَّةُ ضَعِيفَةٌ.The battery is low.
مَا كَلِمَةُ مُرُورِ الشَّبَكَةِ؟What is the Wi-Fi password?
أَرْسِلْ لِي رِسَالَةً.Send me a message.
اتَّصِلْ بِي غَدًا.Call me tomorrow.
الإِنْتَرْنِتُ بَطِيءٌ اليَوْمَ.The internet is slow today.
احْفَظِ المِلَفَّ.Save the file.
مَا رَقْمُ هَاتِفِكَ؟What is your phone number?

Staying safe online

Keep your password to yourself, ask before you download, and never talk to strangers online. Put the phone away during prayer and homework.

لَا تُعْطِ كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ لِأَحَدٍ.
Do not give your password to anyone.
اسْأَلْ وَالِدَيْكَ قَبْلَ تَنْزِيلِ أَيِّ تَطْبِيقٍ.
Ask your parents before downloading any app.
لَا تَتَكَلَّمْ مَعَ الغُرَبَاءِ عَلَى الإِنْتَرْنِتِ.
Do not talk with strangers on the internet.
ضَعِ الهَاتِفَ جَانِبًا وَقْتَ الصَّلَاةِ.
Put the phone aside at prayer time.
د

Technology verbs: past and present

أَفْعَالُ التِّقْنِيَة

Eight verbs for using a phone or a computer. Then one of them is shown with every pronoun.

PastPresentEnglishExample
اتَّصَلَيَتَّصِلُto call (by phone)اتَّصَلْتُ بِجَدَّتِي أَمْسِ.
أَرْسَلَيُرْسِلُto sendأُرْسِلُ رِسَالَةً إِلَى صَدِيقِي.
كَتَبَيَكْتُبُto write, to typeأَكْتُبُ كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ.
حَفِظَيَحْفَظُto saveحَفِظْتُ المِلَفَّ.
بَحَثَيَبْحَثُto searchأَبْحَثُ عَنْ صُورَةٍ.
شَحَنَيَشْحَنُto chargeأَشْحَنُ هَاتِفِي فِي اللَّيْلِ.
طَبَعَيَطْبَعُto printطَبَعَ المُعَلِّمُ الأَوْرَاقَ.
فَتَحَيَفْتَحُto openأَفْتَحُ الحَاسُوبَ.

One verb, all the pronouns: أَرْسَلَ / يُرْسِلُ (to send)

PronounPastPresentMeaning (present)
One — singular
أَنَاأَرْسَلْتُأُرْسِلُI send
أَنْتَأَرْسَلْتَتُرْسِلُyou send (m.)
أَنْتِأَرْسَلْتِتُرْسِلِينَyou send (f.)
هُوَأَرْسَلَيُرْسِلُhe sends
هِيَأَرْسَلَتْتُرْسِلُshe sends
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاأَرْسَلْتُمَاتُرْسِلَانِyou two send
هُمَاأَرْسَلَايُرْسِلَانِthe two of them send
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُأَرْسَلْنَانُرْسِلُwe send
أَنْتُمْأَرْسَلْتُمْتُرْسِلُونَyou send (pl.)
هُمْأَرْسَلُوايُرْسِلُونَthey send

A present tense that starts with u

Verbs like أَرْسَلَ begin the present tense with a damma, not a fatha. Compare the two. See Grammar 11.

يَكْتُبُ
he writes — starts with ya
يُرْسِلُ
he sends — starts with yu
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
نُور: يَا أُمِّي، أَيْنَ الشَّاحِنُ؟ بَطَّارِيَّةُ هَاتِفِي ضَعِيفَةٌ.
Nour: Mum, where is the charger? My phone battery is low.
الأُمّ: الشَّاحِنُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ بِجَانِبِ الحَاسُوبِ.
Mother: The charger is on the desk next to the computer.
نُور: شُكْرًا. أُرِيدُ أَنْ أُرْسِلَ رِسَالَةً إِلَى المُعَلِّمَةِ.
Nour: Thanks. I want to send a message to the teacher.
الأُمّ: هَلْ أَنْهَيْتِ وَاجِبَكِ؟
Mother: Have you finished your homework?
نُور: نَعَمْ، كَتَبْتُهُ عَلَى الحَاسُوبِ وَحَفِظْتُ المِلَفَّ.
Nour: Yes, I typed it on the computer and saved the file.
الأُمّ: أَحْسَنْتِ! أَرْسِلِيهِ ثُمَّ ضَعِي الهَاتِفَ جَانِبًا.
Mother: Well done! Send it, then put the phone aside.

Model sentences

  1. عِنْدِي هَاتِفٌ جَدِيدٌ.
    I have a new phone.
  2. أَشْحَنُ هَاتِفِي كُلَّ لَيْلَةٍ.
    I charge my phone every night.
  3. أَرْسَلَ أَخِي رِسَالَةً إِلَى صَدِيقِهِ.
    My brother sent a message to his friend.
  4. اتَّصَلْتُ بِجَدِّي فِي مِصْرَ.
    I called my grandfather in Egypt.
  5. نَكْتُبُ الوَاجِبَ عَلَى الحَاسُوبِ.
    We type the homework on the computer.
  6. أَبْحَثُ عَنِ الصُّوَرِ عَلَى الإِنْتَرْنِتِ.
    I search for pictures on the internet.
  7. شَاشَةُ الحَاسُوبِ كَبِيرَةٌ.
    The computer screen is big.
  8. لَا أُعْطِي كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ لِأَحَدٍ.
    I do not give the password to anyone.
  9. طَبَعَتِ المُعَلِّمَةُ الأَوْرَاقَ بِالطَّابِعَةِ.
    The teacher printed the papers with the printer.
  10. احْفَظِ المِلَفَّ قَبْلَ أَنْ تُغْلِقَ الحَاسُوبَ.
    Save the file before you close the computer.
  11. الإِنْتَرْنِتُ بَطِيءٌ فِي بَيْتِنَا اليَوْمَ.
    The internet is slow in our house today.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

شَاشَةفَأْرَةشَاحِن
تَطْبِيقمِلَفّرِسَالَة

شَاشَة = screen · فَأْرَة = mouse · شَاحِن = charger · تَطْبِيق = app · مِلَفّ = file · رِسَالَة = message

2Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَةِ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

الشَّاحِنُ — كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ — رِسَالَةً — المِلَفَّ — الطَّابِعَةُ
  1. أَرْسَلْتُ إِلَى صَدِيقِي.
  2. لَا تُعْطِ لِأَحَدٍ.
  3. أَيْنَ ؟ البَطَّارِيَّةُ ضَعِيفَةٌ.
  4. احْفَظِ قَبْلَ أَنْ تُغْلِقَ الحَاسُوبَ.
  5. تَطْبَعُ الأَوْرَاقَ.
١) رِسَالَةً ٢) كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ ٣) الشَّاحِنُ ٤) المِلَفَّ ٥) الطَّابِعَةُ

3Choose the right form of أَرْسَلَ / يُرْسِلُ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَنَا رِسَالَةً الآنَ. ( أُرْسِلُ / أَرْسَلَ )
  2. هِيَ صُورَةً أَمْسِ. ( أَرْسَلَتْ / أَرْسَلْتُ )
  3. هُمْ الوَاجِبَ. ( يُرْسِلُونَ / يُرْسِلَانِ )
  4. أَنْتِ رَسَائِلَ كَثِيرَةً. ( تُرْسِلِينَ / تُرْسِلُ )
  5. نَحْنُ المِلَفَّ إِلَى المُعَلِّمِ. ( نُرْسِلُ / يُرْسِلُ )
١) أُرْسِلُ ٢) أَرْسَلَتْ ٣) يُرْسِلُونَ ٤) تُرْسِلِينَ ٥) نُرْسِلُ

4Choose the right verb.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ المُنَاسِب.

  1. هَاتِفِي فِي اللَّيْلِ. ( أَشْحَنُ / أَطْبَعُ )
  2. عَنْ صُوَرٍ عَلَى الإِنْتَرْنِتِ. ( أَبْحَثُ / أَشْحَنُ )
  3. بِجَدَّتِي كُلَّ أُسْبُوعٍ. ( أَتَّصِلُ / أَحْفَظُ )
  4. المِلَفَّ عَلَى الحَاسُوبِ. ( أَحْفَظُ / أَتَّصِلُ )
  5. الأَوْرَاقَ بِالطَّابِعَةِ. ( أَطْبَعُ / أَبْحَثُ )
١) أَشْحَنُ ٢) أَبْحَثُ ٣) أَتَّصِلُ ٤) أَحْفَظُ ٥) أَطْبَعُ

5Safe or not safe? Write ✓ or ✗.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: آمِنٌ أَمْ غَيْرُ آمِنٍ؟

Sentence✓ or ✗
أُعْطِي كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ لِشَخْصٍ لَا أَعْرِفُهُ.
أَسْأَلُ وَالِدَيَّ قَبْلَ تَنْزِيلِ تَطْبِيقٍ.
أَتَكَلَّمُ مَعَ الغُرَبَاءِ عَلَى الإِنْتَرْنِتِ.
أَضَعُ الهَاتِفَ جَانِبًا وَقْتَ الصَّلَاةِ.
أَحْفَظُ كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ سِرًّا.
١) ✗ ٢) ✓ ٣) ✗ ٤) ✓ ٥) ✓

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. Where is the charger?
  2. I sent a message to my friend.
  3. Save the file, please. (to a boy)
  4. I called my grandmother yesterday.
  5. What is your phone number? (to a boy)
١) أَيْنَ الشَّاحِنُ؟
٢) أَرْسَلْتُ رِسَالَةً إِلَى صَدِيقِي.
٣) احْفَظِ المِلَفَّ مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
٤) اتَّصَلْتُ بِجَدَّتِي أَمْسِ.
٥) مَا رَقْمُ هَاتِفِكَ؟
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic word with vowel marks. (5 marks)

  1. screen
  2. keyboard
  3. password
  4. email
  5. phone

Question 2 — Complete the table with أَرْسَلَ / يُرْسِلُ. (5 marks)

PronounPastPresentEnglish
أَنَاأُرْسِلُI send
هِيَأَرْسَلَتْshe sends
هُمَايُرْسِلَانِthe two of them send
نَحْنُwe send

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. يَشْحَنُ الهَاتِفَ. ( الشَّاحِنُ / الطَّابِعَةُ / الفَأْرَةُ )
  2. أَمْسِ بِخَالِي. ( أَتَّصِلُ / اتَّصَلْتُ / يَتَّصِلُ )
  3. أُرِيدُ أَنْ رِسَالَةً. ( أُرْسِلَ / أَرْسَلَ / يُرْسِلُ )
  4. لَا تُعْطِ لِأَحَدٍ. ( كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ / الشَّاشَةَ / السِّلْكَ )
  5. أَنْتُمْ عَنِ الصُّوَرِ. ( تَبْحَثُونَ / تَبْحَثَانِ / يَبْحَثُ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about how you use a phone or a computer. Use one verb in the past. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) شَاشَة ٢) لَوْحَةُ المَفَاتِيحِ ٣) كَلِمَةُ المُرُورِ ٤) البَرِيدُ الإِلِكْتُرُونِيُّ ٥) هَاتِف

Question 2

أَنَا: أَرْسَلْتُ · هِيَ: تُرْسِلُ · هُمَا: أَرْسَلَا · نَحْنُ: أَرْسَلْنَا / نُرْسِلُ

Question 3

١) الشَّاحِنُ ٢) اتَّصَلْتُ ٣) أُرْسِلَ ٤) كَلِمَةَ المُرُورِ ٥) تَبْحَثُونَ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 1 of 20

أَقْسَامُ الكَلَام

Parts of Speech

Every Arabic word is a noun, a verb or a particle. Learn the signs that tell them apart, the difference between a and the, and the sun and moon letters.

In this lesson

  • Sort any word into one of the three kinds: noun, verb or particle.
  • Use the signs of the noun and the signs of the verb to prove your answer.
  • Tell a definite word (the) from an indefinite word (a, an).
  • Read ال correctly before sun letters and moon letters.

Words to practise withSchool & ClassroomThe HomeThe Family

أ

Three kinds of words

الاسْمُ وَالفِعْلُ وَالحَرْفُ

English has many parts of speech. Arabic has only three. Adjectives, pronouns, names and many time words such as اليَوْمَ all count as nouns.

KindEnglishExamplesMeaning
اسْمnoun — a person, place, thing, name or descriptionبَيْت، أَحْمَد، كَبِير، هُوَhouse, Ahmad, big, he
فِعْلverb — an action that happens at a timeكَتَبَ، يَكْتُبُ، اُكْتُبْhe wrote, he writes, write!
حَرْفparticle — a small word that only has meaning with other wordsفِي، مِنْ، عَلَى، هَلْin, from, on, (question word)

One sentence, word by word

WordKindMeaning
ذَهَبَفِعْلhe went
أَحْمَدُاسْمAhmad
إِلَىحَرْفto
المَدْرَسَةِاسْمthe school

Why this matters

Nouns change their last vowel, verbs change for the person doing them, and particles never change. Knowing the kind of a word tells you which rules apply to it.

ذَهَبَ أَحْمَدُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
Ahmad went to school.
ب

How to spot a noun

عَلَامَاتُ الاسْمِ

A word is a noun if it can take even one of these four signs.

SignExampleMeaning
It can take الالبَيْتthe house
It can take tanweenبَيْتٌa house
It can come after a prepositionفِي البَيْتِin the house
It can be describedبَيْتٌ كَبِيرٌa big house

A quick test

Try putting ال in front. If the result makes sense, the word is a noun. A verb can never take ال or tanween.

قَلَم ← القَلَم
pen → the pen — a noun
كَتَبَ ← الكَتَبَ ✗
wrote → impossible — a verb
ج

How to spot a verb and a particle

عَلَامَاتُ الفِعْلِ وَالحَرْفِ
Sign of the verbExampleMeaning
The past can end in ـتُ or ـتْكَتَبْتُ — كَتَبَتْI wrote — she wrote
The present starts with أ، ن، ي or تأَكْتُبُ — نَكْتُبُ — يَكْتُبُ — تَكْتُبُI write — we write — he writes — you write
It can follow سَـسَأَكْتُبُI will write
It can follow لَمْلَمْ يَكْتُبْhe did not write
It can follow قَدْقَدْ كَتَبَhe has written

Common particles

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
فِيinمِنْfrom
إِلَىtoعَلَىon
وَandثُمَّthen
هَلْ(starts a yes/no question)لَاno, not
لَمْdid notأَنْto (before a verb)

Particles never change

A particle takes no ال, no tanween and no case ending. It keeps exactly the same shape in every sentence.

ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى البَيْتِ.
I went to the house.
ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.
We went to the masjid.
د

Definite and indefinite

المَعْرِفَةُ وَالنَّكِرَةُ

Arabic has no word for a or an. Tanween at the end of a noun means a; ال at the start means the. A noun never has both at once.

IndefiniteMeaningDefiniteMeaning
بَيْتٌa houseالبَيْتُthe house
سَيَّارَةٌa carالسَّيَّارَةُthe car
طَالِبٌa studentالطَّالِبُthe student
قَلَمٌa penالقَلَمُthe pen

Other definite words

Some nouns are definite without ال: names, pronouns, and a noun with a pronoun ending. A noun joined to a definite noun is definite too — see Grammar 9.

أَحْمَدُ
Ahmad — a name
هِيَ
she — a pronoun
كِتَابِي
my book — with a pronoun ending
كِتَابُ المُعَلِّمِ
the teacher's book
هـ

Sun letters and moon letters

الحُرُوفُ الشَّمْسِيَّةُ وَالقَمَرِيَّةُ

The ل of ال is always written, but it is not always said. Before a sun letter you skip the ل and double the letter, which takes a shadda. Before a moon letter you say the ل clearly.

The fourteen sun letters: the ل is silent

LetterExampleEnglish
تالتِّلْفَازthe television
ثالثَّلَّاجَةthe refrigerator
دالدَّرْسthe lesson
ذالذَّهَبthe gold
رالرَّأْسthe head
زالزَّيْتthe oil
سالسَّيَّارَةthe car
شالشَّمْسthe sun
صالصَّلَاةthe prayer
ضالضَّيْفthe guest
طالطَّالِبthe student
ظالظُّهْرnoon
لاللَّيْلthe night
نالنَّافِذَةthe window

The fourteen moon letters: the ل is pronounced

LetterExampleEnglish
أالأَبthe father
بالبَيْتthe house
جالجَدّthe grandfather
حالحَدِيقَةthe garden
خالخُبْزthe bread
عالعَيْنthe eye
غالغُرْفَةthe room
فالفَصْلthe classroom
قالقَمَرthe moon
كالكِتَابthe book
مالمَسْجِدthe masjid
هالهَاتِفthe phone
والوَلَدthe boy
ياليَدthe hand

Why sun and moon?

The two groups are named after the two words that show them best.

الشَّمْس
the sun — ل silent, ش doubled
القَمَر
the moon — ل pronounced
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. الطَّالِبُ فِي الفَصْلِ.
    The student is in the classroom.
  2. كَتَبَ أَحْمَدُ الدَّرْسَ.
    Ahmad wrote the lesson.
  3. هَلْ عِنْدَكَ قَلَمٌ؟
    Do you have a pen?
  4. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ ثُمَّ رَجَعْتُ إِلَى البَيْتِ.
    I went to the masjid, then I came back home.
  5. يَلْعَبُ الأَوْلَادُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
    The children play in the garden.
  6. هَذَا بَيْتٌ كَبِيرٌ.
    This is a big house.
  7. الشَّمْسُ حَارَّةٌ اليَوْمَ.
    The sun is hot today.
  8. القَمَرُ جَمِيلٌ فِي اللَّيْلِ.
    The moon is beautiful at night.
  9. سَأَذْهَبُ إِلَى السُّوقِ غَدًا.
    I will go to the market tomorrow.
  10. لَمْ أَفْهَمِ السُّؤَالَ.
    I did not understand the question.
  11. كِتَابِي عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.
    My book is on the desk.
  12. قَدْ وَصَلَ المُعَلِّمُ.
    The teacher has arrived.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Noun, verb or particle? Write the kind of each word.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اسْمٌ أَمْ فِعْلٌ أَمْ حَرْفٌ؟

WordKindWordKind
بَيْتيَلْعَبُ
كَتَبَهَلْ
فِيمُعَلِّم
جَمِيلعَلَى

بَيْت = noun · كَتَبَ = verb · فِي = particle · جَمِيل = noun · يَلْعَبُ = verb · هَلْ = particle · مُعَلِّم = noun · عَلَى = particle

2Which sign proves it? Give one sign for each word.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: مَا العَلَامَةُ؟

  1. الكِتَابُ is a noun because …
  2. كَتَبْتُ is a verb because …
  3. يَشْرَبُ is a verb because …
  4. بَيْتٌ is a noun because …
  5. فِي المَسْجِدِ — the word المَسْجِدِ is a noun because …

1) it has ال · 2) it ends in ـتُ · 3) it starts with يَ (a present-tense letter) · 4) it has tanween · 5) it comes after a preposition (it also has ال)

3Add ال. Then write sun or moon.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: أَدْخِلْ (ال) ثُمَّ اكْتُبْ: شَمْسِيَّةٌ أَمْ قَمَرِيَّةٌ؟

WordWith الSun or moon
قَلَم
سَيَّارَة
بَاب
طَاوِلَة
مَدْرَسَة
نَافِذَة

القَلَم — moon · السَّيَّارَة — sun · البَاب — moon · الطَّاوِلَة — sun · المَدْرَسَة — moon · النَّافِذَة — sun

4Definite or indefinite?

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: مَعْرِفَةٌ أَمْ نَكِرَةٌ؟

WordDefinite or indefiniteWordDefinite or indefinite
بَيْتٌكِتَابِي
البَيْتُقَلَمٌ
أَحْمَدُهِيَ

بَيْتٌ = indefinite · البَيْتُ = definite · أَحْمَدُ = definite (a name) · كِتَابِي = definite (pronoun ending) · قَلَمٌ = indefinite · هِيَ = definite (a pronoun)

5Write the particle you find in each sentence.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: اسْتَخْرِجِ الحَرْفَ.

  1. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.
  2. الكِتَابُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.
  3. هَلْ أَنْتَ جَائِعٌ؟
  4. أَكَلْتُ ثُمَّ نِمْتُ.
  5. لَمْ أَفْهَمِ الدَّرْسَ.
١) إِلَى ٢) عَلَى ٣) هَلْ ٤) ثُمَّ ٥) لَمْ

6Label every word of the sentence: noun, verb or particle.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: حَدِّدْ نَوْعَ كُلِّ كَلِمَةٍ.

يَذْهَبُ الطَّالِبُ مِنَ البَيْتِ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ صَبَاحًا.
WordNoun, verb or particle?
يَذْهَبُ
الطَّالِبُ
مِنَ
البَيْتِ
إِلَى
المَدْرَسَةِ
صَبَاحًا

يَذْهَبُ = verb · الطَّالِبُ = noun · مِنَ = particle · البَيْتِ = noun · إِلَى = particle · المَدْرَسَةِ = noun · صَبَاحًا = noun (a time word)

★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Noun, verb or particle? (5 marks)

WordNoun, verb or particle?
شَرِبَ
حَدِيقَة
مِنْ
تَلْعَبُ
سَعِيد

Question 2 — Add ال and write sun or moon. (5 marks)

WordWith الSun or moon
شَمْس
كِتَاب
دَرْس
غُرْفَة
رَجُل

Question 3 — Circle the word that fits. (5 marks)

  1. ذَهَبْتُ السُّوقِ. ( إِلَى / يَذْهَبُ / سُوقٌ )
  2. أَحْمَدُ الدَّرْسَ. ( كَتَبَ / فِي / كِتَابٌ )
  3. هَذَا بَيْتٌ . ( كَبِيرٌ / مِنْ / عَلَى )
  4. أَنْتِ طَالِبَةٌ؟ ( هَلْ / هِيَ / لَمْ )
  5. أَكَلْتُ شَرِبْتُ. ( ثُمَّ / فِي / مِنْ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your school. Under each word, write noun, verb or particle. (5 marks)

Question 1

شَرِبَ = verb · حَدِيقَة = noun · مِنْ = particle · تَلْعَبُ = verb · سَعِيد = noun

Question 2

الشَّمْس — sun · الكِتَاب — moon · الدَّرْس — sun · الغُرْفَة — moon · الرَّجُل — sun

Question 3

١) إِلَى ٢) كَتَبَ ٣) كَبِيرٌ ٤) هَلْ ٥) ثُمَّ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence; two marks for labelling every word correctly.

Grammar · Lesson 2 of 20

الضَّمَائِر

Pronouns

The pronouns in all their forms — separate, attached and after prepositions — plus this and that, and how the pronoun changes the verb.

In this lesson

  • Say I, you, he, she, we and they — for a man, a woman, two people or a group.
  • Build a simple sentence with no verb: أَنَا طَالِبٌ (I am a student).
  • Say my, your, his, her, our and their by adding an ending to a noun.
  • Say I have, with me and for me with pronouns after small words like عِنْدَ and مَعَ.
  • Use this and that: هَذَا، هَذِهِ، ذَلِكَ، تِلْكَ.
  • See how the pronoun changes the verb.

Words to practise withThe FamilySchool & Classroom

أ

Subject pronouns

الضَّمَائِرُ المُنْفَصِلَة

These are the stand-alone pronouns. They come at the beginning of a sentence, exactly like I, you, he in English. Arabic uses a different word for a man and a woman.

PronounEnglishExampleMeaning
One — singular
أَنَاIأَنَا طَالِبٌ.I am a student.
أَنْتَyou (to a man)أَنْتَ مُعَلِّمٌ.You are a teacher.
أَنْتِyou (to a woman)أَنْتِ مُعَلِّمَةٌ.You are a teacher.
هُوَhe / itهُوَ صَدِيقِي.He is my friend.
هِيَshe / itهِيَ أُمِّي.She is my mother.
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاyou two (dual)أَنْتُمَا طَالِبَانِ.You two are students.
هُمَاthe two of them (dual)هُمَا صَدِيقَانِ.The two of them are friends.
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُweنَحْنُ طُلَّابٌ.We are students.
أَنْتُمْyou (men / mixed group)أَنْتُمْ أَصْدِقَاءُ.You are friends.
أَنْتُنَّyou (women only)أَنْتُنَّ مُعَلِّمَاتٌ.You are teachers.
هُمْthey (men / mixed)هُمْ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.They are at school.
هُنَّthey (women only)هُنَّ فِي البَيْتِ.They are at home.

Gender — the key idea

English has one word for you. Arabic has four, so always ask yourself: am I speaking to a man, a woman, or a group?

A word describing a woman usually ends in ة:

طَالِب ← طَالِبَة
student (m.) → student (f.)
مُعَلِّم ← مُعَلِّمَة
teacher (m.) → teacher (f.)

The dual — Arabic counts to two

English has singular and plural. Arabic has three numbers: one, exactly two, and three or more. The dual is not optional — when you speak about two of anything, you must use it.

A noun becomes dual by adding ـَانِ to the end:

أَنْتُمَا
you two
هُمَا
the two of them
طَالِب ← طَالِبَانِ
student → two students
حَقِيبَة ← حَقِيبَتَانِ
bag → two bags
أَنْتُمَا مُعَلِّمَانِ.
You two are teachers.
ب

Sentences with no verb

الجُمْلَةُ الاسْمِيَّة

Arabic has no word for am, is or are in the present. You simply put two words side by side, and the meaning of to be is understood.

Arabic sentenceWord by wordReal meaning
أَنَا طَالِبٌ.I — a studentI am a student.
أَنْتِ مُعَلِّمَةٌ.you (f.) — a teacherYou are a teacher.
هُوَ سَعِيدٌ.he — happyHe is happy.
هِيَ فِي البَيْتِ.she — in the houseShe is at home.
نَحْنُ أَصْدِقَاءُ.we — friendsWe are friends.
الكِتَابُ جَدِيدٌ.the book — newThe book is new.

Saying not

To make these sentences negative, use لَيْسَ and change its ending to match the person:

أَنَا لَسْتُ طَالِبًا.
I am not a student.
هُوَ لَيْسَ سَعِيدًا.
He is not happy.
هِيَ لَيْسَتْ فِي البَيْتِ.
She is not at home.
ج

Possessive pronouns — my, your, his…

الضَّمَائِرُ المُتَّصِلَة

Arabic does not use a separate word for my or your. A short ending is attached to the end of the noun. Here they are on the word كِتَاب (book).

EndingEnglishExampleMeaning
ـِيmyكِتَابِيmy book
ـكَyour (to a man)كِتَابُكَyour book
ـكِyour (to a woman)كِتَابُكِyour book
ـهُhisكِتَابُهُhis book
ـهَاherكِتَابُهَاher book
ـكُمَاyour (you two)كِتَابُكُمَاthe book of you two
ـهُمَاtheir (the two)كِتَابُهُمَاthe book of the two of them
ـنَاourكِتَابُنَاour book
ـكُمْyour (plural)كِتَابُكُمْyour book
ـهُمْtheirكِتَابُهُمْtheir book

Watch out — words ending in ة

When a noun ends in ة, that letter changes to ت before the ending is added:

مَدْرَسَة ← مَدْرَسَتِي
school → my school
سَيَّارَة ← سَيَّارَتُهُ
car → his car

On a verb, my becomes ـنِي

The ending for me on a verb is ـنِي, not ـِي. All the others stay the same:

سَأَلَنِي
he asked me
سَأَلَكَ
he asked you
سَأَلَهَا
he asked her
د

Pronouns after prepositions

الضَّمَائِرُ مَعَ حُرُوفِ الجَرّ

The same endings attach to small words such as عِنْدَ (at / to have), مَعَ (with) and لِ (for). This is how Arabic says I have — there is no verb to have.

Pronounعِنْدَ — to haveمَعَ — withلِ — forEnglish
أَنَاعِنْدِيمَعِيلِيI have / with me / for me
أَنْتَعِنْدَكَمَعَكَلَكَyou have (m.)
أَنْتِعِنْدَكِمَعَكِلَكِyou have (f.)
هُوَعِنْدَهُمَعَهُلَهُhe has
هِيَعِنْدَهَامَعَهَالَهَاshe has
هُمَاعِنْدَهُمَامَعَهُمَالَهُمَاthe two of them have
نَحْنُعِنْدَنَامَعَنَالَنَاwe have
هُمْعِنْدَهُمْمَعَهُمْلَهُمْthey have

Use it today

عِنْدِي كِتَابٌ.
I have a book.
مَعِي قَلَمٌ.
I have a pen with me.
هَذَا لِي.
This is mine.
هـ

This and that

أَسْمَاءُ الإِشَارَة
WordEnglishExampleMeaning
هَذَاthis (masculine)هَذَا كِتَابٌ.This is a book.
هَذِهِthis (feminine)هَذِهِ حَقِيبَةٌ.This is a bag.
ذَلِكَthat (masculine)ذَلِكَ بَيْتٌ.That is a house.
تِلْكَthat (feminine)تِلْكَ مَدْرَسَةٌ.That is a school.
هَذَانِthese two (m.)هَذَانِ كِتَابَانِ.These are two books.
هَاتَانِthese two (f.)هَاتَانِ حَقِيبَتَانِ.These are two bags.
هَؤُلَاءِthese (people)هَؤُلَاءِ طُلَّابٌ.These are students.
أُولَئِكَthose (people)أُولَئِكَ مُعَلِّمُونَ.Those are teachers.

How do I know which one?

If the word ends in ة it is feminine, so use هَذِهِ or تِلْكَ. Otherwise use هَذَا or ذَلِكَ.

هَذَا قَلَمٌ.
This is a pen.
هَذِهِ سَيَّارَةٌ.
This is a car.

A small but important difference

Adding ال to the second word changes the meaning completely:

هَذَا بَيْتٌ.
This is a house.
هَذَا البَيْتُ جَمِيلٌ.
This house is beautiful.
و

Pronouns change the verb

الضَّمَائِرُ مَعَ الفِعْل

In Arabic the verb itself tells you who is doing the action, so the pronoun is often left out. Here is the present tense of دَرَسَ / يَدْرُسُ (to study).

PronounPresent verbFull sentenceMeaning
أَنَاأَدْرُسُأَنَا أَدْرُسُ.I study.
أَنْتَتَدْرُسُأَنْتَ تَدْرُسُ.You study (m.).
أَنْتِتَدْرُسِينَأَنْتِ تَدْرُسِينَ.You study (f.).
هُوَيَدْرُسُهُوَ يَدْرُسُ.He studies.
هِيَتَدْرُسُهِيَ تَدْرُسُ.She studies.
أَنْتُمَاتَدْرُسَانِأَنْتُمَا تَدْرُسَانِ.You two study.
هُمَايَدْرُسَانِهُمَا يَدْرُسَانِ.The two of them study.
نَحْنُنَدْرُسُنَحْنُ نَدْرُسُ.We study.
أَنْتُمْتَدْرُسُونَأَنْتُمْ تَدْرُسُونَ.You study (pl.).
هُمْيَدْرُسُونَهُمْ يَدْرُسُونَ.They study.

A useful shortcut

Every present-tense verb starts with one of four letters. Learn them and you can already guess who is speaking:

أَ
I
نَ
we
يَ
he / they
تَ
you / she
ز

Words used in this unit

كَلِمَاتُ الوَحْدَة
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
طَالِب / طَالِبَةstudent (m./f.)مُعَلِّم / مُعَلِّمَةteacher (m./f.)
صَدِيقfriendأُمّmother
كِتَابbookقَلَمpen
حَقِيبَةbagمَدْرَسَةschool
بَيْتhouse, homeسَيَّارَةcar
جَدِيدnewسَعِيدhappy
جَمِيلbeautifulفِيin, at
عِنْدَat (to have)مَعَwith
ح

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. أَنَا طَالِبٌ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
    I am a student at the school.
  2. أَنْتِ مُعَلِّمَةٌ جَيِّدَةٌ.
    You are a good teacher.
  3. هُوَ صَدِيقِي، وَهُوَ سَعِيدٌ.
    He is my friend, and he is happy.
  4. هِيَ أُمِّي، هِيَ فِي البَيْتِ.
    She is my mother; she is at home.
  5. نَحْنُ أَصْدِقَاءُ.
    We are friends.
  6. هُمَا أَخَوَانِ، وَهُمَا يَدْرُسَانِ مَعًا.
    The two of them are brothers, and they study together.
  7. هَذَا كِتَابِي، وَذَلِكَ كِتَابُكَ.
    This is my book, and that is your book.
  8. هَذِهِ حَقِيبَتُهَا، وَتِلْكَ سَيَّارَتُهُمْ.
    This is her bag, and that is their car.
  9. عِنْدِي قَلَمٌ جَدِيدٌ.
    I have a new pen.
  10. مَعَنَا كِتَابٌ وَاحِدٌ.
    We have one book with us.
  11. أَنَا لَسْتُ مُعَلِّمًا، أَنَا طَالِبٌ.
    I am not a teacher; I am a student.
  12. هُمْ يَدْرُسُونَ فِي مَدْرَسَتِهِمْ.
    They study at their school.
  13. أَنْتِ تَدْرُسِينَ، وَأَنَا أَدْرُسُ أَيْضًا.
    You are studying, and I am studying too.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the English meaning of each pronoun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبْ مَعْنَى كُلِّ ضَمِيرٍ بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

هِيَأَنْتَنَحْنُ
هُمْأَنَاأَنْتِ
هُمَاأَنْتُمَاأَنْتُنَّ

هِيَ = she · أَنْتَ = you (m.) · نَحْنُ = we · هُمْ = they (m.) · أَنَا = I · أَنْتِ = you (f.) · هُمَا = the two of them · أَنْتُمَا = you two · أَنْتُنَّ = you (women only)

2Choose the correct pronoun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اخْتَرِ الضَّمِيرَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. مُعَلِّمَةٌ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ. ( هُوَ / هِيَ )
  2. طَالِبٌ جَدِيدٌ. ( أَنَا / أَنْتِ )
  3. أَصْدِقَاءُ. ( نَحْنُ / هُوَ )
  4. يَا فَاطِمَةُ، مُعَلِّمَةٌ. ( أَنْتَ / أَنْتِ )
  5. فِي البَيْتِ الآنَ. ( هُمْ / أَنَا )
١) هِيَ ٢) أَنَا ٣) نَحْنُ ٤) أَنْتِ ٥) هُمْ

3Add the right ending to the noun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: أَضِفِ الضَّمِيرَ المُنَاسِبَ إِلَى الاسْم.

  1. كِتَاب + أَنَا → (my book)
  2. قَلَم + هُوَ → (his pen)
  3. حَقِيبَة + هِيَ → (her bag)
  4. بَيْت + نَحْنُ → (our house)
  5. مَدْرَسَة + هُمَا → (their school)
١) كِتَابِي ٢) قَلَمُهُ ٣) حَقِيبَتُهَا ٤) بَيْتُنَا ٥) مَدْرَسَتُهُمْ

4Write هَذَا or هَذِهِ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اكْتُبْ (هَذَا) أَوْ (هَذِهِ).

  1. كِتَابٌ.
  2. سَيَّارَةٌ.
  3. قَلَمٌ.
  4. مَدْرَسَةٌ.
  5. بَيْتٌ.
١) هَذَا ٢) هَذِهِ ٣) هَذَا ٤) هَذِهِ ٥) هَذَا

5Complete with عِنْدِي, مَعَهُ, لَهَا, عِنْدَنَا or مَعَكِ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: أَكْمِلْ بِالكَلِمَةِ المُنَاسِبَة.

  1. أَنَا كِتَابٌ جَدِيدٌ. (I have)
  2. هُوَ ذَهَبَ وَ حَقِيبَتُهُ. (with him)
  3. هَذِهِ السَّيَّارَةُ . (hers)
  4. نَحْنُ مُعَلِّمٌ جَيِّدٌ. (we have)
  5. يَا سَارَةُ، هَلِ القَلَمُ ؟ (with you, f.)
١) عِنْدِي ٢) مَعَهُ ٣) لَهَا ٤) عِنْدَنَا ٥) مَعَكِ

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. She is my mother.
  2. This is your book (to a man).
  3. We are students.
  4. I have a pen.
  5. That is their school.
١) هِيَ أُمِّي.
٢) هَذَا كِتَابُكَ.
٣) نَحْنُ طُلَّابٌ.
٤) عِنْدِي قَلَمٌ.
٥) تِلْكَ مَدْرَسَتُهُمْ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic pronoun. (5 marks)

  1. she
  2. we
  3. you (to a woman)
  4. they (men)
  5. I

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. حَقِيبَةٌ. ( هَذَا / هَذِهِ / هُمْ )
  2. يَا أَحْمَدُ، أَيْنَ كِتَابُ ؟ ( ـكَ / ـكِ / ـهَا )
  3. هِيَ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ. ( يَدْرُسُ / تَدْرُسُ / أَدْرُسُ )
  4. نَحْنُ كِتَابٌ وَاحِدٌ. ( عِنْدِي / عِنْدَنَا / عِنْدَهُ )
  5. أَنَا مُعَلِّمًا. ( لَيْسَ / لَيْسَتْ / لَسْتُ )

Question 3 — Add the possessive ending. (5 marks)

  1. بَيْت + أَنَا →
  2. قَلَم + أَنْتِ →
  3. صَدِيق + هُوَ →
  4. سَيَّارَة + نَحْنُ →
  5. مَدْرَسَة + هُمْ →

Question 4 — Write three sentences about yourself using أَنَا, عِنْدِي and هَذَا. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) هِيَ ٢) نَحْنُ ٣) أَنْتِ ٤) هُمْ ٥) أَنَا

Question 2

١) هَذِهِ ٢) ـكَ (كِتَابُكَ) ٣) تَدْرُسُ ٤) عِنْدَنَا ٥) لَسْتُ

Question 3

١) بَيْتِي ٢) قَلَمُكِ ٣) صَدِيقُهُ ٤) سَيَّارَتُنَا ٥) مَدْرَسَتُهُمَا

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate writing with vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 3 of 20

الجُمْلَةُ الاسْمِيَّة

The Nominal Sentence

The sentence that starts with a noun: what its two parts are called, how they agree, the three kinds of khabar, and how to say there is.

In this lesson

  • Find the two parts of a nominal sentence: the mubtada and the khabar.
  • Make the khabar agree with the mubtada in gender and number.
  • Use the three kinds of khabar: a word, a phrase and a sentence.
  • Tell a description from a sentence, and say there is and I have.

Words to practise withThe HomeWeather & SeasonsThe FamilyThe Body & Health

أ

Two parts: the mubtada and the khabar

المُبْتَدَأُ وَالخَبَرُ

A nominal sentence starts with a noun. The first part, المُبْتَدَأ, is what we talk about. The second part, الخَبَر, is what we say about it. As you saw in Grammar 2, there is no word for is or are.

SentenceMubtada (subject)Khabar (predicate)English
البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.البَيْتُكَبِيرٌThe house is big.
أَنَا طَالِبٌ.أَنَاطَالِبٌI am a student.
الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ.الجَوُّبَارِدٌThe weather is cold.
أَحْمَدُ مَرِيضٌ.أَحْمَدُمَرِيضٌAhmad is ill.
المُعَلِّمُ فِي الفَصْلِ.المُعَلِّمُفِي الفَصْلِThe teacher is in the classroom.

Three things to remember

1. The mubtada is usually definite: it has ال, or it is a name or a pronoun.

2. The khabar is usually indefinite: it has tanween.

3. Both are nominative — usually they end in ـُ or ـٌ. (Duals, plurals and pronouns show it in their own way: see Grammar 5.)

الدَّرْسُ سَهْلٌ.
The lesson is easy.
هِيَ طَبِيبَةٌ.
She is a doctor.
ب

The khabar agrees

مُطَابَقَةُ الخَبَرِ لِلْمُبْتَدَإِ

When the khabar is a describing word, it matches the mubtada in gender and in number: one, two, or three and more.

SentenceEnglish
One — singular
الوَلَدُ طَوِيلٌ.The boy is tall.
البِنْتُ طَوِيلَةٌ.The girl is tall.
Two — dual
الوَلَدَانِ طَوِيلَانِ.The two boys are tall.
البِنْتَانِ طَوِيلَتَانِ.The two girls are tall.
Three or more — plural
الطُّلَّابُ مُجْتَهِدُونَ.The students are hard-working.
الطَّالِبَاتُ مُجْتَهِدَاتٌ.The female students are hard-working.

Things in the plural

When the mubtada is a plural of things, not people, the khabar is feminine singular. You will learn this rule fully in Grammar 7.

الكُتُبُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
The books are new.
السَّيَّارَاتُ سَرِيعَةٌ.
The cars are fast.
ج

Three kinds of khabar

أَنْوَاعُ الخَبَرِ

The khabar can be one word, a short phrase, or a whole sentence of its own.

1. A single word

SentenceEnglish
الجَوُّ جَمِيلٌ.The weather is beautiful.
أُمِّي مُعَلِّمَةٌ.My mother is a teacher.

2. A phrase: a preposition or a place word with its noun

SentenceEnglish
الكِتَابُ عَلَى الطَّاوِلَةِ.The book is on the table.
أَبِي فِي العَمَلِ.My father is at work.
المَسْجِدُ أَمَامَ المَدْرَسَةِ.The masjid is in front of the school.

3. A whole sentence

SentenceEnglish
أَبِي يَعْمَلُ فِي المُسْتَشْفَى.My father works at the hospital.
المُعَلِّمُ صَوْتُهُ جَمِيلٌ.The teacher has a beautiful voice.

The pronoun that points back

A sentence khabar always holds a pronoun that points back to the mubtada. In صَوْتُهُ it is the ending ـهُ (his). In يَعْمَلُ it is the hidden he inside the verb.

الإِمَامُ صَوْتُهُ جَمِيلٌ.
The imam's voice is beautiful — literally: the imam, his voice is beautiful.
أُخْتِي تَدْرُسُ الطِّبَّ.
My sister studies medicine.
د

A description or a sentence?

الصِّفَةُ أَمِ الخَبَرُ؟

This is the most common trap. If the second word also has ال, it only describes the first word — you have a phrase, not a sentence. Grammar 7 explains descriptions in detail.

ArabicPhrase or sentenceEnglish
البَيْتُ الكَبِيرُphrasethe big house
البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.sentenceThe house is big.
الطَّالِبُ الجَدِيدُphrasethe new student
الطَّالِبُ جَدِيدٌ.sentenceThe student is new.

A phrase still needs a khabar

You can use a whole phrase as the mubtada. Then add a khabar to finish the sentence.

البَيْتُ الكَبِيرُ جَمِيلٌ.
The big house is beautiful.
الطَّالِبُ الجَدِيدُ فِي الفَصْلِ.
The new student is in the classroom.
هـ

There is and I have

تَقْدِيمُ الخَبَرِ

When the mubtada is indefinite, Arabic puts the phrase khabar first. This is how you say there is and I have. The mubtada keeps its nominative ending even though it comes second.

SentenceEnglish
فِي الفَصْلِ طَالِبٌ جَدِيدٌ.There is a new student in the classroom.
فِي الثَّلَّاجَةِ حَلِيبٌ.There is milk in the refrigerator.
أَمَامَ البَيْتِ سَيَّارَةٌ.There is a car in front of the house.
عِنْدِي سُؤَالٌ.I have a question.
لِي أَخَوَانِ.I have two brothers.

Two words that change the khabar

لَيْسَ (not) and كَانَ (was) both turn the khabar accusative. You will meet them in Grammar 14 and Grammar 18.

لَيْسَ الجَوُّ بَارِدًا.
The weather is not cold.
كَانَ الجَوُّ بَارِدًا.
The weather was cold.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. بَيْتُنَا قَرِيبٌ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
    Our house is near the school.
  2. الطَّقْسُ حَارٌّ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
    The weather is hot in summer.
  3. أَخِي طَالِبٌ فِي الجَامِعَةِ.
    My brother is a student at university.
  4. الطُّلَّابُ فِي المَلْعَبِ.
    The students are in the playground.
  5. المِفْتَاحُ تَحْتَ الكِتَابِ.
    The key is under the book.
  6. جَدِّي يَقْرَأُ القُرْآنَ كُلَّ صَبَاحٍ.
    My grandfather reads the Quran every morning.
  7. الحَدِيقَةُ أَشْجَارُهَا خَضْرَاءُ.
    The garden's trees are green.
  8. الكُتُبُ عَلَى الرَّفِّ.
    The books are on the shelf.
  9. البِنْتَانِ سَعِيدَتَانِ.
    The two girls are happy.
  10. فِي المَدِينَةِ مَسْجِدٌ كَبِيرٌ.
    There is a big masjid in the city.
  11. عِنْدَنَا ضَيْفٌ اليَوْمَ.
    We have a guest today.
  12. السَّيَّارَةُ الجَدِيدَةُ غَالِيَةٌ.
    The new car is expensive.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Find the mubtada and the khabar.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: حَدِّدِ المُبْتَدَأَ وَالخَبَرَ.

SentenceMubtada (subject)Khabar (predicate)
الطَّقْسُ حَارٌّ.
أُخْتِي طَبِيبَةٌ.
القَلَمُ فِي الحَقِيبَةِ.
نَحْنُ جَائِعُونَ.
الحَدِيقَةُ خَلْفَ البَيْتِ.
١) الطَّقْسُ — حَارٌّ
٢) أُخْتِي — طَبِيبَةٌ
٣) القَلَمُ — فِي الحَقِيبَةِ
٤) نَحْنُ — جَائِعُونَ
٥) الحَدِيقَةُ — خَلْفَ البَيْتِ

2What kind of khabar is it? Write word, phrase or sentence.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: مَا نَوْعُ الخَبَرِ؟

SentenceKind of khabar
السَّمَاءُ صَافِيَةٌ.
المِفْتَاحُ تَحْتَ الكِتَابِ.
جَدِّي يَقْرَأُ الجَرِيدَةَ.
الإِمَامُ صَوْتُهُ جَمِيلٌ.
الطُّلَّابُ فِي المَلْعَبِ.

1) word · 2) phrase · 3) sentence · 4) sentence · 5) phrase

3Choose the khabar that agrees.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الخَبَرَ المُنَاسِبَ.

  1. البِنْتُ . ( سَعِيدٌ / سَعِيدَةٌ )
  2. الطُّلَّابُ . ( مُجْتَهِدٌ / مُجْتَهِدُونَ )
  3. الكُتُبُ . ( جَدِيدُونَ / جَدِيدَةٌ )
  4. الوَلَدَانِ . ( طَوِيلَانِ / طَوِيلٌ )
  5. السَّيَّارَةُ . ( غَالِيَةٌ / غَالٍ )
١) سَعِيدَةٌ ٢) مُجْتَهِدُونَ ٣) جَدِيدَةٌ ٤) طَوِيلَانِ ٥) غَالِيَةٌ

4Turn the phrase into a sentence.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: حَوِّلِ العِبَارَةَ إِلَى جُمْلَةٍ.

  1. البَيْتُ الكَبِيرُ ←
  2. الطَّعَامُ اللَّذِيذُ ←
  3. الغُرْفَةُ النَّظِيفَةُ ←
  4. المُعَلِّمَةُ الجَدِيدَةُ ←
  5. الشَّارِعُ الطَّوِيلُ ←
١) البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.
٢) الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ.
٣) الغُرْفَةُ نَظِيفَةٌ.
٤) المُعَلِّمَةُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
٥) الشَّارِعُ طَوِيلٌ.

5Put the khabar first to say there is or I have.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: قَدِّمِ الخَبَرَ.

  1. طَالِبٌ جَدِيدٌ / فِي الفَصْلِ ←
  2. سُؤَالٌ / عِنْدِي ←
  3. حَلِيبٌ / فِي الثَّلَّاجَةِ ←
  4. شَجَرَةٌ / أَمَامَ البَيْتِ ←
  5. مَسْجِدٌ / فِي المَدِينَةِ ←
١) فِي الفَصْلِ طَالِبٌ جَدِيدٌ.
٢) عِنْدِي سُؤَالٌ.
٣) فِي الثَّلَّاجَةِ حَلِيبٌ.
٤) أَمَامَ البَيْتِ شَجَرَةٌ.
٥) فِي المَدِينَةِ مَسْجِدٌ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. The weather is cold.
  2. My mother is a teacher.
  3. The key is on the table.
  4. There is a new student in the classroom.
  5. The big house is beautiful.
١) الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ.
٢) أُمِّي مُعَلِّمَةٌ.
٣) المِفْتَاحُ عَلَى الطَّاوِلَةِ.
٤) فِي الفَصْلِ طَالِبٌ جَدِيدٌ.
٥) البَيْتُ الكَبِيرُ جَمِيلٌ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the mubtada and the khabar. (5 marks)

SentenceMubtada (subject)Khabar (predicate)
الشَّمْسُ حَارَّةٌ.
أَبِي مُهَنْدِسٌ.
الهَاتِفُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.
هُمْ مَشْغُولُونَ.
المَطْبَخُ بِجَانِبِ الحَمَّامِ.

Question 2 — Circle the khabar that agrees. (5 marks)

  1. الأُمُّ . ( مَشْغُولٌ / مَشْغُولَةٌ / مَشْغُولُونَ )
  2. المُعَلِّمُونَ . ( سَعِيدٌ / سَعِيدَتَانِ / سَعِيدُونَ )
  3. البِنْتَانِ . ( صَغِيرَتَانِ / صَغِيرَانِ / صَغِيرَةٌ )
  4. الغُرَفُ . ( نَظِيفُونَ / نَظِيفَةٌ / نَظِيفٌ )
  5. أَنَا . ( جَائِعَانِ / جَائِعُونَ / جَائِعٌ )

Question 3 — Phrase or sentence? (5 marks)

ArabicPhrase or sentence
السَّيَّارَةُ الحَمْرَاءُ
السَّيَّارَةُ حَمْرَاءُ.
الدَّرْسُ سَهْلٌ.
الدَّرْسُ السَّهْلُ
فِي البَيْتِ ضَيْفٌ.

Question 4 — Write three nominal sentences about your home: one with a word khabar, one with a phrase khabar and one with a sentence khabar. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) الشَّمْسُ — حَارَّةٌ
٢) أَبِي — مُهَنْدِسٌ
٣) الهَاتِفُ — عَلَى المَكْتَبِ
٤) هُمْ — مَشْغُولُونَ
٥) المَطْبَخُ — بِجَانِبِ الحَمَّامِ

Question 2

١) مَشْغُولَةٌ ٢) سَعِيدُونَ ٣) صَغِيرَتَانِ ٤) نَظِيفَةٌ ٥) جَائِعٌ

Question 3

1) phrase · 2) sentence · 3) sentence · 4) phrase · 5) sentence

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence; two marks for correct agreement and vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 4 of 20

الجُمْلَةُ الفِعْلِيَّة

The Verbal Sentence

A sentence that starts with a verb: the action, the one who does it and the one it is done to — and how the verb agrees with its doer.

In this lesson

  • Find the verb, the doer and the object in a sentence.
  • Put the doer in the nominative and the object in the accusative.
  • Recognise a doer hidden inside the verb, and attach object pronouns to a verb.
  • Keep a verb singular when it comes before its doer.

Words to practise withThe FamilyThe HomeFood & DrinkMy Day

أ

What is a verbal sentence?

مَا الجُمْلَةُ الفِعْلِيَّةُ؟

A verbal sentence starts with a verb. It has up to three main parts, and each part answers its own question.

PartEnglishAskCase
الفِعْلthe verb — the actionWhat happened?—
الفَاعِلthe doerWho did it?nominative ـُ
المَفْعُولُ بِهِthe objectWhom? What?accusative ـَ
SentenceVerbDoerObjectEnglish
كَتَبَ الطَّالِبُ الدَّرْسَ.كَتَبَالطَّالِبُالدَّرْسَThe student wrote the lesson.
شَرِبَ الطِّفْلُ الحَلِيبَ.شَرِبَالطِّفْلُالحَلِيبَThe child drank the milk.
فَتَحَتِ المُعَلِّمَةُ البَابَ.فَتَحَتْالمُعَلِّمَةُالبَابَThe teacher opened the door.
رَكِبَ الأَوْلَادُ الحَافِلَةَ.رَكِبَالأَوْلَادُالحَافِلَةَThe children got on the bus.
يَقْرَأُ أَبِي الجَرِيدَةَ.يَقْرَأُأَبِيالجَرِيدَةَMy father reads the newspaper.

Ask two questions

The usual order is verb, then doer, then object. To find the parts, ask who? and what?

مَنْ كَتَبَ؟ — الطَّالِبُ.
Who wrote? — the student: the doer
مَاذَا كَتَبَ؟ — الدَّرْسَ.
What did he write? — the lesson: the object
ب

With an object and without one

فِعْلٌ لَهُ مَفْعُولٌ وَفِعْلٌ بِلَا مَفْعُولٍ

Some verbs are complete with just a doer. Others need an object to finish the meaning.

No objectEnglishWith an objectEnglish
نَامَ الطِّفْلُ.The child slept.أَكَلَ الوَلَدُ التُّفَّاحَةَ.The boy ate the apple.
وَصَلَ القِطَارُ.The train arrived.غَسَلَتْ أُمِّي الصُّحُونَ.My mother washed the dishes.
جَلَسَ الضَّيْفُ.The guest sat down.اشْتَرَى أَبِي سَيَّارَةً.My father bought a car.
نَزَلَ المَطَرُ.The rain fell.لَبِسَ أَخِي المِعْطَفَ.My brother put on the coat.
ضَحِكَتِ البِنْتُ.The girl laughed.رَسَمَتْ أُخْتِي صُورَةً.My sister drew a picture.

Extras: when and where

A verbal sentence can also say when and where. These extras usually come after the object. They are neither the doer nor the object.

صَلَّيْنَا الظُّهْرَ فِي المَسْجِدِ أَمْسِ.
We prayed the noon prayer in the masjid yesterday.
لَعِبَ الأَوْلَادُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
The boys played football in the park.
يَشْرَبُ جَدِّي الشَّايَ صَبَاحًا.
My grandfather drinks tea in the morning.
ج

The hidden doer and object pronouns

الفَاعِلُ الضَّمِيرُ وَالمَفْعُولُ الضَّمِيرُ

When the doer is a pronoun, Arabic does not write it as a separate word. It is inside the verb — the ending or the first letter tells you who it is (Grammar 10 and Grammar 11).

VerbThe doerEnglish
ذَهَبْتُـتُ = II went
ذَهَبْنَاـنَا = wewe went
ذَهَبُواـُوا = theythey went
يَكْتُبُhidden هُوَhe writes
تَكْتُبِينَـِينَ = you (f.)you (f.) write
نَكْتُبُhidden نَحْنُwe write

Object pronouns attach to the end of the verb

ArabicObjectEnglish
رَأَيْتُهُ.ـهُ = himI saw him.
سَاعَدَتْنِي أُمِّي.ـنِي = meMy mother helped me.
أُحِبُّكَ.ـكَ = you (m.)I love you.
زُرْنَاهَا.ـهَا = herWe visited her.
سَأَلَنَا المُعَلِّمُ.ـنَا = usThe teacher asked us.
أَكَلُوهُ.ـهُ = itThey ate it.

Two small changes

On a verb, me is ـنِي — on a noun, my is ـِي (Grammar 2). And the written alif of ـُوا drops when an object pronoun is added.

سَاعَدَنِي
he helped me
كِتَابِي
my book
أَكَلُوا + هُ ← أَكَلُوهُ
they ate + it → they ate it
د

Does the verb agree with its doer?

مُطَابَقَةُ الفِعْلِ لِلْفَاعِلِ

When the verb comes first, it stays singular even if the doer is two people or many. It only matches the doer's gender.

DoerArabicEnglish
one manذَهَبَ الطَّالِبُ.The student went.
two menذَهَبَ الطَّالِبَانِ.The two students went.
many menذَهَبَ الطُّلَّابُ.The students went.
one womanذَهَبَتِ الطَّالِبَةُ.The student (f.) went.
two womenذَهَبَتِ الطَّالِبَتَانِ.The two students (f.) went.
many womenذَهَبَتِ الطَّالِبَاتُ.The students (f.) went.

Noun first? Then the verb agrees fully

If you start with the noun, the sentence becomes a nominal sentence (Grammar 3). Now the verb comes after its subject and must agree in number as well as gender.

ذَهَبَ الطُّلَّابُ.
verb first — singular verb
الطُّلَّابُ ذَهَبُوا.
noun first — plural verb
تَلْعَبُ البَنَاتُ.
verb first — the girls play
البَنَاتُ يَلْعَبْنَ.
noun first — the girls play
هـ

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. دَرَسَ الطُّلَّابُ الدَّرْسَ الجَدِيدَ.
    The students studied the new lesson.
  2. طَبَخَتْ أُمِّي الأَرُزَّ.
    My mother cooked the rice.
  3. يُصْلِحُ أَبِي السَّيَّارَةَ.
    My father is fixing the car.
  4. قَرَأَ الإِمَامُ القُرْآنَ فِي الصَّلَاةِ.
    The imam read the Quran in the prayer.
  5. لَبِسَتِ البِنْتُ فُسْتَانًا أَزْرَقَ.
    The girl wore a blue dress.
  6. أَرْسَلَ أَخِي رِسَالَةً إِلَى صَدِيقِهِ.
    My brother sent a message to his friend.
  7. وَصَلَتِ الحَافِلَةُ فِي السَّاعَةِ الثَّامِنَةِ.
    The bus arrived at eight o'clock.
  8. فَتَحَ المُعَلِّمُ الشُّبَّاكَ.
    The teacher opened the window.
  9. شَاهَدْنَا المُبَارَاةَ أَمْسِ.
    We watched the match yesterday.
  10. سَاعَدَتْنِي أُخْتِي فِي الوَاجِبِ.
    My sister helped me with the homework.
  11. يَلْعَبُ الأَوْلَادُ كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ.
    The boys play basketball.
  12. نَزَلَ الثَّلْجُ فِي الشِّتَاءِ.
    Snow fell in the winter.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the verb, the doer and the object.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ الفِعْلَ وَالفَاعِلَ وَالمَفْعُولَ بِهِ.

SentenceVerbDoerObject
أَكَلَ الوَلَدُ الخُبْزَ.
فَتَحَتْ سَارَةُ البَابَ.
رَكِبَ أَبِي القِطَارَ.
تَشْرَبُ الطِّفْلَةُ الحَلِيبَ.
١) أَكَلَ — الوَلَدُ — الخُبْزَ
٢) فَتَحَتْ — سَارَةُ — البَابَ
٣) رَكِبَ — أَبِي — القِطَارَ
٤) تَشْرَبُ — الطِّفْلَةُ — الحَلِيبَ

2Choose the right verb. Remember: a verb before its doer stays singular.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. المُعَلِّمُ إِلَى الفَصْلِ. ( دَخَلَ / دَخَلَتْ )
  2. البِنْتُ الرِّسَالَةَ. ( كَتَبَ / كَتَبَتْ )
  3. الأَوْلَادُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ( لَعِبَ / لَعِبُوا )
  4. الطَّالِبَاتُ الدَّرْسَ. ( فَهِمَتِ / فَهِمْنَ )
  5. الطِّفْلَانِ. ( نَامَ / نَامَا )
١) دَخَلَ ٢) كَتَبَتْ ٣) لَعِبَ ٤) فَهِمَتِ ٥) نَامَ

3Choose the doer or the object with the right ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الحَرَكَةَ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. أَكَلَ التُّفَّاحَةَ. ( الوَلَدُ / الوَلَدَ )
  2. قَرَأَتْ فَاطِمَةُ . ( القِصَّةُ / القِصَّةَ )
  3. غَسَلَ يَدَيْهِ. ( الطِّفْلَ / الطِّفْلُ )
  4. رَأَيْتُ فِي المَسْجِدِ. ( الإِمَامُ / الإِمَامَ )
  5. يُحِبُّ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ. ( الطُّلَّابُ / الطُّلَّابَ )
١) الوَلَدُ ٢) القِصَّةَ ٣) الطِّفْلُ ٤) الإِمَامَ ٥) الطُّلَّابُ

4Rewrite each sentence so that it starts with the verb.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: ابْدَأِ الجُمْلَةَ بِالفِعْلِ.

  1. الطَّالِبُ كَتَبَ الدَّرْسَ. ←
  2. البِنْتُ رَسَمَتْ صُورَةً. ←
  3. الأَوْلَادُ شَرِبُوا العَصِيرَ. ←
  4. البَنَاتُ قَرَأْنَ الكِتَابَ. ←
١) كَتَبَ الطَّالِبُ الدَّرْسَ.
٢) رَسَمَتِ البِنْتُ صُورَةً.
٣) شَرِبَ الأَوْلَادُ العَصِيرَ.
٤) قَرَأَتِ البَنَاتُ الكِتَابَ.

5Replace the object with a pronoun ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: ضَعْ ضَمِيرًا مَكَانَ المَفْعُولِ بِهِ.

  1. أَكَلْتُ التُّفَّاحَةَ. ←
  2. شَرِبْتُ الحَلِيبَ. ←
  3. سَاعَدْنَا المُعَلِّمَةَ. ←
  4. زُرْنَا جَدَّنَا. ←
  5. فَتَحْتُ الشُّبَّاكَ. ←
١) أَكَلْتُهَا. ٢) شَرِبْتُهُ. ٣) سَاعَدْنَاهَا. ٤) زُرْنَاهُ. ٥) فَتَحْتُهُ.

6Translate into Arabic. Start each sentence with the verb.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّة.

  1. The teacher opened the door.
  2. The children drank the juice.
  3. My mother helped me.
  4. The girls went to the masjid.
  5. We watched the match yesterday.
١) فَتَحَ المُعَلِّمُ البَابَ.
٢) شَرِبَ الأَوْلَادُ العَصِيرَ.
٣) سَاعَدَتْنِي أُمِّي.
٤) ذَهَبَتِ البَنَاتُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.
٥) شَاهَدْنَا المُبَارَاةَ أَمْسِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Is the sentence verbal or nominal? (5 marks)

SentenceVerbal or nominal?
ذَهَبَ أَخِي إِلَى السُّوقِ.
البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.
يَلْعَبُ الأَطْفَالُ.
المُعَلِّمُ فِي الفَصْلِ.
كَتَبْتُ رِسَالَةً.

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. الطَّالِبَاتُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ. ( ذَهَبَ / ذَهَبَتِ / ذَهَبْنَ )
  2. شَرِبَ الطِّفْلُ . ( الحَلِيبُ / الحَلِيبَ / الحَلِيبِ )
  3. قَرَأَ القِصَّةَ. ( الوَلَدُ / الوَلَدَ / الوَلَدِ )
  4. الطُّلَّابُ الدَّرْسَ. ( فَهِمَ / فَهِمُوا / فَهِمَتْ )
  5. الأَوْلَادُ الحَافِلَةَ. ( رَكِبَ / رَكِبُوا / رَكِبَا )

Question 3 — Write the object of each sentence. (5 marks)

SentenceObject
غَسَلَتْ مَرْيَمُ الصُّحُونَ.
أَرْسَلَ المُدِيرُ رِسَالَةً.
رَأَيْتُ الإِمَامَ فِي المَسْجِدِ.
لَبِسَ أَخِي المِعْطَفَ.
يَشْرَبُ جَدِّي الشَّايَ.

Question 4 — Write three verbal sentences about your family. Each one needs a verb, a doer and an object. (5 marks)

Question 1

1 verbal · 2 nominal · 3 verbal · 4 nominal · 5 verbal

Question 2

١) ذَهَبَتِ ٢) الحَلِيبَ ٣) الوَلَدُ ٤) فَهِمُوا ٥) رَكِبَ

Question 3

١) الصُّحُونَ ٢) رِسَالَةً ٣) الإِمَامَ ٤) المِعْطَفَ ٥) الشَّايَ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for the right endings on the doer and the object.

Grammar · Lesson 5 of 20

عَلَامَاتُ الإِعْرَاب

Case Endings

Why the last vowel of an Arabic noun changes: the three cases, their signs, which job takes which case, and the words that show case in their own way.

In this lesson

  • Name the three cases and write their signs, with and without ال.
  • Know which jobs take the nominative, the accusative and the genitive.
  • Explain every ending in a short sentence, word by word.
  • Recognise the words that show case differently.

Words to practise withThe HomeSchool & ClassroomFood & DrinkThe City & Directions

أ

Why does the last vowel change?

لِمَاذَا تَتَغَيَّرُ الحَرَكَةُ الأَخِيرَةُ؟

Look at the word الطَّالِب in these three sentences. The word is the same, but its last vowel changes with its job in the sentence.

SentenceThe wordIts jobEnglish
جَاءَ الطَّالِبُ.الطَّالِبُthe doerThe student came.
رَأَيْتُ الطَّالِبَ.الطَّالِبَthe objectI saw the student.
سَلَّمْتُ عَلَى الطَّالِبِ.الطَّالِبِafter a prepositionI greeted the student.

This is called الإِعْرَاب

English shows the job of a word by its place in the sentence. Arabic shows it with the last vowel, called the case ending. That is why the vowels on the last letter matter so much in this book.

ب

The three cases and their signs

الرَّفْعُ وَالنَّصْبُ وَالجَرُّ

Every noun is in one of three cases. With ال the sign is a single vowel; without ال it is doubled — this is called tanween.

CaseEnglishWith الWithout ال
الرَّفْعnominative — sign ـُالبَيْتُبَيْتٌ
النَّصْبaccusative — sign ـَالبَيْتَبَيْتًا
الجَرّgenitive — sign ـِالبَيْتِبَيْتٍ

The accusative tanween needs an alif

Without ال, the accusative ending ـً is written with an extra alif. There is no extra alif after ة, or after a hamza that comes after an alif.

كِتَابٌ ← كِتَابًا
a book: nominative → accusative
سَيَّارَةٌ ← سَيَّارَةً
a car — no alif after ة
مَاءٌ ← مَاءً
water — no alif after ـاء
ج

Which job takes which case?

مَتَى نَرْفَعُ وَمَتَى نَنْصِبُ وَمَتَى نَجُرُّ؟

You only need a handful of jobs to read and write simple sentences. Here are the ones you know or will meet soon.

CaseJobExampleEnglish
Nominative — ـُ
الرَّفْعthe subject of a nominal sentence (Grammar 3)البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.The house is big.
الرَّفْعthe predicate (Grammar 3)الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ.The weather is cold.
الرَّفْعthe doer (Grammar 4)نَامَ الطِّفْلُ.The child slept.
Accusative — ـَ
النَّصْبthe object (Grammar 4)شَرِبْتُ المَاءَ.I drank the water.
النَّصْبthe predicate after كَانَ (Grammar 18)كَانَ الجَوُّ بَارِدًا.The weather was cold.
النَّصْبthe predicate after لَيْسَ (Grammar 14)لَسْتُ جَائِعًا.I am not hungry.
النَّصْبtime wordsنَذْهَبُ صَبَاحًا.We go in the morning.
Genitive — ـِ
الجَرّafter a preposition (Grammar 16)ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.I went to the masjid.
الجَرّthe second word of an idafa (Grammar 9)بَابُ البَيْتِthe door of the house
د

Two sentences, word by word

إِعْرَابُ جُمْلَتَيْنِ

Read each sentence slowly and explain the ending of every word. Verbs in the past and small words like إِلَى never change.

ذَهَبَ الطَّالِبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ صَبَاحًا. — The student went to school in the morning.

WordJobCaseSign
ذَهَبَthe verb, in the past—does not change
الطَّالِبُthe doernominativeـُ
إِلَىa preposition—never changes
المَدْرَسَةِafter a prepositiongenitiveـِ
صَبَاحًاa time wordaccusativeـً

قَرَأَ أَخِي كِتَابَ المُعَلِّمِ. — My brother read the teacher's book.

WordJobCaseSign
قَرَأَthe verb, in the past—does not change
أَخِيthe doernominativecannot be seen before ـِي
كِتَابَthe object, and the first word of an idafaaccusativeـَ — no ال, no tanween
المُعَلِّمِthe second word of an idafagenitiveـِ

Stopping at the end

In speech you stop on the last word of a sentence with a sukun, so its case ending is usually not heard. This is called الوَقْف. In this book every ending is still written, so that you can learn it.

هـ

Words that show case in their own way

كَلِمَاتٌ لَهَا عَلَامَاتٌ أُخْرَى

A few kinds of word use different signs. Each has its own lesson — this is only a first look.

Kind of wordNominativeAccusativeGenitiveLesson
dualطَالِبَانِطَالِبَيْنِطَالِبَيْنِGrammar 8
sound masculine pluralمُعَلِّمُونَمُعَلِّمِينَمُعَلِّمِينَGrammar 8
sound feminine pluralمُعَلِّمَاتٌمُعَلِّمَاتٍمُعَلِّمَاتٍGrammar 8
many names — no tanweenفَاطِمَةُفَاطِمَةَفَاطِمَةَGrammar 9
colours — no tanweenأَحْمَرُأَحْمَرَأَحْمَرَGrammar 7

Two endings that surprise beginners

The feminine plural in ـَات never takes a fatha: its accusative has a kasra. And names like فَاطِمَة take a fatha in the genitive.

رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّمَاتِ.
I saw the teachers (f.) — accusative with a kasra
ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى بَيْتِ فَاطِمَةَ.
I went to Fatima's house — genitive with a fatha

Verbs have endings too

The present tense normally ends in ـُ. After أَنْ and لَنْ it takes ـَ (Grammar 20 and Grammar 14), and after لَمْ it takes a sukun (Grammar 14). Past verbs and commands do not change.

يَذْهَبُ
he goes
أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ.
I want to go.
لَمْ أَذْهَبْ.
I did not go.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. الشَّمْسُ حَارَّةٌ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
    The sun is hot in summer.
  2. أَكَلَ الأَوْلَادُ الفَطُورَ فِي المَطْبَخِ.
    The children ate breakfast in the kitchen.
  3. اشْتَرَتْ أُمِّي خُبْزًا وَحَلِيبًا.
    My mother bought bread and milk.
  4. كِتَابُ الطَّالِبِ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.
    The student's book is on the desk.
  5. كَانَ الطَّقْسُ مُمْطِرًا أَمْسِ.
    The weather was rainy yesterday.
  6. لَيْسَ المَطْعَمُ مَفْتُوحًا.
    The restaurant is not open.
  7. نَزُورُ جَدَّتِي مَسَاءً.
    We visit my grandmother in the evening.
  8. رَكِبَ أَبِي القِطَارَ إِلَى المَدِينَةِ.
    My father took the train to the city.
  9. أَرْسَلْتُ رِسَالَةً إِلَى صَدِيقِي.
    I sent a message to my friend.
  10. رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّمِينَ فِي المَمَرِّ.
    I saw the teachers in the hallway.
  11. فِي حَقِيبَتِي قَلَمَانِ وَدَفْتَرٌ.
    In my bag there are two pens and a notebook.
  12. يُحِبُّ أَخِي كُرَةَ القَدَمِ.
    My brother loves football.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1What is the case of the word in the second column?

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: مَا حَالَةُ الكَلِمَةِ؟

SentenceWordCase
شَرِبَ الطِّفْلُ الحَلِيبَ.الحَلِيبَ
ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى السُّوقِ.السُّوقِ
الجَوُّ جَمِيلٌ.جَمِيلٌ
كَتَبَ الطَّالِبُ الوَاجِبَ.الطَّالِبُ
هَذَا بَابُ الفَصْلِ.الفَصْلِ

1 accusative (the object) · 2 genitive (after إِلَى) · 3 nominative (the predicate) · 4 nominative (the doer) · 5 genitive (the second word of an idafa)

2Write the word in brackets with the right ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اكْتُبِ الكَلِمَةَ بِالحَرَكَةِ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. رَأَيْتُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ( القِطَّة )
  2. جَلَسْتُ عَلَى . ( الكُرْسِيّ )
  3. مُغْلَقٌ. ( البَاب )
  4. اشْتَرَيْتُ . ( كِتَاب )
  5. هَذِهِ سَيَّارَةُ . ( المُدِير )
١) القِطَّةَ ٢) الكُرْسِيِّ ٣) البَابُ ٤) كِتَابًا ٥) المُدِيرِ

3Choose the right form.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الصِّيغَةَ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. شَرِبْتُ . ( مَاءٌ / مَاءً / مَاءٍ )
  2. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى . ( المَسْجِدُ / المَسْجِدَ / المَسْجِدِ )
  3. نَظِيفَةٌ. ( الغُرْفَةُ / الغُرْفَةَ / الغُرْفَةِ )
  4. كَانَ الدَّرْسُ . ( سَهْلٌ / سَهْلًا / سَهْلٍ )
  5. رَأَيْتُ . ( المُعَلِّمَاتُ / المُعَلِّمَاتَ / المُعَلِّمَاتِ )
١) مَاءً ٢) المَسْجِدِ ٣) الغُرْفَةُ ٤) سَهْلًا ٥) المُعَلِّمَاتِ

4Each sentence has one wrong ending. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. قَرَأْتُ الكِتَابُ. ←
  2. ذَهَبَ الوَلَدَ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. ←
  3. جَلَسْنَا فِي الحَدِيقَةُ. ←
  4. اشْتَرَتْ أُمِّي سَيَّارَةًا. ←
  5. هَذَا قَلَمُ الطَّالِبَ. ←
١) قَرَأْتُ الكِتَابَ.
٢) ذَهَبَ الوَلَدُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
٣) جَلَسْنَا فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
٤) اشْتَرَتْ أُمِّي سَيَّارَةً.
٥) هَذَا قَلَمُ الطَّالِبِ.

5Why does the word have this ending? Choose the reason.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: لِمَاذَا؟ اخْتَرِ السَّبَبَ.

Reasons: (a) the doer · (b) the object · (c) after a preposition · (d) the second word of an idafa · (e) the predicate

SentenceWordReason
صَلَّيْتُ فِي المَسْجِدِ.المَسْجِدِ
فَتَحَ أَخِي الشُّبَّاكَ.الشُّبَّاكَ
نَامَ الطِّفْلُ.الطِّفْلُ
هَذَا قَمِيصُ الوَلَدِ.الوَلَدِ
الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ.لَذِيذٌ

1 (c) · 2 (b) · 3 (a) · 4 (d) · 5 (e)

6Translate into Arabic. Write every ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I drank water.
  2. The student went to the library.
  3. My father's car is new.
  4. The weather was cold.
  5. We saw the teacher in the masjid.
١) شَرِبْتُ مَاءً.
٢) ذَهَبَ الطَّالِبُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ.
٣) سَيَّارَةُ أَبِي جَدِيدَةٌ.
٤) كَانَ الطَّقْسُ بَارِدًا.
٥) رَأَيْنَا المُعَلِّمَ فِي المَسْجِدِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the case of the word in the second column. (5 marks)

SentenceWordCase
أَكَلْتُ تُفَّاحَةً.تُفَّاحَةً
البَيْتُ بَعِيدٌ.البَيْتُ
سَافَرْنَا بِالطَّائِرَةِ.الطَّائِرَةِ
لَعِبَ الأَوْلَادُ.الأَوْلَادُ
لَبِسْتُ قَمِيصًا.قَمِيصًا

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. دَخَلَ الفَصْلَ. ( المُعَلِّمُ / المُعَلِّمَ / المُعَلِّمِ )
  2. أَكَلْتُ . ( مَوْزَةٌ / مَوْزَةً / مَوْزَةٍ )
  3. نَحْنُ فِي . ( البَيْتُ / البَيْتَ / البَيْتِ )
  4. لَيْسَ الشَّايُ . ( حَارٌّ / حَارًّا / حَارٍّ )
  5. هَذَا مِفْتَاحُ . ( السَّيَّارَةُ / السَّيَّارَةَ / السَّيَّارَةِ )

Question 3 — Write the word in brackets with the right ending. (5 marks)

  1. شَرِبْتُ . ( عَصِير )
  2. ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى . ( الحَدِيقَة )
  3. كَبِيرَةٌ. ( المَدْرَسَة )
  4. رَأَيْتُ . ( الطَّبِيب )
  5. قَمِيصُ أَبْيَضُ. ( الوَلَد )

Question 4 — Write three sentences: one with a word in the nominative, one in the accusative and one in the genitive. Write every ending. (5 marks)

Question 1

1 accusative · 2 nominative · 3 genitive · 4 nominative · 5 accusative

Question 2

١) المُعَلِّمُ ٢) مَوْزَةً ٣) البَيْتِ ٤) حَارًّا ٥) السَّيَّارَةِ

Question 3

١) عَصِيرًا ٢) الحَدِيقَةِ ٣) المَدْرَسَةُ ٤) الطَّبِيبَ ٥) الوَلَدِ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct endings throughout.

Grammar · Lesson 6 of 20

المُذَكَّرُ وَالمُؤَنَّث

Masculine & Feminine

Every Arabic noun is either masculine or feminine. Learn how to tell them apart, how to make a word feminine, and how the rest of the sentence follows.

In this lesson

  • Recognise ة as the sign of a feminine word.
  • Know the feminine words that have no ة.
  • Make nouns and adjectives feminine.
  • Use هَذِهِ, هِيَ and the feminine verb with feminine words.

Words to practise withThe FamilyThe HomeThe Body & HealthJobs & Work

أ

The feminine sign: ة

عَلَامَةُ التَّأْنِيثِ

Arabic has no word for it. Every noun — a person, a car, a room — is either masculine or feminine. Most feminine words end in ة, called taa marbuta.

MasculineEnglishFeminineEnglish
طَالِبstudent (m.)طَالِبَةstudent (f.)
مُعَلِّمteacher (m.)مُعَلِّمَةteacher (f.)
صَدِيقfriend (m.)صَدِيقَةfriend (f.)
طَبِيبdoctor (m.)طَبِيبَةdoctor (f.)
مُهَنْدِسengineer (m.)مُهَنْدِسَةengineer (f.)
جَارneighbour (m.)جَارَةneighbour (f.)

Things have gender too

A word does not need to be a person to be feminine. If it ends in ة, treat it as feminine.

كِتَاب · قَلَم · بَيْت
masculine — book, pen, house
سَيَّارَة · غُرْفَة · مَدْرَسَة
feminine — car, room, school
ب

Feminine by meaning

مُؤَنَّثٌ بِالمَعْنَى

Some words are feminine because they name a woman or a girl, even though they have no ة.

WordEnglishMasculine partnerEnglish
أُمّmotherأَبfather
أُخْتsisterأَخbrother
بِنْتgirl, daughterوَلَدboy

And the opposite is rare

Almost every word that names a man is masculine, so you can trust the meaning first and the ending second.

أُمِّي طَبِيبَةٌ.
My mother is a doctor.
أُخْتِي طَالِبَةٌ.
My sister is a student.
ج

Feminine words without ة

كَلِمَاتٌ مُؤَنَّثَةٌ بِلَا تَاءٍ

A small group of everyday words are feminine with no sign at all. Many of them are parts of the body that come in pairs. Learn them as a list.

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
شَمْسsunأَرْضearth, ground
يَدhandعَيْنeye
رِجْلleg, footأُذُنear
نَارfireدَارhouse, home

The adjective shows it

You can hear that these words are feminine because the adjective after them takes ة.

الشَّمْسُ حَارَّةٌ.
The sun is hot.
يَدِي نَظِيفَةٌ.
My hand is clean.
الأَرْضُ كَبِيرَةٌ.
The earth is big.
د

Making a word feminine

صِيَاغَةُ المُؤَنَّث

To make most job words and adjectives feminine, add ة to the masculine form. Nothing else changes.

MasculineFeminineEnglish
كَبِيركَبِيرَةbig
صَغِيرصَغِيرَةsmall
جَدِيدجَدِيدَةnew
جَمِيلجَمِيلَةbeautiful
سَعِيدسَعِيدَةhappy
نَظِيفنَظِيفَةclean
مُجْتَهِدمُجْتَهِدَةhard-working

Same word, two forms

البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.
The house is big.
الغُرْفَةُ كَبِيرَةٌ.
The room is big.
المُعَلِّمُ سَعِيدٌ.
The teacher (m.) is happy.
المُعَلِّمَةُ سَعِيدَةٌ.
The teacher (f.) is happy.

Colours are different

The basic colour words (أَحْمَر، أَزْرَق …) do not take ة — they have their own feminine pattern, فَعْلَاء. Colours that end in ـِيّ do take ة: بُنِّيّ → بُنِّيَّة. See Grammar 7 and Vocabulary 7.

أَحْمَر ← حَمْرَاء
red (m.) → red (f.)
هـ

The rest of the sentence follows

المُطَابَقَةُ فِي الجُمْلَة

Once a word is feminine, the words that point to it or act with it become feminine too: the pronoun, this, and the verb.

MasculineFeminineWhat changed
هَذَا بَيْتٌ.هَذِهِ سَيَّارَةٌ.this: هَذَا → هَذِهِ
الكِتَابُ؟ هُوَ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.الحَقِيبَةُ؟ هِيَ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.it: هُوَ → هِيَ
ذَهَبَ أَخِي.ذَهَبَتْ أُخْتِي.past verb adds ـَتْ
يَدْرُسُ الطَّالِبُ.تَدْرُسُ الطَّالِبَةُ.present verb starts with تَـ

Things act like people

A feminine thing uses the feminine verb too, exactly like a woman does.

وَصَلَتِ الحَافِلَةُ.
The bus arrived.
تَبْدَأُ المَدْرَسَةُ فِي الثَّامِنَةِ.
School starts at eight.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. أُمِّي طَبِيبَةٌ، وَأَبِي مُهَنْدِسٌ.
    My mother is a doctor, and my father is an engineer.
  2. هَذِهِ سَيَّارَةٌ جَدِيدَةٌ.
    This is a new car.
  3. الشَّمْسُ حَارَّةٌ اليَوْمَ.
    The sun is hot today.
  4. أُخْتِي طَالِبَةٌ مُجْتَهِدَةٌ.
    My sister is a hard-working student.
  5. هَذِهِ الغُرْفَةُ صَغِيرَةٌ، وَهَذَا البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.
    This room is small, and this house is big.
  6. ذَهَبَتْ جَدَّتِي إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.
    My grandmother went to the masjid.
  7. تَدْرُسُ فَاطِمَةُ العَرَبِيَّةَ.
    Fatima studies Arabic.
  8. عَيْنِي تُؤْلِمُنِي.
    My eye hurts.
  9. المُعَلِّمَةُ سَعِيدَةٌ اليَوْمَ.
    The teacher (f.) is happy today.
  10. وَصَلَتِ الحَافِلَةُ مُبَكِّرًا.
    The bus arrived early.
  11. الأَرْضُ كَبِيرَةٌ وَجَمِيلَةٌ.
    The earth is big and beautiful.
  12. جَارَتُنَا مُمَرِّضَةٌ.
    Our neighbour (f.) is a nurse.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Masculine or feminine? Write M or F.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: مُذَكَّرٌ أَمْ مُؤَنَّثٌ؟

WordM or FWordM or F
سَيَّارَةقَلَم
شَمْسأُمّ
بَيْتيَد
مَدْرَسَةكِتَاب

سَيَّارَة F · شَمْس F · بَيْت M · مَدْرَسَة F · قَلَم M · أُمّ F · يَد F · كِتَاب M

2Make each word feminine.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: حَوِّلْ إِلَى المُؤَنَّث.

  1. طَالِب ←
  2. طَبِيب ←
  3. جَدِيد ←
  4. صَغِير ←
  5. مُعَلِّم ←
١) طَالِبَة ٢) طَبِيبَة ٣) جَدِيدَة ٤) صَغِيرَة ٥) مُعَلِّمَة

3Write هَذَا or هَذِهِ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اكْتُبْ (هَذَا) أَوْ (هَذِهِ).

  1. غُرْفَةٌ.
  2. أُمِّي.
  3. مَكْتَبٌ.
  4. شَمْسٌ جَمِيلَةٌ.
  5. أَخِي.
١) هَذِهِ ٢) هَذِهِ ٣) هَذَا ٤) هَذِهِ ٥) هَذَا

4Choose the right verb.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. المُعَلِّمَةُ الفَصْلَ. ( دَخَلَ / دَخَلَتْ )
  2. أَبِي فِي المُسْتَشْفَى. ( يَعْمَلُ / تَعْمَلُ )
  3. السَّيَّارَةُ أَمَامَ البَيْتِ. ( وَقَفَ / وَقَفَتْ )
  4. أُخْتِي الشَّايَ. ( يَشْرَبُ / تَشْرَبُ )
  5. الطَّالِبُ الوَاجِبَ. ( كَتَبَ / كَتَبَتْ )
١) دَخَلَتْ ٢) يَعْمَلُ ٣) وَقَفَتْ ٤) تَشْرَبُ ٥) كَتَبَ

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

Sentence with a mistakeCorrect sentence
هَذَا سَيَّارَةٌ.
الشَّمْسُ حَارٌّ.
أُمِّي طَبِيبٌ.
ذَهَبَ البِنْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
الغُرْفَةُ نَظِيفٌ.
١) هَذِهِ سَيَّارَةٌ.
٢) الشَّمْسُ حَارَّةٌ.
٣) أُمِّي طَبِيبَةٌ.
٤) ذَهَبَتِ البِنْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
٥) الغُرْفَةُ نَظِيفَةٌ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. My sister is a teacher.
  2. This is a big school.
  3. The sun is beautiful.
  4. My mother went to the market.
  5. My hand is clean.
١) أُخْتِي مُعَلِّمَةٌ.
٢) هَذِهِ مَدْرَسَةٌ كَبِيرَةٌ.
٣) الشَّمْسُ جَمِيلَةٌ.
٤) ذَهَبَتْ أُمِّي إِلَى السُّوقِ.
٥) يَدِي نَظِيفَةٌ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the feminine form. (5 marks)

  1. صَدِيق ←
  2. سَعِيد ←
  3. مُهَنْدِس ←
  4. كَبِير ←
  5. جَار ←

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. يَدِي. ( هَذَا / هَذِهِ )
  2. العَيْنُ . ( صَغِيرٌ / صَغِيرَةٌ )
  3. جَدَّتِي إِلَى السُّوقِ. ( ذَهَبَ / ذَهَبَتْ )
  4. الكِتَابُ؟ فِي الحَقِيبَةِ. ( هُوَ / هِيَ )
  5. الحَافِلَةُ فِي السَّابِعَةِ. ( يَصِلُ / تَصِلُ )

Question 3 — Masculine or feminine? Write M or F. (5 marks)

WordM or F
أَرْض
دَفْتَر
بِنْت
مِفْتَاح
أُذُن

Question 4 — Write three sentences about women in your family. Use a feminine adjective and a feminine verb. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) صَدِيقَة ٢) سَعِيدَة ٣) مُهَنْدِسَة ٤) كَبِيرَة ٥) جَارَة

Question 2

١) هَذِهِ ٢) صَغِيرَةٌ ٣) ذَهَبَتْ ٤) هُوَ ٥) تَصِلُ

Question 3

أَرْض F · دَفْتَر M · بِنْت F · مِفْتَاح M · أُذُن F

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct feminine agreement and vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 7 of 20

الصِّفَةُ وَالمَوْصُوف

Adjectives & Agreement

Where the adjective goes, the four things it must copy from its noun, the difference between the big house and the house is big, and the special rule for plurals of things.

In this lesson

  • Put the adjective after the noun.
  • Make the adjective agree in gender, definiteness, number and case.
  • Tell a phrase (the big house) from a sentence (the house is big).
  • Use a feminine singular adjective with plurals of things.

Words to practise withThe HomeFood & DrinkClothes & ColoursWeather & Seasons

أ

The adjective comes second

الصِّفَةُ بَعْدَ المَوْصُوف

In English the adjective comes first: a big house. In Arabic it comes after the noun: house big.

ArabicWord by wordEnglish
بَيْتٌ كَبِيرٌhouse — biga big house
قَلَمٌ جَدِيدٌpen — newa new pen
طَعَامٌ لَذِيذٌfood — deliciousdelicious food
يَوْمٌ بَارِدٌday — colda cold day
سَيَّارَةٌ سَرِيعَةٌcar — fasta fast car
ب

Four things the adjective copies

المُطَابَقَةُ فِي أَرْبَعَةِ أَشْيَاء

The adjective is a mirror of its noun. It copies the noun's gender, whether it has ال, its number, and its case ending.

What it copiesArabicEnglish
Gender
masculineطَالِبٌ مُجْتَهِدٌa hard-working student (m.)
feminineطَالِبَةٌ مُجْتَهِدَةٌa hard-working student (f.)
Definiteness — ال
without البَيْتٌ جَمِيلٌa beautiful house
with الالبَيْتُ الجَمِيلُthe beautiful house
Number
dualطَالِبَانِ مُجْتَهِدَانِtwo hard-working students
plural (people)مُعَلِّمُونَ مُجْتَهِدُونَhard-working teachers
Case
after a prepositionفِي بَيْتٍ كَبِيرٍin a big house
as the objectرَكِبْتُ حَافِلَةً كَبِيرَةًI got on a big bus

Read the ending twice

The adjective copies the noun's case: nominative, accusative or genitive. Usually that means the same final vowel — but not always, because some words (colours, plurals in ـَات) mark the case in their own way.

فِي غُرْفَةٍ نَظِيفَةٍ
in a clean room
فِي الغُرْفَةِ النَّظِيفَةِ
in the clean room
ج

Phrase or sentence?

صِفَةٌ أَمْ جُمْلَةٌ؟

This is the most important trap. If both words have ال, you have a phrase: the big house. If only the noun has ال, you have a full sentence: the house is big — because Arabic has no word for is (Grammar 2).

ArabicTypeEnglish
البَيْتُ الكَبِيرُphrasethe big house
البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.sentenceThe house is big.
الطَّعَامُ اللَّذِيذُphrasethe delicious food
الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ.sentenceThe food is delicious.

Use the phrase inside a longer sentence

A phrase is not finished. It needs more words to become a sentence.

البَيْتُ الكَبِيرُ بَيْتُ جَدِّي.
The big house is my grandfather's house.
هَذَا البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ.
This house is big.
د

Plurals of things

جَمْعُ غَيْرِ العَاقِل

Here Arabic surprises English speakers. When a plural noun is a thing or an animal — not people — the adjective is feminine singular.

Plural nounAdjectiveEnglish
كُتُبٌجَدِيدَةٌnew books
سَيَّارَاتٌسَرِيعَةٌfast cars
الغُرَفُالنَّظِيفَةُthe clean rooms
أَقْلَامٌزَرْقَاءُblue pens

People are different

Plurals of people keep a plural adjective. Compare:

مُعَلِّمُونَ مُجْتَهِدُونَ
hard-working teachers — people, plural adjective
دَفَاتِرُ جَدِيدَةٌ
new notebooks — things, feminine singular
هَذِهِ الكُتُبُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
These books are new. — هَذِهِ too
هـ

Common adjectives and colours

صِفَاتٌ شَائِعَةٌ وَالأَلْوَان
ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
كَبِيرbigصَغِيرsmall
جَدِيدnewقَدِيمold
طَوِيلtall, longقَصِيرshort
سَهْلeasyصَعْبdifficult
حَارّhotبَارِدcold
سَرِيعfastبَطِيءslow
نَظِيفcleanلَذِيذdelicious
رَخِيصcheapغَالٍexpensive

Colours have their own feminine

The basic colours never take ة or tanween: the masculine looks like أَفْعَل, the feminine like فَعْلَاء. Colours ending in ـِيّ (بُنِّيّ، رَمَادِيّ) behave like ordinary adjectives and take ة and tanween. You will meet all of them in Vocabulary 7.

أَحْمَر ← حَمْرَاء
red
أَبْيَض ← بَيْضَاء
white
قَمِيصٌ أَبْيَضُ
a white shirt
سَيَّارَةٌ حَمْرَاءُ
a red car
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. عِنْدِي سَيَّارَةٌ جَدِيدَةٌ.
    I have a new car.
  2. يَسْكُنُ عَمِّي فِي بَيْتٍ كَبِيرٍ.
    My uncle lives in a big house.
  3. البَيْتُ الكَبِيرُ بَيْتُ جَدِّي.
    The big house is my grandfather's house.
  4. المَطْبَخُ نَظِيفٌ، وَالغُرْفَةُ نَظِيفَةٌ أَيْضًا.
    The kitchen is clean, and the room is clean too.
  5. اشْتَرَيْتُ قَمِيصًا أَبْيَضَ.
    I bought a white shirt.
  6. هَذَا الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ.
    This food is delicious.
  7. الدَّرْسُ سَهْلٌ، وَالاخْتِبَارُ صَعْبٌ.
    The lesson is easy, and the test is difficult.
  8. فِي حَقِيبَتِي كُتُبٌ جَدِيدَةٌ.
    In my bag there are new books.
  9. زَمِيلَتِي طَالِبَةٌ مُجْتَهِدَةٌ.
    My classmate is a hard-working student.
  10. الطَّقْسُ بَارِدٌ اليَوْمَ.
    The weather is cold today.
  11. رَكِبْنَا حَافِلَةً كَبِيرَةً.
    We got on a big bus.
  12. أُحِبُّ السَّيَّارَاتِ السَّرِيعَةَ.
    I love fast cars.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Choose the adjective that agrees.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اخْتَرِ الصِّفَةَ المُنَاسِبَة.

  1. بَيْتٌ ( كَبِيرٌ / كَبِيرَةٌ )
  2. غُرْفَةٌ ( نَظِيفٌ / نَظِيفَةٌ )
  3. الطَّالِبُ ( الجَدِيدُ / الجَدِيدِ )
  4. فِي مَدْرَسَةٍ ( كَبِيرَةٌ / كَبِيرَةٍ )
  5. طَالِبَتَانِ ( مُجْتَهِدَتَانِ / مُجْتَهِدَةٌ )
١) كَبِيرٌ ٢) نَظِيفَةٌ ٣) الجَدِيدُ ٤) كَبِيرَةٍ ٥) مُجْتَهِدَتَانِ

2Make the phrase definite: add ال to both words.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَدْخِلْ (ال) عَلَى الكَلِمَتَيْنِ.

  1. بَيْتٌ جَمِيلٌ ←
  2. قَلَمٌ أَزْرَقُ ←
  3. يَوْمٌ حَارٌّ ←
  4. سَيَّارَةٌ جَدِيدَةٌ ←
  5. دَرْسٌ سَهْلٌ ←
١) البَيْتُ الجَمِيلُ ٢) القَلَمُ الأَزْرَقُ ٣) اليَوْمُ الحَارُّ ٤) السَّيَّارَةُ الجَدِيدَةُ ٥) الدَّرْسُ السَّهْلُ

3Phrase or sentence? Write P or S, then the English.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: صِفَةٌ أَمْ جُمْلَةٌ؟

ArabicP or SEnglish
الكِتَابُ الجَدِيدُ
الكِتَابُ جَدِيدٌ.
الشَّايُ حَارٌّ.
المُعَلِّمَةُ الجَدِيدَةُ

1) P — the new book · 2) S — The book is new. · 3) S — The tea is hot. · 4) P — the new teacher

4Plurals of things: choose the right adjective.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الصِّفَةَ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. الكُتُبُ . ( جَدِيدُونَ / جَدِيدَةٌ )
  2. عِنْدِي أَقْلَامٌ . ( كَثِيرَةٌ / كَثِيرُونَ )
  3. المُهَنْدِسُونَ . ( مَشْغُولَةٌ / مَشْغُولُونَ )
  4. السَّيَّارَاتُ سَرِيعَةٌ. ( هَؤُلَاءِ / هَذِهِ )
  5. الغُرَفُ . ( نَظِيفَةٌ / نَظِيفَاتٌ )
١) جَدِيدَةٌ ٢) كَثِيرَةٌ ٣) مَشْغُولُونَ ٤) هَذِهِ ٥) نَظِيفَةٌ

5Each phrase has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

With a mistakeCorrect
كَبِيرٌ بَيْتٌ
السَّيَّارَةُ جَدِيدَةُ
البِنْتُ الصَّغِيرُ
فِي بَيْتٍ جَمِيلٌ
الكُتُبُ الجَدِيدُونَ
١) بَيْتٌ كَبِيرٌ
٢) السَّيَّارَةُ الجَدِيدَةُ أَوْ السَّيَّارَةُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
٣) البِنْتُ الصَّغِيرَةُ
٤) فِي بَيْتٍ جَمِيلٍ
٥) الكُتُبُ الجَدِيدَةُ

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. a small room
  2. the new teacher (f.)
  3. The food is delicious.
  4. I live in a big house.
  5. These books are new.
١) غُرْفَةٌ صَغِيرَةٌ
٢) المُعَلِّمَةُ الجَدِيدَةُ
٣) الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ.
٤) أَسْكُنُ فِي بَيْتٍ كَبِيرٍ.
٥) هَذِهِ الكُتُبُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Circle the correct adjective. (5 marks)

  1. سَيَّارَةٌ ( سَرِيعٌ / سَرِيعَةٌ )
  2. المَطْبَخُ ( النَّظِيفُ / نَظِيفٍ )
  3. رَكِبْتُ حَافِلَةً ( كَبِيرَةٌ / كَبِيرَةً )
  4. الأَقْلَامُ . ( جَدِيدَةٌ / جَدِيدُونَ )
  5. المُعَلِّمُونَ . ( سَعِيدَةٌ / سَعِيدُونَ )

Question 2 — Make the phrase feminine. (5 marks)

  1. طَالِبٌ جَدِيدٌ ←
  2. الصَّدِيقُ الطَّوِيلُ ←
  3. مُعَلِّمٌ سَعِيدٌ ←
  4. الجَارُ الكَبِيرُ ←
  5. قَلَمٌ أَحْمَرُ ← (سَيَّارَةٌ)

Question 3 — Phrase or sentence? Write the English meaning. (5 marks)

ArabicEnglish
الدَّرْسُ صَعْبٌ.
الدَّرْسُ الصَّعْبُ
البِنْتُ الصَّغِيرَةُ
الطَّقْسُ بَارِدٌ.
هَذِهِ الكُتُبُ قَدِيمَةٌ.

Question 4 — Describe your room or your house in three sentences. Use at least three adjectives. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) سَرِيعَةٌ ٢) النَّظِيفُ ٣) كَبِيرَةً ٤) جَدِيدَةٌ ٥) سَعِيدُونَ

Question 2

١) طَالِبَةٌ جَدِيدَةٌ ٢) الصَّدِيقَةُ الطَّوِيلَةُ ٣) مُعَلِّمَةٌ سَعِيدَةٌ ٤) الجَارَةُ الكَبِيرَةُ ٥) سَيَّارَةٌ حَمْرَاءُ

Question 3

1) The lesson is difficult. · 2) the difficult lesson · 3) the little girl · 4) The weather is cold. · 5) These books are old.

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for adjectives that agree in gender, ال and case.

Grammar · Lesson 8 of 20

المُفْرَدُ وَالمُثَنَّى وَالجَمْع

Singular, Dual & Plural

Arabic counts in three steps: one, exactly two, and three or more. Learn the dual endings, the two regular plurals, and the most common broken plurals.

In this lesson

  • Make the dual with ـَانِ and know when it becomes ـَيْنِ.
  • Make the regular plurals ـُونَ / ـِينَ and ـَاتٌ.
  • Learn broken plurals together with their singular.
  • Use the right adjective and verb with plurals of things.

Words to practise withSchool & ClassroomThe FamilyThe HomeJobs & Work

أ

One, two, three or more

المُفْرَدُ وَالمُثَنَّى وَالجَمْع

English has two forms: book, books. Arabic has three. The middle one, the dual, is used for exactly two — and it is not optional.

OneTwoThree or moreEnglish
كِتَابكِتَابَانِكُتُبbook
طَالِبطَالِبَانِطُلَّابstudent
سَيَّارَةسَيَّارَتَانِسَيَّارَاتcar
مُعَلِّممُعَلِّمَانِمُعَلِّمُونَteacher
ب

The dual: ـَانِ and ـَيْنِ

المُثَنَّى

Add ـَانِ to the singular. A word ending in ة changes it to ت first. You do not say the number two — the ending already means it.

SingularDual ـَانِDual ـَيْنِEnglish
كِتَابكِتَابَانِكِتَابَيْنِtwo books
بَاببَابَانِبَابَيْنِtwo doors
يَوْميَوْمَانِيَوْمَيْنِtwo days
طَالِبَةطَالِبَتَانِطَالِبَتَيْنِtwo students (f.)
غُرْفَةغُرْفَتَانِغُرْفَتَيْنِtwo rooms

When do I use ـَيْنِ?

Use ـَانِ when the word is the subject — this includes sentences like I have and there are. Use ـَيْنِ when it comes right after a preposition, or when it is the object of a verb.

عِنْدِي كِتَابَانِ.
I have two books.
قَرَأْتُ كِتَابَيْنِ.
I read two books. — object
جَلَسْتُ بَيْنَ طَالِبَيْنِ.
I sat between two students. — after a preposition
فِي البَيْتِ غُرْفَتَانِ.
There are two rooms in the house.
ج

Regular plural for men: ـُونَ / ـِينَ

جَمْعُ المُذَكَّرِ السَّالِم

Many words for male people — mostly jobs and descriptions — add ـُونَ. Like the dual, it changes to ـِينَ after a preposition or as an object.

SingularPlural ـُونَPlural ـِينَEnglish
مُعَلِّممُعَلِّمُونَمُعَلِّمِينَteachers
مُهَنْدِسمُهَنْدِسُونَمُهَنْدِسِينَengineers
مُسْلِممُسْلِمُونَمُسْلِمِينَMuslims
مُوَظَّفمُوَظَّفُونَمُوَظَّفِينَemployees
لَاعِبلَاعِبُونَلَاعِبِينَplayers

Both forms in use

المُعَلِّمُونَ فِي الفَصْلِ.
The teachers are in the classroom.
سَلَّمْتُ عَلَى المُعَلِّمِينَ.
I greeted the teachers.
د

Regular plural with ـَاتٌ

جَمْعُ المُؤَنَّثِ السَّالِم

Words for female people add ـَاتٌ, and so do many words that end in ة and some masculine nouns such as امْتِحَان and مَطَار. The ة drops before the ending.

SingularPluralEnglish
مُعَلِّمَةمُعَلِّمَاتteachers (f.)
طَالِبَةطَالِبَاتstudents (f.)
سَيَّارَةسَيَّارَاتcars
سَاعَةسَاعَاتhours, clocks
حَافِلَةحَافِلَاتbuses
طَاوِلَةطَاوِلَاتtables
امْتِحَانامْتِحَانَاتexams
مَطَارمَطَارَاتairports

One small change of vowel

As an object or after a preposition, ـَاتٌ takes a kasra, never a fatha.

رَأَيْتُ السَّيَّارَاتِ.
I saw the cars.
جَلَسْتُ مَعَ الطَّالِبَاتِ.
I sat with the students (f.).
هـ

Broken plurals

جَمْعُ التَّكْسِير

Most Arabic plurals change the inside of the word, like man → men in English. There is no single rule, but a few shapes come up again and again. Always learn a new noun together with its plural.

ShapeSingularPluralEnglish
أَفْعَالقَلَمأَقْلَامpen → pens
أَفْعَالوَلَدأَوْلَادboy → boys, children
أَفْعَاليَوْمأَيَّامday → days
فُعُولبَيْتبُيُوتhouse → houses
فُعُولدَرْسدُرُوسlesson → lessons
فُعُلكِتَابكُتُبbook → books
فُعُلمَدِينَةمُدُنcity → cities
فُعَلغُرْفَةغُرَفroom → rooms
مَفَاعِلمَدْرَسَةمَدَارِسschool → schools
مَفَاعِلمَسْجِدمَسَاجِدmasjid → masjids
فِعَالرَجُلرِجَالman → men
أَفْعِلَاءصَدِيقأَصْدِقَاءfriend → friends

How to learn them

Say the pair aloud every time you meet a new word: كِتَابٌ — كُتُبٌ. In a dictionary the plural is always printed next to the singular.

و

Plurals of things act like one feminine

جَمْعُ غَيْرِ العَاقِل

When a plural names things, not people, it uses هَذِهِ, the feminine verb and a feminine singular adjective. You met this rule in Grammar 7.

Things and people side by side

هَذِهِ الكُتُبُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
These books are new. — things
هَؤُلَاءِ الطُّلَّابُ جُدُدٌ.
These students are new. — people
وَصَلَتِ الحَافِلَاتُ.
The buses arrived. — things
وَصَلَ الطُّلَّابُ.
The students arrived. — people
ز

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. عِنْدِي أَخَوَانِ وَأُخْتٌ وَاحِدَةٌ.
    I have two brothers and one sister.
  2. فِي شَقَّتِنَا غُرْفَتَانِ.
    There are two rooms in our apartment.
  3. اشْتَرَيْتُ قَمِيصَيْنِ.
    I bought two shirts.
  4. المُهَنْدِسُونَ يَعْمَلُونَ فِي المَصْنَعِ.
    The engineers work in the factory.
  5. زُرْنَا المُعَلِّمِينَ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
    We visited the teachers at school.
  6. الطَّالِبَاتُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.
    The students (f.) are in the library.
  7. فِي مَدِينَتِنَا مَسَاجِدُ كَثِيرَةٌ.
    There are many masjids in our city.
  8. أَصْدِقَائِي يَلْعَبُونَ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ.
    My friends play football.
  9. قَرَأْتُ ثَلَاثَةَ كُتُبٍ.
    I read three books.
  10. هَذِهِ الأَقْلَامُ رَخِيصَةٌ.
    These pens are cheap.
  11. الأَوْلَادُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
    The children are in the garden.
  12. سَافَرْنَا يَوْمَيْنِ.
    We travelled for two days.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the dual with ـَانِ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ المُثَنَّى.

  1. قَلَم ←
  2. سَاعَة ←
  3. طَالِب ←
  4. مَدْرَسَة ←
  5. بَيْت ←
١) قَلَمَانِ ٢) سَاعَتَانِ ٣) طَالِبَانِ ٤) مَدْرَسَتَانِ ٥) بَيْتَانِ

2ـَانِ or ـَيْنِ? Choose.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اخْتَرِ الصَّحِيح.

  1. عِنْدِي . ( كِتَابَانِ / كِتَابَيْنِ )
  2. قَرَأْتُ . ( قِصَّتَانِ / قِصَّتَيْنِ )
  3. فِي البَيْتِ . ( حَمَّامَانِ / حَمَّامَيْنِ )
  4. جَلَسْتُ بَيْنَ . ( طَالِبَانِ / طَالِبَيْنِ )
  5. اشْتَرَى أَبِي . ( قَمِيصَانِ / قَمِيصَيْنِ )
١) كِتَابَانِ ٢) قِصَّتَيْنِ ٣) حَمَّامَانِ ٤) طَالِبَيْنِ ٥) قَمِيصَيْنِ

3Write the regular plural.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اكْتُبِ الجَمْعَ السَّالِم.

SingularPluralSingularPlural
مُهَنْدِسطَالِبَة
مُسْلِمسَيَّارَة
مُعَلِّمَةلَاعِب
مُهَنْدِسُونَ · مُسْلِمُونَ · مُعَلِّمَات · طَالِبَات · سَيَّارَات · لَاعِبُونَ

4Write the broken plural.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اكْتُبْ جَمْعَ التَّكْسِير.

  1. كِتَاب ←
  2. وَلَد ←
  3. غُرْفَة ←
  4. دَرْس ←
  5. صَدِيق ←
  6. مَسْجِد ←
١) كُتُب ٢) أَوْلَاد ٣) غُرَف ٤) دُرُوس ٥) أَصْدِقَاء ٦) مَسَاجِد

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

Sentence with a mistakeCorrect sentence
عِنْدِي اثْنَانِ كِتَابٌ.
هَذِهِ الكُتُبُ جَدِيدُونَ.
رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّمُونَ.
جَلَسْنَا فِي غُرْفَتَانِ.
هَؤُلَاءِ سَيَّارَاتٌ.
١) عِنْدِي كِتَابَانِ.
٢) هَذِهِ الكُتُبُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
٣) رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّمِينَ.
٤) جَلَسْنَا فِي غُرْفَتَيْنِ.
٥) هَذِهِ سَيَّارَاتٌ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I have two sisters.
  2. The engineers are in the office.
  3. These cars are new.
  4. We read two books.
  5. My friends are in the masjid.
١) عِنْدِي أُخْتَانِ.
٢) المُهَنْدِسُونَ فِي المَكْتَبِ.
٣) هَذِهِ السَّيَّارَاتُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
٤) قَرَأْنَا كِتَابَيْنِ.
٥) أَصْدِقَائِي فِي المَسْجِدِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Complete the table: dual and plural. (5 marks)

SingularDualPlural
قَلَمأَقْلَام
طَالِبَةطَالِبَتَانِ
مُعَلِّم
بَيْتبَيْتَانِ

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. فِي الفَصْلِ . ( سَبُّورَتَانِ / سَبُّورَتَيْنِ )
  2. سَلَّمْتُ عَلَى . ( المُوَظَّفُونَ / المُوَظَّفِينَ )
  3. الأَقْلَامُ . ( رَخِيصَةٌ / رَخِيصُونَ )
  4. الطَّالِبَاتُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ. ( هَذَا / هَؤُلَاءِ )
  5. اشْتَرَيْتُ . ( حَقِيبَتَانِ / حَقِيبَتَيْنِ )

Question 3 — Write the plural. (5 marks)

  1. رَجُل ←
  2. مَدِينَة ←
  3. يَوْم ←
  4. سَاعَة ←
  5. مُسْلِم ←

Question 4 — Write three sentences about things you have at home. Use one dual and two plurals. (5 marks)

Question 1

قَلَمَانِ · طَالِبَات · مُعَلِّمَانِ — مُعَلِّمُونَ · بُيُوت

Question 2

١) سَبُّورَتَانِ ٢) المُوَظَّفِينَ ٣) رَخِيصَةٌ ٤) هَؤُلَاءِ ٥) حَقِيبَتَيْنِ

Question 3

١) رِجَال ٢) مُدُن ٣) أَيَّام ٤) سَاعَات ٥) مُسْلِمُونَ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct dual and plural forms.

Grammar · Lesson 9 of 20

الإِضَافَة

Possession: the Idafa

How Arabic says the student's book, the door of the house and a cup of tea — by putting two nouns side by side.

In this lesson

  • Join two nouns to mean X of Y.
  • Remember the two rules: no ال on the first word, kasra on the second.
  • Say ة as t when it is the first word — it is still written ة.
  • Build chains like the door of my grandfather's house.

Words to practise withThe FamilyThe HomeFood & DrinkThe City & Directions

أ

Two nouns side by side

مَا هِيَ الإِضَافَةُ؟

Arabic has no word for of and no apostrophe-s. You simply put the owned thing first and the owner second. This pair is called an idafa.

IdafaWord by wordEnglish
كِتَابُ الطَّالِبِbook — the studentthe student's book
بَابُ البَيْتِdoor — the housethe door of the house
مُعَلِّمُ المَدْرَسَةِteacher — the schoolthe school's teacher
يَوْمُ الجُمُعَةِday — FridayFriday
كُرَةُ القَدَمِball — the footfootball
كُوبُ مَاءٍcup — watera cup of water

You already know many

Several words in the vocabulary track are idafas.

غُرْفَةُ النَّوْمِ
bedroom — room of sleep
مَكْتَبُ المُدِيرِ
the principal's office
قَلَمُ رَصَاصٍ
a pencil — pen of lead
ب

Rule 1: the first word is bare

القَاعِدَةُ الأُولَى

The first word of an idafa never takes ال and never takes tanween. It is made definite by the word after it.

WrongRightEnglish
الكِتَابُ الطَّالِبِكِتَابُ الطَّالِبِthe student's book
بَابٌ البَيْتِبَابُ البَيْتِthe door of the house
السَّيَّارَةُ المُعَلِّمِسَيَّارَةُ المُعَلِّمِthe teacher's car

Definite or not?

If the second word has ال (or is a name, or has a pronoun ending), the whole idafa means the. If the second word is indefinite, the idafa means a.

كِتَابُ الطَّالِبِ
the student's book
كِتَابُ طَالِبٍ
a student's book
ج

Rule 2: the second word takes kasra

القَاعِدَةُ الثَّانِيَة

The second word is always in the genitive case: it ends in kasra (or kasratan without ال). The first word's ending changes with its place in the sentence, like any noun.

PositionArabicEnglish
subjectكِتَابُ الطَّالِبِ جَدِيدٌ.The student's book is new.
objectقَرَأْتُ كِتَابَ الطَّالِبِ.I read the student's book.
after a prepositionالصُّورَةُ فِي كِتَابِ الطَّالِبِ.The picture is in the student's book.

With names

A name can be the second word. Most names take kasra (بَيْتُ خَالِدٍ), but some — such as فَاطِمَة، أَحْمَد، زَيْنَب، يُوسُف — take a single fatha with no tanween: بَيْتُ فَاطِمَةَ.

بَيْتُ خَالِدٍ
Khalid's house
سَيَّارَةُ مُحَمَّدٍ
Muhammad's car
د

ة is read as t

التَّاءُ المَرْبُوطَة فِي الإِضَافَة

When the first word ends in ة, you pronounce it as t because a word follows it. The spelling does not change — only the sound.

Listen for the t

سَيَّارَةُ أَبِي
my father's car
مَدْرَسَةُ البَنَاتِ
the girls' school
غُرْفَةُ أُخْتِي
my sister's room
حَقِيبَةُ السَّفَرِ
the suitcase — bag of travel
هـ

Idafa with pronouns and chains

الإِضَافَةُ إِلَى الضَّمِيرِ وَسِلْسِلَةُ الإِضَافَة

The pronoun endings from Grammar 2 are really the second half of an idafa: كِتَابُهُ is his book. You can also join three words in a row. Only the last one may carry ال or a pronoun.

ArabicEnglish
كِتَابُ أَخِيmy brother's book
بَيْتُ عَمِّيmy uncle's house
بَابُ بَيْتِ جَدِّيthe door of my grandfather's house
مِفْتَاحُ سَيَّارَةِ أَبِيthe key of my father's car
مُعَلِّمُ مَدْرَسَةِ أُخْتِيmy sister's school teacher

Only the last word is complete

Look at بَابُ بَيْتِ جَدِّي: بَابُ has no ال, بَيْتِ has no ال and takes kasra, and only جَدِّي has an owner.

و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. هَذَا كِتَابُ المُعَلِّمِ.
    This is the teacher's book.
  2. سَيَّارَةُ أَبِي جَدِيدَةٌ.
    My father's car is new.
  3. غُرْفَةُ أُخْتِي نَظِيفَةٌ.
    My sister's room is clean.
  4. يَعْمَلُ خَالِي فِي مَكْتَبِ البَرِيدِ.
    My uncle works at the post office.
  5. نُصَلِّي فِي مَسْجِدِ المَدِينَةِ.
    We pray in the city masjid.
  6. أَيْنَ مِفْتَاحُ البَيْتِ؟
    Where is the house key?
  7. بَابُ الفَصْلِ مَفْتُوحٌ.
    The classroom door is open.
  8. أُحِبُّ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ.
    I love football.
  9. شَرِبْتُ كُوبَ حَلِيبٍ.
    I drank a glass of milk.
  10. بَيْتُ جَدِّي قَرِيبٌ مِنَ المَسْجِدِ.
    My grandfather's house is near the masjid.
  11. هَاتِفُ صَدِيقِي جَدِيدٌ.
    My friend's phone is new.
  12. جَلَسْنَا فِي حَدِيقَةِ البَيْتِ.
    We sat in the garden of the house.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Join the two words into an idafa.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: كَوِّنْ إِضَافَةً.

  1. كِتَاب + الطَّالِب ←
  2. بَاب + المَدْرَسَة ←
  3. سَيَّارَة + المُعَلِّم ←
  4. غُرْفَة + النَّوْم ←
  5. كُوب + شَاي ←
١) كِتَابُ الطَّالِبِ ٢) بَابُ المَدْرَسَةِ ٣) سَيَّارَةُ المُعَلِّمِ ٤) غُرْفَةُ النَّوْمِ ٥) كُوبُ شَايٍ

2Each idafa has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

With a mistakeCorrect
الكِتَابُ المُعَلِّمِ
بَابٌ البَيْتِ
سَيَّارَةُ الأَبُ
غُرْفَةُ النَّوْمُ
يَوْمٌ الجُمُعَةِ
١) كِتَابُ المُعَلِّمِ ٢) بَابُ البَيْتِ ٣) سَيَّارَةُ الأَبِ ٤) غُرْفَةُ النَّوْمِ ٥) يَوْمُ الجُمُعَةِ

3Write the English meaning.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اكْتُبِ المَعْنَى بِالإِنْجِلِيزِيَّة.

IdafaEnglish
بَيْتُ عَمِّي
مَكْتَبُ المُدِيرِ
كُوبُ مَاءٍ
حَقِيبَةُ أُخْتِي
مَسْجِدُ المَدِينَةِ

1) my uncle's house · 2) the principal's office · 3) a cup of water · 4) my sister's bag · 5) the city masjid

4Choose the correct form.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اخْتَرِ الصَّحِيح.

  1. هَذِهِ حَقِيبَةُ . ( الطَّالِبَةِ / الطَّالِبَةُ )
  2. نَامَ أَخِي فِي غُرْفَةِ . ( النَّوْمِ / النَّوْمُ )
  3. قَرَأْتُ الوَلَدِ. ( كِتَابَ / الكِتَابَ )
  4. أَيْنَ البَيْتِ؟ ( مِفْتَاحُ / المِفْتَاحُ )
  5. شَرِبْتُ كُوبَ . ( مَاءٍ / المَاءُ )
١) الطَّالِبَةِ ٢) النَّوْمِ ٣) كِتَابَ ٤) مِفْتَاحُ ٥) مَاءٍ

5Build a chain of three words.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: كَوِّنْ إِضَافَةً مِنْ ثَلَاثِ كَلِمَاتٍ.

  1. بَاب + بَيْت + جَدِّي ←
  2. مِفْتَاح + سَيَّارَة + أَبِي ←
  3. مُعَلِّم + مَدْرَسَة + أُخْتِي ←
  4. غُرْفَة + صَدِيق + أَخِي ←
١) بَابُ بَيْتِ جَدِّي
٢) مِفْتَاحُ سَيَّارَةِ أَبِي
٣) مُعَلِّمُ مَدْرَسَةِ أُخْتِي
٤) غُرْفَةُ صَدِيقِ أَخِي

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. the teacher's car
  2. My brother's room is big.
  3. Where is the house key?
  4. I drank a cup of tea.
  5. My uncle's house is near the school.
١) سَيَّارَةُ المُعَلِّمِ
٢) غُرْفَةُ أَخِي كَبِيرَةٌ.
٣) أَيْنَ مِفْتَاحُ البَيْتِ؟
٤) شَرِبْتُ كُوبَ شَايٍ.
٥) بَيْتُ عَمِّي قَرِيبٌ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Join the words into an idafa. (5 marks)

  1. قَلَم + المُعَلِّمَة ←
  2. بَاب + الغُرْفَة ←
  3. صُورَة + العَائِلَة ←
  4. كُوب + حَلِيب ←
  5. مَدْرَسَة + أَخِي ←

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أَبِي فِي المُسْتَشْفَى. ( مَكْتَبُ / المَكْتَبُ )
  2. جَلَسْتُ فِي غُرْفَةِ . ( الجُلُوسِ / الجُلُوسُ )
  3. رَأَيْتُ سَيَّارَةَ . ( المُدِيرِ / المُدِيرُ )
  4. يَوْمُ يَوْمُ عُطْلَةٍ. ( السَّبْتِ / السَّبْتُ )
  5. أَكَلْتُ أُمِّي. ( طَعَامَ / الطَّعَامَ )

Question 3 — Write the English meaning. (5 marks)

IdafaEnglish
سَيَّارَةُ جَدِّي
كُرَةُ القَدَمِ
بَابُ بَيْتِ خَالِي
كُوبُ شَايٍ
مُعَلِّمَةُ الفَصْلِ

Question 4 — Write three sentences about things that belong to people in your family. Use an idafa in each one. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) قَلَمُ المُعَلِّمَةِ ٢) بَابُ الغُرْفَةِ ٣) صُورَةُ العَائِلَةِ ٤) كُوبُ حَلِيبٍ ٥) مَدْرَسَةُ أَخِي

Question 2

١) مَكْتَبُ ٢) الجُلُوسِ ٣) المُدِيرِ ٤) السَّبْتِ ٥) طَعَامَ

Question 3

1) my grandfather's car · 2) football · 3) the door of my uncle's house · 4) a cup of tea · 5) the class teacher (f.)

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for a correct idafa: no ال on the first word, kasra on the second.

Grammar · Lesson 10 of 20

الفِعْلُ المَاضِي

The Past Tense

How the past tense is built from a three-letter root, the full table for all twelve pronouns, and how the ending alone tells you who did the action.

In this lesson

  • Find the three-letter root of a verb.
  • Conjugate a regular verb in the past with all twelve pronouns.
  • Recognise the doer from the ending without a pronoun.
  • Use fourteen common past verbs from the vocabulary track.

Words to practise withThe FamilySchool & ClassroomMy DayFood & Drink

أ

The root and the he-form

الجَذْرُ وَصِيغَةُ هُوَ

Most Arabic words grow from a root of three letters. The simplest past verb is the he-form: the three root letters, each with a vowel. Dictionaries list verbs in this form.

Past (he)RootEnglish
كَتَبَك ت بhe wrote
دَرَسَد ر سhe studied
ذَهَبَذ ه بhe went
شَرِبَش ر بhe drank
فَهِمَف ه مhe understood

One root, a family of words

The same three letters appear in nouns too. Once you know the root, new words become easy to guess.

كَتَبَ
he wrote
كِتَاب
book
مَكْتَب
desk, office
مَكْتَبَة
library
ب

The full table: كَتَبَ

تَصْرِيفُ الفِعْلِ المَاضِي

To show who did the action, Arabic adds an ending to the he-form. Read the table down the Ending column — that is all you need to learn.

PronounPastEndingEnglish
One — singular
أَنَاكَتَبْتُـْتُI wrote
أَنْتَكَتَبْتَـْتَyou wrote (m.)
أَنْتِكَتَبْتِـْتِyou wrote (f.)
هُوَكَتَبَـَhe wrote
هِيَكَتَبَتْـَتْshe wrote
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاكَتَبْتُمَاـْتُمَاyou two wrote
هُمَاكَتَبَاـَاthe two of them wrote
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُكَتَبْنَاـْنَاwe wrote
أَنْتُمْكَتَبْتُمْـْتُمْyou wrote (m. pl.)
أَنْتُنَّكَتَبْتُنَّـْتُنَّyou wrote (f. pl.)
هُمْكَتَبُواـُواthey wrote (m.)
هُنَّكَتَبْنَـْنَthey wrote (f.)

Two small notes

The final ا in ـُوا is written but not pronounced. And when هُمَا means two women, the verb is كَتَبَتَا.

كَتَبُوا
they wrote — the alif is written but not pronounced
البِنْتَانِ كَتَبَتَا.
The two girls wrote.
ج

The ending tells you who

النِّهَايَةُ تَدُلُّ عَلَى الفَاعِل

Because the ending already shows the doer, Arabic usually leaves the pronoun out. Use the pronoun only for emphasis.

No pronoun needed

ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
I went to school.
ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.
We went to the masjid.
ذَهَبُوا إِلَى السُّوقِ.
They went to the market.
أَنَا ذَهَبْتُ، وَهُوَ بَقِيَ.
I went, and he stayed. — pronouns for contrast

When the doer is a noun

If the sentence starts with the verb and the doer is a noun, the verb stays in the he or she form, even for a plural.

ذَهَبَ الطُّلَّابُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ.
The students went to the library.
دَخَلَتِ المُعَلِّمَةُ الفَصْلَ.
The teacher (f.) entered the classroom.
د

Common past verbs

أَفْعَالٌ مَاضِيَةٌ شَائِعَة

These verbs come from the vocabulary units. Notice that the middle vowel is not always a — شَرِبَ and فَهِمَ have kasra. Learn each verb with its vowel.

PastEnglishExampleMeaning
ذَهَبَto goذَهَبْتُ إِلَى البَيْتِ.I went home.
رَجَعَto come backرَجَعَ أَبِي مَسَاءً.My father came back in the evening.
دَخَلَto enterدَخَلْنَا الفَصْلَ.We entered the classroom.
خَرَجَto go outخَرَجَتْ أُمِّي.My mother went out.
أَكَلَto eatأَكَلْتُ الفَطُورَ.I ate breakfast.
شَرِبَto drinkشَرِبُوا الحَلِيبَ.They drank the milk.
لَعِبَto playلَعِبْنَا فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.We played in the garden.
فَتَحَto openفَتَحْتُ الشُّبَّاكَ.I opened the window.
جَلَسَto sitجَلَسَتْ بِجَانِبِي.She sat next to me.
سَمِعَto hearسَمِعْنَا الأَذَانَ.We heard the call to prayer.
فَهِمَto understandهَلْ فَهِمْتَ؟Did you understand?
عَمِلَto workعَمِلَ جَدِّي مُعَلِّمًا.My grandfather worked as a teacher.
رَكِبَto ride, to get onرَكِبْتُ الحَافِلَةَ.I got on the bus.
غَسَلَto washغَسَلْتُ يَدَيَّ.I washed my hands.

Saying did not

To say that something did not happen, put مَا before the past verb. You will also meet لَمْ with the present — both are in Grammar 14.

مَا ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السُّوقِ.
I did not go to the market.
هـ

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة

Read these as one short story about yesterday.

  1. أَمْسِ ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ مُبَكِّرًا.
    Yesterday I went to school early.
  2. دَخَلَتِ المُعَلِّمَةُ الفَصْلَ.
    The teacher (f.) entered the classroom.
  3. كَتَبْنَا الدَّرْسَ فِي الدَّفْتَرِ.
    We wrote the lesson in the notebook.
  4. هَلْ فَهِمْتُمُ الدَّرْسَ؟
    Did you (pl.) understand the lesson?
  5. لَعِبَ الأَوْلَادُ فِي المَلْعَبِ.
    The boys played in the playground.
  6. الطَّالِبَاتُ كَتَبْنَ قِصَّةً.
    The students (f.) wrote a story.
  7. سَمِعْنَا الأَذَانَ، فَذَهَبْنَا إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.
    We heard the call to prayer, so we went to the masjid.
  8. رَجَعَ أَبِي مِنَ العَمَلِ مَسَاءً.
    My father came back from work in the evening.
  9. شَرِبَتْ أُخْتِي الحَلِيبَ.
    My sister drank the milk.
  10. هَلْ أَكَلْتُمَا العَشَاءَ؟
    Did you two eat dinner?
  11. رَكِبَ جَدِّي الحَافِلَةَ.
    My grandfather got on the bus.
  12. جَلَسْتُ بِجَانِبِ صَدِيقِي.
    I sat next to my friend.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Who did it? Write the pronoun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ الضَّمِيرَ المُنَاسِب.

VerbPronounVerbPronoun
كَتَبْنَاذَهَبَتْ
شَرِبُوافَهِمْتِ
لَعِبَادَرَسْتُ
كَتَبْنَا: نَحْنُ · شَرِبُوا: هُمْ · لَعِبَا: هُمَا · ذَهَبَتْ: هِيَ · فَهِمْتِ: أَنْتِ · دَرَسْتُ: أَنَا

2Put the verb in the past with the pronoun given.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: صَرِّفِ الفِعْلَ فِي المَاضِي.

  1. أَنَا (دَرَسَ) ←
  2. هِيَ (فَتَحَ) ←
  3. نَحْنُ (جَلَسَ) ←
  4. هُمْ (رَجَعَ) ←
  5. أَنْتِ (سَمِعَ) ←
  6. هُنَّ (كَتَبَ) ←
١) دَرَسْتُ ٢) فَتَحَتْ ٣) جَلَسْنَا ٤) رَجَعُوا ٥) سَمِعْتِ ٦) كَتَبْنَ

3Choose the right form.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أَمْسِ الفَطُورَ مَعَ أُسْرَتِي. ( أَكَلْتُ / أَكَلَتْ )
  2. الأَوْلَادُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ( لَعِبَ / لَعِبُوا )
  3. هَلْ الدَّرْسَ يَا مَرْيَمُ؟ ( فَهِمْتَ / فَهِمْتِ )
  4. أَخِي وَأُخْتِي إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. ( ذَهَبُوا / ذَهَبَا )
  5. المُعَلِّمُ البَابَ. ( فَتَحَ / فَتَحُوا )
١) أَكَلْتُ ٢) لَعِبُوا ٣) فَهِمْتِ ٤) ذَهَبَا ٥) فَتَحَ

4Rewrite the sentence with the new pronoun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: غَيِّرِ الضَّمِيرَ وَأَعِدْ كِتَابَةَ الجُمْلَة.

  1. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السُّوقِ. ← (نَحْنُ)
  2. شَرِبَ الشَّايَ. ← (هِيَ)
  3. رَكِبْنَا الحَافِلَةَ. ← (هُمْ)
  4. دَخَلْتَ الغُرْفَةَ. ← (أَنْتُمْ)
١) ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى السُّوقِ.
٢) شَرِبَتِ الشَّايَ.
٣) رَكِبُوا الحَافِلَةَ.
٤) دَخَلْتُمُ الغُرْفَةَ.

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

Sentence with a mistakeCorrect sentence
أَنَا ذَهَبَ إِلَى البَيْتِ.
أُمِّي طَبَخَ الطَّعَامَ.
نَحْنُ لَعِبُوا كُرَةَ القَدَمِ.
هِيَ كَتَبْتُ الوَاجِبَ.
١) أَنَا ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى البَيْتِ.
٢) أُمِّي طَبَخَتِ الطَّعَامَ.
٣) نَحْنُ لَعِبْنَا كُرَةَ القَدَمِ.
٤) هِيَ كَتَبَتِ الوَاجِبَ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I wrote the homework.
  2. We went to the masjid.
  3. She drank the tea.
  4. They played in the garden.
  5. Did you understand the lesson? (to a boy)
١) كَتَبْتُ الوَاجِبَ.
٢) ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.
٣) شَرِبَتِ الشَّايَ.
٤) لَعِبُوا فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
٥) هَلْ فَهِمْتَ الدَّرْسَ؟
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Complete the past of دَرَسَ. (5 marks)

PronounPast
أَنَا
هِيَ
هُمَا
نَحْنُ
هُمْ

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. نَحْنُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ أَمْسِ. ( ذَهَبْنَا / ذَهَبُوا )
  2. أُخْتِي البَابَ. ( فَتَحَ / فَتَحَتْ )
  3. هَلْ الحَلِيبَ يَا أَوْلَادُ؟ ( شَرِبْتُمْ / شَرِبْتِ )
  4. الطُّلَّابُ الفَصْلَ. ( دَخَلَ / دَخَلْنَا )
  5. أَنْتُنَّ القِصَّةَ. ( كَتَبْتُنَّ / كَتَبْنَ )

Question 3 — Who did it? Write the pronoun. (5 marks)

VerbPronoun
سَمِعْتُ
رَجَعُوا
جَلَسْتِ
أَكَلْنَا
لَعِبَا

Question 4 — Write three sentences about what you did yesterday. (5 marks)

Question 1

أَنَا دَرَسْتُ · هِيَ دَرَسَتْ · هُمَا دَرَسَا · نَحْنُ دَرَسْنَا · هُمْ دَرَسُوا

Question 2

١) ذَهَبْنَا ٢) فَتَحَتْ ٣) شَرِبْتُمْ ٤) دَخَلَ ٥) كَتَبْتُنَّ

Question 3

١) أَنَا ٢) هُمْ ٣) أَنْتِ ٤) نَحْنُ ٥) هُمَا

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct past endings and vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 11 of 20

الفِعْلُ المُضَارِع

The Present Tense

The present tense wraps the verb in a prefix and sometimes a suffix. Learn the four prefixes, the four suffixes, the full table of يَكْتُبُ, and what the present means.

In this lesson

  • Know the four prefixes أَ نَ يَ تَ and what each one means.
  • Add the endings ـِينَ, ـَانِ, ـُونَ and ـْنَ.
  • Conjugate a regular verb in the present with all twelve pronouns.
  • Use the present for now and for habits.

Words to practise withMy DaySchool & ClassroomFood & DrinkHobbies & Sport

أ

Prefixes and suffixes

حُرُوفُ المُضَارَعَةِ وَاللَّوَاحِق

The past tense uses endings. The present tense puts a letter in front of the verb, and some persons add an ending as well. Every present verb starts with one of four letters.

PieceWhoExample
Prefixes — at the start
أَـIأَكْتُبُ
نَـweنَكْتُبُ
يَـhe, theyيَكْتُبُ
تَـyou, sheتَكْتُبُ
Suffixes — at the end
ـِينَyou (one woman)تَكْتُبِينَ
ـَانِtwo peopleيَكْتُبَانِ
ـُونَyou, they (men or mixed)يَكْتُبُونَ
ـْنَyou, they (women only)يَكْتُبْنَ

تَـ has two jobs

تَكْتُبُ can mean you write (to a man) or she writes. The rest of the sentence tells you which.

أَنْتَ تَكْتُبُ.
You write.
هِيَ تَكْتُبُ.
She writes.
ب

The full table: يَكْتُبُ

تَصْرِيفُ الفِعْلِ المُضَارِع
PronounPresentEnglish
One — singular
أَنَاأَكْتُبُI write
أَنْتَتَكْتُبُyou write (m.)
أَنْتِتَكْتُبِينَyou write (f.)
هُوَيَكْتُبُhe writes
هِيَتَكْتُبُshe writes
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاتَكْتُبَانِyou two write
هُمَايَكْتُبَانِthe two of them write
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُنَكْتُبُwe write
أَنْتُمْتَكْتُبُونَyou write (m. pl.)
أَنْتُنَّتَكْتُبْنَyou write (f. pl.)
هُمْيَكْتُبُونَthey write (m.)
هُنَّيَكْتُبْنَthey write (f.)

Two women

When هُمَا means two women, the verb starts with تَـ: تَكْتُبَانِ.

البِنْتَانِ تَكْتُبَانِ.
The two girls are writing.
ج

The middle vowel

حَرَكَةُ عَيْنِ المُضَارِع

In the present the middle root letter can take damma, fatha or kasra. There is no rule a beginner can use, so always learn a verb as a pair: past and present together.

PastPresentMiddle vowelEnglish
كَتَبَيَكْتُبُuto write
دَرَسَيَدْرُسُuto study
دَخَلَيَدْخُلُuto enter
فَتَحَيَفْتَحُato open
ذَهَبَيَذْهَبُato go
شَرِبَيَشْرَبُato drink
لَعِبَيَلْعَبُato play
جَلَسَيَجْلِسُito sit
رَجَعَيَرْجِعُito come back
غَسَلَيَغْسِلُito wash

Four-letter verbs start with u

Verbs with four letters in the past, like سَاعَدَ and نَظَّفَ, take damma on the prefix: يُـ, أُـ, تُـ, نُـ.

أُسَاعِدُ أُمِّي.
I help my mother.
نُنَظِّفُ الفَصْلَ.
We clean the classroom.
يُرْسِلُ رِسَالَةً.
He sends a message.
د

What the present means

مَعْنَى المُضَارِع

One Arabic present covers two English tenses: what is happening now (I am writing) and what happens regularly (I write every day). Time words make the meaning clear.

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
الآنَnowكُلَّ يَوْمٍevery day
دَائِمًاalwaysعَادَةًusually
أَحْيَانًاsometimesصَبَاحًاin the morning

Now or every day?

أَكْتُبُ الوَاجِبَ الآنَ.
I am writing the homework now.
أَكْتُبُ الوَاجِبَ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
I write the homework every day.

Saying not

Put لَا before a present verb to make it negative. More in Grammar 14.

لَا أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ.
I do not drink coffee.
هـ

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
    I go to school every day.
  2. تَشْرَبُ أُمِّي الشَّايَ صَبَاحًا.
    My mother drinks tea in the morning.
  3. نَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ.
    We play football on Saturday.
  4. يَعْمَلُ أَبِي فِي المُسْتَشْفَى.
    My father works at the hospital.
  5. هَلْ تَسْكُنِينَ قَرِيبًا مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ؟
    Do you (f.) live near the school?
  6. الطُّلَّابُ يَكْتُبُونَ الدَّرْسَ الآنَ.
    The students are writing the lesson now.
  7. أَخَوَايَ يَدْرُسَانِ فِي الجَامِعَةِ.
    My two brothers study at university.
  8. الطَّالِبَاتُ يَقْرَأْنَ القِصَّةَ.
    The students (f.) are reading the story.
  9. أُسَاعِدُ أُمِّي فِي المَطْبَخِ.
    I help my mother in the kitchen.
  10. يَفْتَحُ المُعَلِّمُ البَابَ.
    The teacher opens the door.
  11. أَنْتُمْ تَتَعَلَّمُونَ العَرَبِيَّةَ.
    You (pl.) are learning Arabic.
  12. أَحْيَانًا نَأْكُلُ فِي المَطْعَمِ.
    Sometimes we eat at a restaurant.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Who is it? Write the pronoun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ الضَّمِيرَ المُنَاسِب.

VerbPronounVerbPronoun
نَشْرَبُتَلْعَبِينَ
أَدْرُسُيَجْلِسُونَ
يَذْهَبَانِيَكْتُبْنَ
نَشْرَبُ: نَحْنُ · أَدْرُسُ: أَنَا · يَذْهَبَانِ: هُمَا · تَلْعَبِينَ: أَنْتِ · يَجْلِسُونَ: هُمْ · يَكْتُبْنَ: هُنَّ

2Put the verb in the present with the pronoun given.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: صَرِّفِ الفِعْلَ فِي المُضَارِع.

  1. أَنَا (يَفْتَحُ) ←
  2. نَحْنُ (يَدْرُسُ) ←
  3. أَنْتِ (يَجْلِسُ) ←
  4. هُمْ (يَلْعَبُ) ←
  5. هُمَا (يَشْرَبُ) ←
  6. هِيَ (يَرْجِعُ) ←
١) أَفْتَحُ ٢) نَدْرُسُ ٣) تَجْلِسِينَ ٤) يَلْعَبُونَ ٥) يَشْرَبَانِ ٦) تَرْجِعُ

3Choose the right form.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. أُخْتِي فِي المَكْتَبَةِ. ( يَدْرُسُ / تَدْرُسُ )
  2. يَا فَاطِمَةُ، هَلْ الشَّايَ؟ ( تَشْرَبِينَ / تَشْرَبُ )
  3. الأَوْلَادُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ( يَلْعَبُونَ / يَلْعَبُ )
  4. نَحْنُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ. ( يَذْهَبُ / نَذْهَبُ )
  5. أَنَا أَبِي فِي العَمَلِ. ( أُسَاعِدُ / يُسَاعِدُ )
١) تَدْرُسُ ٢) تَشْرَبِينَ ٣) يَلْعَبُونَ ٤) نَذْهَبُ ٥) أُسَاعِدُ

4Change the past to the present.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: حَوِّلْ مِنَ المَاضِي إِلَى المُضَارِع.

  1. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السُّوقِ. ←
  2. شَرِبَتِ الحَلِيبَ. ←
  3. لَعِبْنَا كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ. ←
  4. جَلَسُوا فِي الفَصْلِ. ←
١) أَذْهَبُ إِلَى السُّوقِ.
٢) تَشْرَبُ الحَلِيبَ.
٣) نَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ.
٤) يَجْلِسُونَ فِي الفَصْلِ.

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

Sentence with a mistakeCorrect sentence
أَنَا يَكْتُبُ الدَّرْسَ.
أُمِّي يَطْبُخُ الطَّعَامَ.
هُمْ يَدْرُسُ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
أَنْتِ تَذْهَبُ إِلَى البَيْتِ.
١) أَنَا أَكْتُبُ الدَّرْسَ.
٢) أُمِّي تَطْبُخُ الطَّعَامَ.
٣) هُمْ يَدْرُسُونَ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
٤) أَنْتِ تَذْهَبِينَ إِلَى البَيْتِ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I study Arabic.
  2. My father works every day.
  3. We are playing in the garden now.
  4. Do you drink milk? (to a girl)
  5. They go to the masjid on Friday.
١) أَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ.
٢) يَعْمَلُ أَبِي كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
٣) نَلْعَبُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ الآنَ.
٤) هَلْ تَشْرَبِينَ الحَلِيبَ؟
٥) يَذْهَبُونَ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Complete the present of يَفْتَحُ. (5 marks)

PronounPresent
أَنَا
أَنْتِ
هُمَا
نَحْنُ
هُمْ

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أَبِي الجَرِيدَةَ. ( يَقْرَأُ / تَقْرَأُ )
  2. أَنْتُمْ فِي الفَصْلِ. ( تَجْلِسُونَ / يَجْلِسُونَ )
  3. الطَّالِبَتَانِ . ( تَكْتُبَانِ / يَكْتُبُونَ )
  4. أَنَا أُمِّي. ( أُسَاعِدُ / نُسَاعِدُ )
  5. هِيَ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ ظُهْرًا. ( تَرْجِعُ / يَرْجِعُ )

Question 3 — Write the present form of each past verb (he). (5 marks)

  1. كَتَبَ ←
  2. شَرِبَ ←
  3. جَلَسَ ←
  4. دَخَلَ ←
  5. لَعِبَ ←

Question 4 — Write three sentences about what you usually do on a school day. (5 marks)

Question 1

أَنَا أَفْتَحُ · أَنْتِ تَفْتَحِينَ · هُمَا يَفْتَحَانِ · نَحْنُ نَفْتَحُ · هُمْ يَفْتَحُونَ

Question 2

١) يَقْرَأُ ٢) تَجْلِسُونَ ٣) تَكْتُبَانِ ٤) أُسَاعِدُ ٥) تَرْجِعُ

Question 3

١) يَكْتُبُ ٢) يَشْرَبُ ٣) يَجْلِسُ ٤) يَدْخُلُ ٥) يَلْعَبُ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct prefixes, endings and vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 12 of 20

المُسْتَقْبَل

The Future

Talking about tomorrow is easy in Arabic: put سَـ or سَوْفَ before the present verb. Learn the time words for the future, plan a weekend, and say what will not happen.

In this lesson

  • Make the future with سَـ and سَوْفَ.
  • Conjugate a verb in the future with all twelve pronouns.
  • Use time words like tomorrow, next week and in a little while.
  • Say will not with لَنْ.

Words to practise withNumbers & TimeTransport & TravelMy DayHobbies & Sport

أ

سَـ + present = future

السِّينُ + المُضَارِع

Take any present verb from Grammar 11 and join سَـ to the front. Nothing else changes. سَـ is always written attached to the verb.

PresentFutureEnglish
أَذْهَبُسَأَذْهَبُI will go
نَدْرُسُسَنَدْرُسُwe will study
يَلْعَبُسَيَلْعَبُhe will play
تَطْبُخُسَتَطْبُخُshe will cook
يُسَافِرُونَسَيُسَافِرُونَthey will travel
ب

سَوْفَ — the longer form

سَوْفَ

سَوْفَ means exactly the same as سَـ but is a separate word. It often feels a little further away or more formal. Both are correct.

Same meaning, two forms

سَأَزُورُ جَدِّي.
I will visit my grandfather.
سَوْفَ أَزُورُ جَدِّي.
I will visit my grandfather.
سَوْفَ أَدْرُسُ الطِّبَّ.
I will study medicine.
ج

The full table

تَصْرِيفُ المُسْتَقْبَل

Here is سَيَذْهَبُ (he will go) with all twelve pronouns. It is simply the present table from Grammar 11 with سَـ in front.

PronounFutureEnglish
One — singular
أَنَاسَأَذْهَبُI will go
أَنْتَسَتَذْهَبُyou will go (m.)
أَنْتِسَتَذْهَبِينَyou will go (f.)
هُوَسَيَذْهَبُhe will go
هِيَسَتَذْهَبُshe will go
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاسَتَذْهَبَانِyou two will go
هُمَاسَيَذْهَبَانِthe two of them will go
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُسَنَذْهَبُwe will go
أَنْتُمْسَتَذْهَبُونَyou will go (m. pl.)
أَنْتُنَّسَتَذْهَبْنَyou will go (f. pl.)
هُمْسَيَذْهَبُونَthey will go (m.)
هُنَّسَيَذْهَبْنَthey will go (f.)
د

Words for the future

كَلِمَاتُ المُسْتَقْبَل

Put the time word at the start or the end of the sentence.

ArabicEnglishArabicEnglish
غَدًاtomorrowبَعْدَ غَدٍthe day after tomorrow
صَبَاحَ الغَدِtomorrow morningهَذَا المَسَاءَthis evening
الأُسْبُوعَ القَادِمَnext weekالشَّهْرَ القَادِمَnext month
السَّنَةَ القَادِمَةَnext yearبَعْدَ قَلِيلٍin a little while
فِي المُسْتَقْبَلِin the futureقَرِيبًاsoon

Do not mix times

A future verb never goes with أَمْسِ (yesterday). Match the time word to the tense.

ذَهَبْتُ أَمْسِ.
I went yesterday.
سَأَذْهَبُ غَدًا.
I will go tomorrow.
هـ

My plan and will not

خُطَّتِي وَالنَّفْيُ بِـ لَنْ

To say something will not happen, use لَنْ instead of سَـ and change the last vowel of the verb to fatha. Never use لَنْ and سَـ together. The full story is in Grammar 14 and Grammar 20.

WillWill notEnglish
سَأَذْهَبُلَنْ أَذْهَبَI will not go
سَنَتَأَخَّرُلَنْ نَتَأَخَّرَwe will not be late
سَيَلْعَبُلَنْ يَلْعَبَhe will not play
سَيَذْهَبُونَلَنْ يَذْهَبُواthey will not go

ـُونَ becomes ـُوا

After لَنْ the endings ـُونَ and ـِينَ lose their ن: يَذْهَبُونَ → لَنْ يَذْهَبُوا, تَذْهَبِينَ → لَنْ تَذْهَبِي.

My weekend plan

سَلْمَى: مَاذَا سَتَفْعَلِينَ يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ؟
Salma: What will you do on Saturday?
نُورَة: سَأَزُورُ جَدَّتِي، ثُمَّ سَأَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ.
Noura: I will visit my grandmother, then I will go to the library.
سَلْمَى: وَيَوْمَ الأَحَدِ؟
Salma: And on Sunday?
نُورَة: سَنُسَافِرُ إِلَى البَحْرِ، لَكِنَّنَا لَنْ نَبْقَى طَوِيلًا.
Noura: We will travel to the sea, but we will not stay long.
سَلْمَى: سَيَكُونُ يَوْمًا جَمِيلًا إِنْ شَاءَ اللهُ.
Salma: It will be a beautiful day, God willing.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. سَأَزُورُ جَدَّتِي غَدًا.
    I will visit my grandmother tomorrow.
  2. سَنُسَافِرُ إِلَى مِصْرَ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
    We will travel to Egypt in the summer.
  3. سَيَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ بَعْدَ قَلِيلٍ.
    The lesson will start in a little while.
  4. سَتَطْبُخُ أُمِّي الأُرْزَ هَذَا المَسَاءَ.
    My mother will cook rice this evening.
  5. سَنَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ.
    We will play football on Saturday.
  6. هَلْ سَتَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ؟
    Will you go to the masjid on Friday?
  7. سَيَشْتَرِي أَبِي سَيَّارَةً جَدِيدَةً.
    My father will buy a new car.
  8. سَوْفَ أَعْمَلُ مُهَنْدِسًا فِي المُسْتَقْبَلِ.
    I will work as an engineer in the future.
  9. سَتَدْرُسُ أُخْتِي فِي الجَامِعَةِ السَّنَةَ القَادِمَةَ.
    My sister will study at university next year.
  10. سَيَكُونُ الطَّقْسُ بَارِدًا غَدًا.
    The weather will be cold tomorrow.
  11. لَنْ أَتَأَخَّرَ غَدًا.
    I will not be late tomorrow.
  12. لَنْ نَذْهَبَ إِلَى السُّوقِ اليَوْمَ.
    We will not go to the market today.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Make each verb future with سَـ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: حَوِّلْ إِلَى المُسْتَقْبَلِ بِالسِّين.

  1. أَكْتُبُ ←
  2. نَلْعَبُ ←
  3. تَشْرَبِينَ ←
  4. يَرْجِعُونَ ←
  5. تُسَافِرُ ←
١) سَأَكْتُبُ ٢) سَنَلْعَبُ ٣) سَتَشْرَبِينَ ٤) سَيَرْجِعُونَ ٥) سَتُسَافِرُ

2Choose the time word that fits.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اخْتَرْ كَلِمَةَ الوَقْتِ المُنَاسِبَة.

  1. سَأَزُورُ خَالِي . ( أَمْسِ / غَدًا )
  2. ذَهَبْنَا إِلَى البَحْرِ . ( أَمْسِ / الأُسْبُوعَ القَادِمَ )
  3. سَيَبْدَأُ الاخْتِبَارُ . ( بَعْدَ قَلِيلٍ / أَمْسِ )
  4. سَتُسَافِرُ عَائِلَتِي . ( الشَّهْرَ القَادِمَ / الشَّهْرَ المَاضِيَ )
١) غَدًا ٢) أَمْسِ ٣) بَعْدَ قَلِيلٍ ٤) الشَّهْرَ القَادِمَ

3Put the verb in the future with the pronoun given.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: صَرِّفِ الفِعْلَ فِي المُسْتَقْبَل.

  1. أَنَا (يَدْرُسُ) ←
  2. هِيَ (يَطْبُخُ) ←
  3. نَحْنُ (يَذْهَبُ) ←
  4. أَنْتُمْ (يَلْعَبُ) ←
  5. هُمَا (يَرْجِعُ) ←
١) سَأَدْرُسُ ٢) سَتَطْبُخُ ٣) سَنَذْهَبُ ٤) سَتَلْعَبُونَ ٥) سَيَرْجِعَانِ

4Make the sentence negative with لَنْ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: انْفِ الجُمْلَةَ بِـ لَنْ.

  1. سَأَذْهَبُ إِلَى السُّوقِ. ←
  2. سَنَلْعَبُ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ←
  3. سَيَتَأَخَّرُ أَخِي. ←
  4. سَيُسَافِرُونَ غَدًا. ←
١) لَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلَى السُّوقِ.
٢) لَنْ نَلْعَبَ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
٣) لَنْ يَتَأَخَّرَ أَخِي.
٤) لَنْ يُسَافِرُوا غَدًا.

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

Sentence with a mistakeCorrect sentence
سَأَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ أَمْسِ.
لَنْ سَأَلْعَبُ اليَوْمَ.
سَ نَدْرُسُ غَدًا.
لَنْ أَذْهَبُ إِلَى البَحْرِ.
١) سَأَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ غَدًا. أَوْ ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ أَمْسِ.
٢) لَنْ أَلْعَبَ اليَوْمَ.
٣) سَنَدْرُسُ غَدًا.
٤) لَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلَى البَحْرِ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I will study tomorrow.
  2. We will travel next week.
  3. My mother will cook this evening.
  4. Will you go to the library? (to a boy)
  5. I will not be late.
١) سَأَدْرُسُ غَدًا.
٢) سَنُسَافِرُ الأُسْبُوعَ القَادِمَ.
٣) سَتَطْبُخُ أُمِّي هَذَا المَسَاءَ.
٤) هَلْ سَتَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ؟
٥) لَنْ أَتَأَخَّرَ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the future with سَـ. (5 marks)

  1. أَلْعَبُ ←
  2. تَذْهَبُ ←
  3. نَأْكُلُ ←
  4. يَدْرُسُونَ ←
  5. تَكْتُبِينَ ←

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. جَدِّي غَدًا. ( زُرْتُ / سَأَزُورُ )
  2. لَنْ إِلَى السُّوقِ. ( أَذْهَبَ / أَذْهَبُ )
  3. سَيُسَافِرُ عَمِّي . ( أَمْسِ / الأُسْبُوعَ القَادِمَ )
  4. هُمْ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ. ( سَيَلْعَبُونَ / سَيَلْعَبُ )
  5. لَنْ اليَوْمَ. ( يَتَأَخَّرُوا / يَتَأَخَّرُونَ )

Question 3 — Make the sentence negative with لَنْ. (5 marks)

  1. سَأَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ. ←
  2. سَتَلْعَبُ أُخْتِي. ←
  3. سَنَرْجِعُ مُبَكِّرًا. ←
  4. سَيَدْرُسُ الطِّبَّ. ←
  5. سَأَتَأَخَّرُ. ←

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your plans for next week. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) سَأَلْعَبُ ٢) سَتَذْهَبُ ٣) سَنَأْكُلُ ٤) سَيَدْرُسُونَ ٥) سَتَكْتُبِينَ

Question 2

١) سَأَزُورُ ٢) أَذْهَبَ ٣) الأُسْبُوعَ القَادِمَ ٤) سَيَلْعَبُونَ ٥) يَتَأَخَّرُوا

Question 3

١) لَنْ أَشْرَبَ القَهْوَةَ. ٢) لَنْ تَلْعَبَ أُخْتِي. ٣) لَنْ نَرْجِعَ مُبَكِّرًا.
٤) لَنْ يَدْرُسَ الطِّبَّ. ٥) لَنْ أَتَأَخَّرَ.

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for correct future forms and time words.

Grammar · Lesson 13 of 20

الأَمْرُ وَالنَّهْي

Commands & Prohibitions

Tell someone to do something — and not to do it. Build the command from the present tense in three small steps, then make it polite.

In this lesson

  • Build the command form from the present tense.
  • Choose the right helping vowel: اُ or اِ.
  • Use the five command forms for a man, a woman, two people and a group.
  • Say don't with لَا + the present, and make any instruction polite.

Words to practise withThe HomeSchool & ClassroomFood & Drink

أ

From the present to the command

مِنَ المُضَارِعِ إِلَى الأَمْر

Start from the you form of the present tense (Grammar 11). Three steps turn it into a command.

Three steps

1. Take the present for you (a man): تَكْتُبُ.

2. Remove the تَـ at the front and put a sukun on the last letter: كْتُبْ.

3. A word cannot start with a sukun, so add a helping vowel in front. If the middle letter has u (ـُـ), the helping vowel is اُ. Otherwise it is اِ.

تَكْتُبُ ← اُكْتُبْ
you write → write!
تَجْلِسُ ← اِجْلِسْ
you sit → sit!
تَفْتَحُ ← اِفْتَحْ
you open → open!
PresentMiddle vowelCommandEnglish
تَكْتُبُuاُكْتُبْwrite!
تَدْرُسُuاُدْرُسْstudy!
تَدْخُلُuاُدْخُلْcome in!
تَنْظُرُuاُنْظُرْlook!
تَجْلِسُiاِجْلِسْsit down!
تَغْسِلُiاِغْسِلْwash!
تَفْتَحُaاِفْتَحْopen!
تَشْرَبُaاِشْرَبْdrink!
تَلْعَبُaاِلْعَبْplay!
تَسْمَعُaاِسْمَعْlisten!
ب

Five forms for five listeners

الأَمْرُ مَعَ الضَّمَائِر

The command changes with the person you are speaking to. The endings are the present endings without the final نَ or نِ — except أَنْتُنَّ, which keeps its نَ (تَكْتُبْنَ → اُكْتُبْنَ).

PronounPresentCommandEnglish
One — singular
أَنْتَتَكْتُبُاُكْتُبْwrite! (to a man)
أَنْتِتَكْتُبِينَاُكْتُبِيwrite! (to a woman)
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاتَكْتُبَانِاُكْتُبَاwrite! (to two people)
Three or more — plural
أَنْتُمْتَكْتُبُونَاُكْتُبُواwrite! (to a group)
أَنْتُنَّتَكْتُبْنَاُكْتُبْنَwrite! (to women only)

The same pattern with اِجْلِسْ

اِجْلِسْ · اِجْلِسِي
sit! — to a man, to a woman
اِجْلِسَا
sit! — to two people
اِجْلِسُوا · اِجْلِسْنَ
sit! — to a group, to women only

Watch the joining vowel

When the next word starts with ال, a command that ends in sukun takes a kasra to join the words smoothly.

اِفْتَحِ البَابَ.
Open the door.
اُكْتُبِ الدَّرْسَ.
Write the lesson.
ج

Verbs that need no helping vowel

أَفْعَالٌ بِلَا هَمْزَةٍ فِي أَوَّلِهَا

Some verbs have a vowel straight after the تُـ of the present. Remove the تُـ and the command is ready — no helping vowel. Verbs like أَرْسَلَ and أَغْلَقَ take أَ at the front.

PresentCommandEnglish
تُرَتِّبُرَتِّبْtidy up!
تُنَظِّفُنَظِّفْclean!
تُسَاعِدُسَاعِدْhelp!
تُشَاهِدُشَاهِدْwatch!
تَتَكَلَّمُتَكَلَّمْspeak!
تُرْسِلُأَرْسِلْsend!
تُغْلِقُأَغْلِقْclose!

Four short everyday commands

These common verbs are irregular. Learn them as words.

كُلْ
eat!
خُذْ
take!
قُلْ
say!
تَعَالَ
come here!
د

Don't! — the prohibition

النَّهْيُ: لَا تَفْعَلْ

To tell someone not to do something, do not use the command. Use لَا + the present tense with a sukun on the last letter. The endings ـِينَ، ـَانِ، ـُونَ lose their نَ, exactly as in the command.

PronounCommandProhibitionEnglish
One — singular
أَنْتَاُكْتُبْلَا تَكْتُبْdon't write! (to a man)
أَنْتِاُكْتُبِيلَا تَكْتُبِيdon't write! (to a woman)
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَااُكْتُبَالَا تَكْتُبَاdon't write! (to two)
Three or more — plural
أَنْتُمْاُكْتُبُوالَا تَكْتُبُواdon't write! (to a group)
أَنْتُنَّاُكْتُبْنَلَا تَكْتُبْنَdon't write! (to women only)

Rules you will hear every day

لَا تَأْكُلْ فِي الفَصْلِ.
Don't eat in the classroom.
لَا تَرْكُضُوا فِي المَمَرِّ.
Don't run in the hallway.
لَا تَفْتَحِي الشُّبَّاكَ.
Don't open the window.
لَا تَتَأَخَّرْ.
Don't be late.
هـ

Being polite

الأَدَبُ فِي الطَّلَب

A bare command can sound sharp. Add مِنْ فَضْلِكَ (please) — its ending changes with the listener, like any possessive (Grammar 2).

ArabicSaid to
مِنْ فَضْلِكَa man
مِنْ فَضْلِكِa woman
مِنْ فَضْلِكُمَاtwo people
مِنْ فَضْلِكُمْa group

Polite requests at home and at school

أَغْلِقِ البَابَ، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
Close the door, please.
أَعْطِنِي القَلَمَ، مِنْ فَضْلِكِ.
Give me the pen, please.
اِجْلِسُوا، مِنْ فَضْلِكُمْ.
Sit down, please.
لَوْ سَمَحْتَ، أَيْنَ المَكْتَبَةُ؟
Excuse me, where is the library?
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. اُكْتُبِ اسْمَكَ عَلَى الوَرَقَةِ.
    Write your name on the paper.
  2. اِجْلِسِي بِجَانِبِ أُخْتِكِ.
    Sit next to your sister.
  3. اِشْرَبِ المَاءَ، الجَوُّ حَارٌّ.
    Drink the water — it is hot.
  4. اِفْتَحُوا كُتُبَكُمْ عَلَى الصَّفْحَةِ العَاشِرَةِ.
    Open your books at page ten.
  5. رَتِّبْ غُرْفَتَكَ قَبْلَ النَّوْمِ.
    Tidy your room before bed.
  6. سَاعِدَا أُمَّكُمَا فِي المَطْبَخِ.
    You two, help your mother in the kitchen.
  7. أَرْسِلْ لِي رِسَالَةً، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.
    Send me a message, please.
  8. تَعَالَ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ مُبَكِّرًا.
    Come to the masjid early.
  9. لَا تَأْكُلْ فِي الفَصْلِ.
    Don't eat in the classroom.
  10. لَا تَتَأَخَّرُوا عَنِ الصَّلَاةِ.
    Don't be late for the prayer.
  11. لَا تَلْعَبِي بِالهَاتِفِ فِي الدَّرْسِ.
    Don't play with the phone in the lesson.
  12. اُنْظُرُوا إِلَى السَّبُّورَةِ، وَاسْمَعُوا جَيِّدًا.
    Look at the board, and listen carefully.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the command for a man.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبْ فِعْلَ الأَمْرِ لِلْمُذَكَّر.

  1. تَكْتُبُ ←
  2. تَشْرَبُ ←
  3. تَدْخُلُ ←
  4. تَسْمَعُ ←
  5. تَخْرُجُ ←
  6. تَلْبَسُ ←
١) اُكْتُبْ ٢) اِشْرَبْ ٣) اُدْخُلْ ٤) اِسْمَعْ ٥) اُخْرُجْ ٦) اِلْبَسْ

2Choose the right form for the listener.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اخْتَرِ الصِّيغَةَ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. يَا مَرْيَمُ، البَابَ. ( اِفْتَحْ / اِفْتَحِي )
  2. يَا أَحْمَدُ، هُنَا. ( اِجْلِسْ / اِجْلِسُوا )
  3. يَا طُلَّابُ، جَيِّدًا. ( اِسْمَعُوا / اِسْمَعِي )
  4. يَا عَلِيُّ وَيَا يُوسُفُ، أَبَاكُمَا. ( سَاعِدَا / سَاعِدْ )
  5. يَا بَنَاتُ، الدَّرْسَ. ( اُكْتُبْنَ / اُكْتُبُوا )
١) اِفْتَحِي ٢) اِجْلِسْ ٣) اِسْمَعُوا ٤) سَاعِدَا ٥) اُكْتُبْنَ

3Turn each command into a prohibition.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: حَوِّلِ الأَمْرَ إِلَى نَهْيٍ.

  1. اِجْلِسْ هُنَا. ←
  2. اِفْتَحِي الشُّبَّاكَ. ←
  3. اُخْرُجُوا الآنَ. ←
  4. اِشْرَبْ هَذَا. ←
  5. أَغْلِقِ البَابَ. ←
١) لَا تَجْلِسْ هُنَا.
٢) لَا تَفْتَحِي الشُّبَّاكَ.
٣) لَا تَخْرُجُوا الآنَ.
٤) لَا تَشْرَبْ هَذَا.
٥) لَا تُغْلِقِ البَابَ.

4Complete the table.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: أَكْمِلِ الجَدْوَل.

Pronounدَرَسَ — studyلَعِبَ — play
أَنْتَاُدْرُسْ
أَنْتِاِلْعَبِي
أَنْتُمَا
أَنْتُمْاُدْرُسُوا
أَنْتَ: اِلْعَبْ · أَنْتِ: اُدْرُسِي · أَنْتُمَا: اُدْرُسَا — اِلْعَبَا · أَنْتُمْ: اِلْعَبُوا

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. يَا فَاطِمَةُ، اِجْلِسْ هُنَا. ←
  2. يَا طُلَّابُ، اُكْتُبْ أَسْمَاءَكُمْ. ←
  3. لَا تَأْكُلُ فِي الفَصْلِ. ←
  4. اِنْظُرْ إِلَى السَّبُّورَةِ. ←
  5. يَا أَبِي، أَرْسَلَ لِي رِسَالَةً. ←
١) يَا فَاطِمَةُ، اِجْلِسِي هُنَا.
٢) يَا طُلَّابُ، اُكْتُبُوا أَسْمَاءَكُمْ.
٣) لَا تَأْكُلْ فِي الفَصْلِ.
٤) اُنْظُرْ إِلَى السَّبُّورَةِ.
٥) يَا أَبِي، أَرْسِلْ لِي رِسَالَةً.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. Sit down, please. (to a girl)
  2. Open your books. (to a class)
  3. Don't be late. (to a boy)
  4. Drink the water. (to a man)
  5. Help your mother. (to a boy)
١) اِجْلِسِي، مِنْ فَضْلِكِ.
٢) اِفْتَحُوا كُتُبَكُمْ.
٣) لَا تَتَأَخَّرْ.
٤) اِشْرَبِ المَاءَ.
٥) سَاعِدْ أُمَّكَ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the command for a man. (5 marks)

  1. تَفْتَحُ ←
  2. تَكْتُبُ ←
  3. تَجْلِسُ ←
  4. تُنَظِّفُ ←
  5. تُرْسِلُ ←

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. يَا سَارَةُ، الوَاجِبَ. ( اُكْتُبْ / اُكْتُبِي / اُكْتُبُوا )
  2. يَا أَوْلَادُ، فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ( اِلْعَبْ / اِلْعَبُوا / اِلْعَبِي )
  3. لَا فِي المَمَرِّ يَا عُمَرُ. ( تَرْكُضُونَ / تَرْكُضْ / اُرْكُضْ )
  4. يَا خَالِدُ، غُرْفَتَكَ. ( رَتِّبْ / تُرَتِّبُ / رَتَّبَ )
  5. يَا أُخْتَيَّ، أُمَّكُمَا. ( سَاعِدْ / سَاعِدَا / سَاعِدِي )

Question 3 — Make each command negative. (5 marks)

  1. اُخْرُجْ. ←
  2. اِفْتَحِي. ←
  3. اِلْعَبُوا. ←
  4. اِجْلِسَا. ←
  5. اِشْرَبْ. ←

Question 4 — Write three classroom rules: two with don't and one polite request. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) اِفْتَحْ ٢) اُكْتُبْ ٣) اِجْلِسْ ٤) نَظِّفْ ٥) أَرْسِلْ

Question 2

١) اُكْتُبِي ٢) اِلْعَبُوا ٣) تَرْكُضْ ٤) رَتِّبْ ٥) سَاعِدَا

Question 3

١) لَا تَخْرُجْ. ٢) لَا تَفْتَحِي. ٣) لَا تَلْعَبُوا. ٤) لَا تَجْلِسَا. ٥) لَا تَشْرَبْ.

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for accurate endings and vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 14 of 20

النَّفْي

Saying No: Negation

Arabic has a different word for not depending on what you negate: a sentence with no verb, the present, the past, the future or a command. One table shows them all.

In this lesson

  • Choose the right negative word for each kind of sentence.
  • Use لَيْسَ with every pronoun and put its predicate in the accusative.
  • Say did not with مَا or لَمْ, and will not with لَنْ.
  • Notice the small ending changes after لَمْ and لَنْ.

Words to practise withFood & DrinkThe Body & HealthMy Day

أ

Which not goes with what?

أَدَوَاتُ النَّفْي

English uses not for everything. Arabic picks the word by the kind of sentence. Keep this table — the rest of the lesson explains each line.

NegativeUsed withExampleEnglish
لَيْسَa sentence with no verbالجَوُّ لَيْسَ بَارِدًا.The weather is not cold.
لَاthe present tenseلَا أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ.I don't drink coffee.
مَاthe past tenseمَا ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السُّوقِ.I did not go to the market.
لَمْthe present with sukun — past meaningلَمْ أَذْهَبْ إِلَى السُّوقِ.I did not go to the market.
لَنْthe present with fatha — future meaningلَنْ أَتَأَخَّرَ غَدًا.I will not be late tomorrow.
لَاa command (don't)لَا تَتَأَخَّرْ.Don't be late.
ب

لَيْسَ — is not, are not

لَيْسَ

لَيْسَ looks like a past-tense verb and changes with the pronoun, but it means is not right now. The word after it — the predicate — takes the accusative ending (ـًا، ـَةً).

PronounلَيْسَExampleEnglish
One — singular
أَنَالَسْتُأَنَا لَسْتُ جَائِعًا.I am not hungry.
أَنْتَلَسْتَأَنْتَ لَسْتَ مُتَأَخِّرًا.You are not late.
أَنْتِلَسْتِأَنْتِ لَسْتِ مَرِيضَةً.You are not ill.
هُوَلَيْسَهُوَ لَيْسَ طَوِيلًا.He is not tall.
هِيَلَيْسَتْهِيَ لَيْسَتْ مُعَلِّمَةً.She is not a teacher.
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَالَسْتُمَاأَنْتُمَا لَسْتُمَا أَخَوَيْنِ.You two are not brothers.
هُمَالَيْسَاهُمَا لَيْسَا فِي الفَصْلِ.The two of them are not in class.
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُلَسْنَانَحْنُ لَسْنَا مُتْعَبِينَ.We are not tired.
أَنْتُمْلَسْتُمْأَنْتُمْ لَسْتُمْ صِغَارًا.You are not little.
أَنْتُنَّلَسْتُنَّأَنْتُنَّ لَسْتُنَّ مُتَأَخِّرَاتٍ.You (women) are not late.
هُمْلَيْسُواهُمْ لَيْسُوا هُنَا.They are not here.
هُنَّلَسْنَهُنَّ لَسْنَ فِي البَيْتِ.They (women) are not at home.

The predicate changes its ending

Compare the same sentence with and without لَيْسَ. If the predicate is a place phrase like فِي البَيْتِ, nothing changes.

المُعَلِّمُ مَرِيضٌ.
The teacher is ill.
المُعَلِّمُ لَيْسَ مَرِيضًا.
The teacher is not ill.
السَّيَّارَةُ جَدِيدَةٌ.
The car is new.
السَّيَّارَةُ لَيْسَتْ جَدِيدَةً.
The car is not new.
ج

لَا + the present

لَا + المُضَارِع

This is the easiest one. Put لَا before the present-tense verb. The verb does not change at all.

Things we don't do

لَا أَفْهَمُ.
I don't understand.
أَخِي لَا يَأْكُلُ السَّمَكَ.
My brother doesn't eat fish.
لَا نَلْعَبُ فِي الشَّارِعِ.
We don't play in the street.
أُمِّي لَا تَعْمَلُ يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ.
My mother doesn't work on Saturday.
لَا يَسْكُنُونَ قَرِيبًا مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
They don't live near the school.
د

Did not: مَا and لَمْ

نَفْيُ المَاضِي: مَا وَلَمْ

There are two ways to say did not. مَا goes before the past tense and changes nothing. لَمْ goes before the present tense, but the meaning becomes past and the last letter takes a sukun. لَمْ is more common in writing.

PastWith مَاWith لَمْEnglish
ذَهَبْتُمَا ذَهَبْتُلَمْ أَذْهَبْI did not go
أَكَلَمَا أَكَلَلَمْ يَأْكُلْhe did not eat
كَتَبَتْمَا كَتَبَتْلَمْ تَكْتُبْshe did not write
فَهِمْنَامَا فَهِمْنَالَمْ نَفْهَمْwe did not understand
لَعِبُوامَا لَعِبُوالَمْ يَلْعَبُواthey did not play
دَرَسْتِمَا دَرَسْتِلَمْ تَدْرُسِيyou (f.) did not study

What لَمْ does to the endings

The final ـُ becomes a sukun. The long endings lose their نَ: ـُونَ → ـُوا, ـِينَ → ـِي, ـَانِ → ـَا. Before ال the sukun becomes a kasra.

يَلْعَبُونَ ← لَمْ يَلْعَبُوا
they play → they did not play
تَدْرُسِينَ ← لَمْ تَدْرُسِي
you (f.) study → you did not study
لَمْ أَشْرَبِ الحَلِيبَ.
I did not drink the milk.
هـ

Will not: لَنْ

نَفْيُ المُسْتَقْبَل: لَنْ

To say will not, use لَنْ + the present with a fatha on the last letter. Drop the سَـ or سَوْفَ of the future (Grammar 12) — they never come with لَنْ.

FutureWith لَنْEnglish
سَأَذْهَبُلَنْ أَذْهَبَI will not go
سَأُسَافِرُلَنْ أُسَافِرَI will not travel
سَنَلْعَبُلَنْ نَلْعَبَwe will not play
سَيَرْجِعُونَلَنْ يَرْجِعُواthey will not come back
سَتَتَأَخَّرِينَلَنْ تَتَأَخَّرِيyou (f.) will not be late

And don't — a reminder

For don't! use لَا + the present with sukun, as in Grammar 13.

لَنْ يَنْزِلَ المَطَرُ اليَوْمَ.
It will not rain today.
لَا تَلْعَبْ بِالكُرَةِ فِي البَيْتِ.
Don't play ball in the house.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. أَنَا لَسْتُ جَائِعًا، أَكَلْتُ الفَطُورَ.
    I am not hungry — I ate breakfast.
  2. الطَّعَامُ لَيْسَ حَارًّا.
    The food is not hot.
  3. هِيَ لَيْسَتْ فِي الفَصْلِ اليَوْمَ.
    She is not in class today.
  4. لَا أَشْرَبُ الشَّايَ فِي المَسَاءِ.
    I don't drink tea in the evening.
  5. أَبِي لَا يَعْمَلُ يَوْمَ الأَحَدِ.
    My father doesn't work on Sunday.
  6. مَا فَهِمْتُ السُّؤَالَ.
    I did not understand the question.
  7. لَمْ يَذْهَبْ أَخِي إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ، هُوَ مَرِيضٌ.
    My brother did not go to school — he is ill.
  8. لَمْ نَلْعَبْ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ أَمْسِ.
    We did not play in the garden yesterday.
  9. لَمْ تَكْتُبِي الوَاجِبَ.
    You did not write the homework.
  10. لَنْ أَتَأَخَّرَ غَدًا.
    I will not be late tomorrow.
  11. لَنْ يُسَافِرُوا فِي الشِّتَاءِ.
    They will not travel in the winter.
  12. لَا تَفْتَحِ الشُّبَّاكَ، الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ.
    Don't open the window — it is cold.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Choose the right negative word.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اخْتَرْ أَدَاةَ النَّفْيِ المُنَاسِبَة.

  1. أُحِبُّ الحَلِيبَ. ( لَيْسَ / لَا )
  2. البَيْتُ كَبِيرًا. ( لَيْسَ / لَمْ )
  3. أَمْسِ أَلْعَبْ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ. ( لَنْ / لَمْ )
  4. غَدًا أَذْهَبَ إِلَى السُّوقِ. ( لَنْ / لَا )
  5. رَجَعْتُ مُتَأَخِّرًا. ( مَا / لَنْ )
١) لَا ٢) لَيْسَ ٣) لَمْ ٤) لَنْ ٥) مَا

2Make each sentence negative with لَيْسَ. Change the ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: انْفِ الجُمْلَةَ بِـ (لَيْسَ).

  1. الجَوُّ حَارٌّ. ←
  2. أَنَا جَائِعٌ. ←
  3. هِيَ طَبِيبَةٌ. ←
  4. نَحْنُ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ. ←
  5. البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ. ←
١) الجَوُّ لَيْسَ حَارًّا.
٢) أَنَا لَسْتُ جَائِعًا.
٣) هِيَ لَيْسَتْ طَبِيبَةً.
٤) نَحْنُ لَسْنَا فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
٥) البَيْتُ لَيْسَ كَبِيرًا.

3Rewrite each sentence with لَمْ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: انْفِ المَاضِيَ بِـ (لَمْ).

  1. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السُّوقِ. ←
  2. شَرِبَ أَخِي الحَلِيبَ. ←
  3. كَتَبَتْ سَلْمَى الوَاجِبَ. ←
  4. لَعِبْنَا فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ←
  5. رَجَعُوا مُبَكِّرًا. ←
١) لَمْ أَذْهَبْ إِلَى السُّوقِ.
٢) لَمْ يَشْرَبْ أَخِي الحَلِيبَ.
٣) لَمْ تَكْتُبْ سَلْمَى الوَاجِبَ.
٤) لَمْ نَلْعَبْ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.
٥) لَمْ يَرْجِعُوا مُبَكِّرًا.

4Complete with the right form after لَنْ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: أَكْمِلْ بَعْدَ (لَنْ).

  1. سَأَلْعَبُ غَدًا. ← لَنْ غَدًا.
  2. سَنُسَافِرُ فِي الصَّيْفِ. ← لَنْ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
  3. سَيَذْهَبُونَ إِلَى المَلْعَبِ. ← لَنْ إِلَى المَلْعَبِ.
  4. سَتَطْبُخُ أُمِّي السَّمَكَ. ← لَنْ أُمِّي السَّمَكَ.
  5. سَأَرْكَبُ الحَافِلَةَ. ← لَنْ الحَافِلَةَ.
١) أَلْعَبَ ٢) نُسَافِرَ ٣) يَذْهَبُوا ٤) تَطْبُخَ ٥) أَرْكَبَ

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. أَنَا لَيْسَ جَائِعًا. ←
  2. لَمْ أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. ←
  3. لَنْ سَأُسَافِرَ غَدًا. ←
  4. الطَّعَامُ لَيْسَ لَذِيذٌ. ←
  5. لَا ذَهَبْتُ أَمْسِ. ←
١) أَنَا لَسْتُ جَائِعًا.
٢) لَمْ أَذْهَبْ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
٣) لَنْ أُسَافِرَ غَدًا.
٤) الطَّعَامُ لَيْسَ لَذِيذًا.
٥) مَا ذَهَبْتُ أَمْسِ. / لَمْ أَذْهَبْ أَمْسِ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I am not tired.
  2. He does not eat meat.
  3. We did not understand the lesson.
  4. I will not be late tomorrow.
  5. Don't open the door. (to a man)
١) أَنَا لَسْتُ مُتْعَبًا.
٢) لَا يَأْكُلُ اللَّحْمَ.
٣) لَمْ نَفْهَمِ الدَّرْسَ.
٤) لَنْ أَتَأَخَّرَ غَدًا.
٥) لَا تَفْتَحِ البَابَ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Circle the correct negative. (5 marks)

  1. أَفْهَمُ هَذِهِ الكَلِمَةَ. ( لَا / لَمْ / لَيْسَ )
  2. أَمْسِ أَذْهَبْ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. ( لَنْ / لَمْ / لَا )
  3. غَدًا أَتَأَخَّرَ. ( لَمْ / لَنْ / مَا )
  4. أَبِي فِي البَيْتِ. ( لَا / لَيْسَ / لَمْ )
  5. أَكَلْتُ الفَطُورَ. ( مَا / لَنْ / لَيْسَ )

Question 2 — Make each sentence negative with لَيْسَ. (5 marks)

  1. أَنْتِ مَرِيضَةٌ. ←
  2. هُوَ طَوِيلٌ. ←
  3. نَحْنُ جَائِعُونَ. ←
  4. الكِتَابُ جَدِيدٌ. ←
  5. هُمْ فِي المَسْجِدِ. ←

Question 3 — Rewrite with the word in brackets. (5 marks)

  1. شَرِبْتُ القَهْوَةَ. ← ( لَمْ )
  2. سَأَلْعَبُ غَدًا. ← ( لَنْ )
  3. ذَهَبَتْ إِلَى السُّوقِ. ← ( لَمْ )
  4. سَنَرْجِعُ مُتَأَخِّرِينَ. ← ( لَنْ )
  5. كَتَبُوا الدَّرْسَ. ← ( لَمْ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about yourself: something you are not, something you did not do yesterday, and something you will not do tomorrow. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) لَا ٢) لَمْ ٣) لَنْ ٤) لَيْسَ ٥) مَا

Question 2

١) أَنْتِ لَسْتِ مَرِيضَةً.
٢) هُوَ لَيْسَ طَوِيلًا.
٣) نَحْنُ لَسْنَا جَائِعِينَ.
٤) الكِتَابُ لَيْسَ جَدِيدًا.
٥) هُمْ لَيْسُوا فِي المَسْجِدِ.

Question 3

١) لَمْ أَشْرَبِ القَهْوَةَ.
٢) لَنْ أَلْعَبَ غَدًا.
٣) لَمْ تَذْهَبْ إِلَى السُّوقِ.
٤) لَنْ نَرْجِعَ مُتَأَخِّرِينَ.
٥) لَمْ يَكْتُبُوا الدَّرْسَ.

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for the right negative word and correct endings.

Grammar · Lesson 15 of 20

الاسْتِفْهَام

Asking Questions

Ask yes/no questions with هَلْ, ask for information with the eleven question words, count with كَمْ, and answer why with لِأَنَّ.

In this lesson

  • Turn any sentence into a yes/no question with هَلْ or أَ.
  • Use the question words who, what, where, when, how, why, which and how many.
  • Choose between مَا and مَاذَا.
  • Put the noun after كَمْ in the singular with ـًا.
  • Answer why with لِأَنَّ.

Words to practise withThe FamilySchool & ClassroomShopping

أ

Yes / no questions: هَلْ and أَ

هَلْ وَالهَمْزَة

Put هَلْ in front of any sentence and it becomes a question. Nothing else moves — no word like do or does. The short أَ works the same way.

StatementQuestionEnglish
أَنْتَ جَائِعٌ.هَلْ أَنْتَ جَائِعٌ؟Are you hungry?
ذَهَبْتَ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ.هَلْ ذَهَبْتَ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ؟Did you go to the masjid?
عِنْدَكِ أُخْتٌ.هَلْ عِنْدَكِ أُخْتٌ؟Do you have a sister?
تَتَكَلَّمُ العَرَبِيَّةَ.أَتَتَكَلَّمُ العَرَبِيَّةَ؟Do you speak Arabic?

Three ways to answer

نَعَمْ means yes and لَا means no. بَلَى is a special yes: it answers a negative question — Aren't you…? Yes, I am.

هَلْ أَنْتَ طَالِبٌ؟ — نَعَمْ، أَنَا طَالِبٌ.
Are you a student? — Yes, I am a student.
هَلْ أَكَلْتَ؟ — لَا، لَمْ آكُلْ.
Have you eaten? — No, I have not.
أَلَسْتَ جَائِعًا؟ — بَلَى، أَنَا جَائِعٌ.
Aren't you hungry? — Yes, I am.
ب

The question words

أَدَوَاتُ الاسْتِفْهَام

The question word always comes first, exactly as in English.

WordEnglishExampleMeaning
مَنْwhoمَنْ هَذَا الرَّجُلُ؟Who is this man?
مَاwhat (+ noun)مَا اسْمُكِ؟What is your name?
مَاذَاwhat (+ verb)مَاذَا تَأْكُلُ فِي الفَطُورِ؟What do you eat for breakfast?
أَيْنَwhereأَيْنَ الحَمَّامُ؟Where is the bathroom?
مِنْ أَيْنَwhere … fromمِنْ أَيْنَ أَنْتَ؟Where are you from?
مَتَىwhenمَتَى تَبْدَأُ الصَّلَاةُ؟When does the prayer start?
كَيْفَhowكَيْفَ حَالُكَ؟How are you?
لِمَاذَاwhyلِمَاذَا تَأَخَّرْتَ؟Why were you late?
كَمْhow manyكَمْ أَخًا عِنْدَكَ؟How many brothers do you have?
بِكَمْhow much (price)بِكَمْ هَذَا القَمِيصُ؟How much is this shirt?
أَيّwhichأَيَّ لَوْنٍ تُحِبُّ؟Which colour do you like?
ج

مَا or مَاذَا?

مَا أَمْ مَاذَا؟

Both mean what. Look at the next word: before a noun use مَا, before a verb use مَاذَا.

Noun after it → مَا

مَا هَذَا؟
What is this?
مَا لَوْنُ سَيَّارَتِكَ؟
What colour is your car?
مَا عَمَلُ أَبِيكَ؟
What is your father's job?

Verb after it → مَاذَا

مَاذَا تَشْرَبُ؟
What are you drinking?
مَاذَا فَعَلْتَ أَمْسِ؟
What did you do yesterday?
مَاذَا تُرِيدِينَ؟
What do you (f.) want?
د

How many? كَمْ + a singular noun

كَمْ + تَمْيِيزٌ مُفْرَدٌ مَنْصُوب

This surprises English speakers: after كَمْ the noun is singular, and it ends in ـًا (or ـَةً for words with ة). How many book? — not how many books?

QuestionEnglishPossible answer
كَمْ أَخًا عِنْدَكَ؟How many brothers do you have?عِنْدِي أَخَوَانِ.
كَمْ طَالِبًا فِي الفَصْلِ؟How many students are in the class?فِي الفَصْلِ عِشْرُونَ طَالِبًا.
كَمْ غُرْفَةً فِي بَيْتِكُمْ؟How many rooms are in your house?فِيهِ أَرْبَعُ غُرَفٍ.
كَمْ سَاعَةً تَنَامُ؟How many hours do you sleep?أَنَامُ ثَمَانِيَ سَاعَاتٍ.
كَمْ عُمْرُكَ؟How old are you?عُمْرِي عَشْرُ سَنَوَاتٍ.

Price: بِكَمْ

To ask a price, add بِـ: بِكَمْ = for how much. Grammar 17 shows how to say the numbers in the answer.

بِكَمْ هَذَا الكِتَابُ؟
How much is this book?
بِعَشَرَةِ دُولَارَاتٍ.
Ten dollars.
هـ

Why? — Because: لِمَاذَا … لِأَنَّ

لِمَاذَا … لِأَنَّ

Answer لِمَاذَا with لِأَنَّ (because). After لِأَنَّ comes a noun with the accusative ending ـَ, or a pronoun ending: لِأَنِّي (because I), لِأَنَّهُ (because he), لِأَنَّهَا (because she).

Questions and answers

لِمَاذَا تَأَخَّرْتَ؟
Why were you late?
لِأَنَّ الحَافِلَةَ تَأَخَّرَتْ.
Because the bus was late.
لِمَاذَا لَا تَأْكُلُ؟
Why aren't you eating?
لِأَنِّي لَسْتُ جَائِعًا.
Because I am not hungry.
لِمَاذَا ذَهَبَتْ إِلَى الطَّبِيبِ؟
Why did she go to the doctor?
لِأَنَّهَا مَرِيضَةٌ.
Because she is ill.
و

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
يُوسُف: السَّلَامُ عَلَيْكُمْ، مَا اسْمُكَ؟
Yusuf: Peace be upon you. What is your name?
بِلَال: وَعَلَيْكُمُ السَّلَامُ، اسْمِي بِلَالٌ.
Bilal: And peace be upon you. My name is Bilal.
يُوسُف: مِنْ أَيْنَ أَنْتَ يَا بِلَالُ؟
Yusuf: Where are you from, Bilal?
بِلَال: أَنَا مِنْ بَاكِسْتَانَ، وَأَنْتَ؟
Bilal: I am from Pakistan. And you?
يُوسُف: أَنَا مِنْ مِصْرَ. فِي أَيِّ صَفٍّ أَنْتَ؟
Yusuf: I am from Egypt. Which grade are you in?
بِلَال: فِي الصَّفِّ السَّادِسِ. كَمْ أَخًا عِنْدَكَ؟
Bilal: In sixth grade. How many brothers do you have?
يُوسُف: عِنْدِي أَخٌ وَاحِدٌ وَأُخْتَانِ.
Yusuf: I have one brother and two sisters.

Model sentences

  1. هَلْ عِنْدَكَ قَلَمٌ؟
    Do you have a pen?
  2. مَنْ مُعَلِّمُكَ فِي العَرَبِيَّةِ؟
    Who is your Arabic teacher?
  3. مَا اسْمُ مَدْرَسَتِكَ؟
    What is the name of your school?
  4. مَاذَا تُحِبُّ أَنْ تَأْكُلَ؟
    What do you like to eat?
  5. أَيْنَ تَسْكُنُ عَائِلَتُكَ؟
    Where does your family live?
  6. مَتَى تَرْجِعُ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ؟
    When do you come back from school?
  7. كَيْفَ تَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ؟
    How do you go to school?
  8. لِمَاذَا تُحِبُّ الصَّيْفَ؟
    Why do you like the summer?
  9. كَمْ يَوْمًا فِي الأُسْبُوعِ؟
    How many days are in a week?
  10. بِكَمْ هَذِهِ الحَقِيبَةُ؟
    How much is this bag?
  11. فِي أَيِّ يَوْمٍ تَذْهَبُ إِلَى السُّوقِ؟
    On which day do you go to the market?
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Choose the right question word.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اخْتَرْ أَدَاةَ الاسْتِفْهَامِ المُنَاسِبَة.

  1. اسْمُكَ؟ ( مَا / مَنْ )
  2. تَسْكُنُ؟ ( أَيْنَ / كَمْ )
  3. هَذِهِ المَرْأَةُ؟ ( مَنْ / مَاذَا )
  4. تَبْدَأُ المَدْرَسَةُ؟ ( مَتَى / لِمَاذَا )
  5. هَذَا الكِتَابُ؟ ( بِكَمْ / كَيْفَ )
١) مَا ٢) أَيْنَ ٣) مَنْ ٤) مَتَى ٥) بِكَمْ

2Write مَا or مَاذَا.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اكْتُبْ (مَا) أَوْ (مَاذَا).

  1. تَدْرُسُ؟
  2. هَذَا؟
  3. اسْمُ أُمِّكَ؟
  4. أَكَلْتَ أَمْسِ؟
  5. لَوْنُ قَمِيصِكَ؟
١) مَاذَا ٢) مَا ٣) مَا ٤) مَاذَا ٥) مَا

3Put the word in brackets after كَمْ in the right form.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: ضَعِ الكَلِمَةَ بَعْدَ (كَمْ) بِالشَّكْلِ الصَّحِيح.

  1. كَمْ فِي الفَصْلِ؟ ( طَالِب )
  2. كَمْ عِنْدَكَ؟ ( أُخْت )
  3. كَمْ فِي البَيْتِ؟ ( غُرْفَة )
  4. كَمْ تَدْرُسُ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ؟ ( سَاعَة )
  5. كَمْ فِي حَقِيبَتِكَ؟ ( كِتَاب )
١) طَالِبًا ٢) أُخْتًا ٣) غُرْفَةً ٤) سَاعَةً ٥) كِتَابًا

4Write the question for each answer.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اكْتُبِ السُّؤَالَ المُنَاسِب.

  1. — أَنَا مِنْ مِصْرَ.
  2. — الحَمَّامُ هُنَاكَ.
  3. — عِنْدِي ثَلَاثَةُ إِخْوَةٍ.
  4. — أَنَا بِخَيْرٍ، وَالحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ.
  5. — يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ فِي الثَّامِنَةِ.
١) مِنْ أَيْنَ أَنْتَ؟
٢) أَيْنَ الحَمَّامُ؟
٣) كَمْ أَخًا عِنْدَكَ؟
٤) كَيْفَ حَالُكَ؟
٥) مَتَى يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ؟

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. مَاذَا اسْمُكَ؟ ←
  2. كَمْ طُلَّابٌ فِي الفَصْلِ؟ ←
  3. مَا تَأْكُلُ؟ ←
  4. لِأَنَّ الحَافِلَةُ تَأَخَّرَتْ. ←
  5. هَلْ أَيْنَ تَسْكُنُ؟ ←
١) مَا اسْمُكَ؟
٢) كَمْ طَالِبًا فِي الفَصْلِ؟
٣) مَاذَا تَأْكُلُ؟
٤) لِأَنَّ الحَافِلَةَ تَأَخَّرَتْ.
٥) أَيْنَ تَسْكُنُ؟

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. Where is the masjid?
  2. What do you drink in the morning?
  3. How many sisters do you have?
  4. Why were you late?
  5. Is your father a doctor?
١) أَيْنَ المَسْجِدُ؟
٢) مَاذَا تَشْرَبُ فِي الصَّبَاحِ؟
٣) كَمْ أُخْتًا عِنْدَكَ؟
٤) لِمَاذَا تَأَخَّرْتَ؟
٥) هَلْ أَبُوكَ طَبِيبٌ؟
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the Arabic question word. (5 marks)

  1. تَعْمَلُ أُمُّكَ؟ ( where )
  2. حَالُ أَخِيكَ؟ ( how )
  3. تَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ؟ ( when )
  4. مُعَلِّمُ العُلُومِ؟ ( who )
  5. تَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ؟ ( why )

Question 2 — Put the word in brackets after كَمْ. (5 marks)

  1. كَمْ فِي الأُسْبُوعِ؟ ( يَوْم )
  2. كَمْ عِنْدَكَ؟ ( أَخ )
  3. كَمْ فِي الشَّهْرِ؟ ( أُسْبُوع )
  4. كَمْ فِي صَفِّكِ؟ ( طَالِبَة )
  5. كَمْ فِي السَّاعَةِ؟ ( دَقِيقَة )

Question 3 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أَنْتَ جَائِعٌ؟ ( هَلْ / مَا / كَمْ )
  2. تَشْرَبُ؟ ( مَا / مَاذَا / مَنْ )
  3. لِمَاذَا ذَهَبْتَ إِلَى الطَّبِيبِ؟ — مَرِيضٌ. ( لِأَنِّي / لِأَنَّهُ / لِأَنَّ )
  4. هَذَا القَمِيصُ؟ — بِعِشْرِينَ دُولَارًا. ( كَيْفَ / بِكَمْ / أَيْنَ )
  5. لَوْنٍ تُحِبُّ؟ ( أَيَّ / مَنْ / كَمْ )

Question 4 — A new student joins your class. Write three questions you would ask them. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) أَيْنَ ٢) كَيْفَ ٣) مَتَى ٤) مَنْ ٥) لِمَاذَا

Question 2

١) يَوْمًا ٢) أَخًا ٣) أُسْبُوعًا ٤) طَالِبَةً ٥) دَقِيقَةً

Question 3

١) هَلْ ٢) مَاذَا ٣) لِأَنِّي ٤) بِكَمْ ٥) أَيَّ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct question, two for the right question words and vowel marks.

Grammar · Lesson 16 of 20

حُرُوفُ الجَرِّ وَالظُّرُوف

Prepositions & Adverbs

The small words that say where, when, with whom and for whom — and the one rule they share: the noun after them takes a kasra.

In this lesson

  • Use the nine common prepositions: فِي، عَلَى، إِلَى، مِنْ، عَنْ، مَعَ، بِـ، لِـ، كَـ.
  • Put the noun after a preposition or adverb in the genitive (kasra).
  • Say where things are with فَوْقَ، تَحْتَ، أَمَامَ، خَلْفَ، بَيْنَ and more.
  • Say when with قَبْلَ، بَعْدَ، صَبَاحًا، مَسَاءً، يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ.
  • Join prepositions to pronoun endings: عَلَيْهِ، إِلَيْكَ، مِنْهُ.

Words to practise withThe HomeThe City & DirectionsMy Day

أ

The common prepositions

حُرُوفُ الجَرّ

Three of them are only one letter long — بِـ، لِـ، كَـ — so they are written joined to the next word.

WordEnglishExampleMeaning
فِيin, atالطَّعَامُ فِي الثَّلَّاجَةِ.The food is in the fridge.
عَلَىonالكِتَابُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.The book is on the desk.
إِلَىtoذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ.I went to the library.
مِنْfromرَجَعَ أَبِي مِنَ العَمَلِ.My father came back from work.
عَنْaboutقَرَأْتُ كِتَابًا عَنِ الحَيَوَانَاتِ.I read a book about animals.
مَعَwith (someone)أَلْعَبُ مَعَ أَخِي.I play with my brother.
بِـwith (a tool), byأُسَافِرُ بِالطَّائِرَةِ.I travel by plane.
لِـfor, belongs toهَذِهِ الهَدِيَّةُ لِأُمِّي.This gift is for my mother.
كَـlikeهُوَ طَوِيلٌ كَأَبِيهِ.He is tall like his father.
ب

The kasra rule

الاسْمُ بَعْدَ حَرْفِ الجَرِّ مَجْرُور

The noun after a preposition is in the genitive: its last letter takes a kasra (ـِ, or ـٍ without ال). This is the most useful case ending in Arabic — you will hear it in almost every sentence.

On its ownAfter a prepositionEnglish
البَيْتُفِي البَيْتِin the house
المَدْرَسَةُإِلَى المَدْرَسَةِto the school
صَدِيقٌمَعَ صَدِيقٍwith a friend
السُّوقُمِنَ السُّوقِfrom the market
المُعَلِّمُلِلْمُعَلِّمِfor the teacher

Three spelling points

مِنْ takes a fatha before ال: مِنَ البَيْتِ. عَنْ takes a kasra: عَنِ الطَّقْسِ.

لِـ + ال loses the alif: لِلْمُعَلِّمِ، لِلْبَيْتِ.

The joined letters sit right on the word: بِالقَلَمِ، كَالأَسَدِ.

رَجَعْتُ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ.
I came back from school.
هَذَا الكِتَابُ لِلْمُعَلِّمِ.
This book is for the teacher.
ج

Where? Adverbs of place

ظُرُوفُ المَكَان

These words (except بِجَانِبِ) end in a fatha themselves, and the noun after them takes a kasra — exactly like a preposition.

WordEnglishExampleMeaning
فَوْقَaboveالسَّاعَةُ فَوْقَ البَابِ.The clock is above the door.
تَحْتَunderالقِطَّةُ تَحْتَ الطَّاوِلَةِ.The cat is under the table.
أَمَامَin front ofالمَسْجِدُ أَمَامَ المَدْرَسَةِ.The masjid is in front of the school.
خَلْفَbehindالمَلْعَبُ خَلْفَ المَدْرَسَةِ.The playground is behind the school.
بَيْنَbetweenالصَّيْدَلِيَّةُ بَيْنَ المَطْعَمِ وَالمَكْتَبَةِ.The pharmacy is between the restaurant and the library.
عِنْدَat, byأَنَا عِنْدَ البَابِ.I am at the door.
حَوْلَaroundنَجْلِسُ حَوْلَ الطَّاوِلَةِ.We sit around the table.
بِجَانِبِnext toبَيْتِي بِجَانِبِ المَسْجِدِ.My house is next to the masjid.
د

When? Adverbs of time

ظُرُوفُ الزَّمَان

قَبْلَ and بَعْدَ work like the place words: a kasra on the noun after them. Words like صَبَاحًا and مَسَاءً stand alone with the ending ـًا.

WordEnglishExampleMeaning
قَبْلَbeforeأَغْسِلُ يَدَيَّ قَبْلَ الأَكْلِ.I wash my hands before eating.
بَعْدَafterنَلْعَبُ بَعْدَ المَدْرَسَةِ.We play after school.
صَبَاحًاin the morningأَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ صَبَاحًا.I go to school in the morning.
مَسَاءًin the eveningيَرْجِعُ أَبِي مَسَاءً.My father comes back in the evening.
لَيْلًاat nightلَا نَخْرُجُ لَيْلًا.We don't go out at night.
يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِon Fridayنَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ.We go to the masjid on Friday.

No word for on before a day

English says on Friday. Arabic simply says يَوْمَ (the day of) + the day in the genitive.

يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ
on Saturday
يَوْمَ الاثْنَيْنِ
on Monday
هـ

Prepositions with pronoun endings

حُرُوفُ الجَرِّ مَعَ الضَّمَائِر

The endings from Grammar 2 attach to prepositions. After an i or y sound, ـهُ becomes ـهِ: فِيهِ، عَلَيْهِ، بِهِ.

Prepositionmeyou (m.)himher
فِيفِيَّفِيكَفِيهِفِيهَا
عَلَىعَلَيَّعَلَيْكَعَلَيْهِعَلَيْهَا
إِلَىإِلَيَّإِلَيْكَإِلَيْهِإِلَيْهَا
مِنْمِنِّيمِنْكَمِنْهُمِنْهَا
عَنْعَنِّيعَنْكَعَنْهُعَنْهَا
مَعَمَعِيمَعَكَمَعَهُمَعَهَا
لِـلِيلَكَلَهُلَهَا
بِـبِيبِكَبِهِبِهَا

In use

كَتَبْتُ إِلَيْهِ رِسَالَةً.
I wrote him a letter.
هَذَا القَلَمُ لَهَا.
This pen is hers.
سَأَلْتُ عَنْكَ.
I asked about you.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. الطَّعَامُ فِي الثَّلَّاجَةِ، وَالصُّحُونُ عَلَى الطَّاوِلَةِ.
    The food is in the fridge, and the plates are on the table.
  2. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ مَعَ صَدِيقِي.
    I went to the library with my friend.
  3. رَجَعَ أَبِي مِنَ العَمَلِ مَسَاءً.
    My father came back from work in the evening.
  4. أُسَافِرُ إِلَى مِصْرَ بِالطَّائِرَةِ.
    I travel to Egypt by plane.
  5. هَذِهِ الهَدِيَّةُ لِأُمِّي.
    This gift is for my mother.
  6. السَّاعَةُ فَوْقَ البَابِ.
    The clock is above the door.
  7. بَيْتُنَا بَيْنَ المَسْجِدِ وَالمَدْرَسَةِ.
    Our house is between the masjid and the school.
  8. نَجْلِسُ حَوْلَ الطَّاوِلَةِ وَنَأْكُلُ مَعًا.
    We sit around the table and eat together.
  9. أَتَوَضَّأُ قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
    I make wudu before the prayer.
  10. نَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ بَعْدَ المَدْرَسَةِ يَوْمَ الخَمِيسِ.
    We play football after school on Thursday.
  11. كَتَبْتُ إِلَيْهِ رِسَالَةً، وَلَمْ يَكْتُبْ إِلَيَّ.
    I wrote him a letter, and he did not write to me.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Choose the right preposition.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اخْتَرْ حَرْفَ الجَرِّ المُنَاسِب.

  1. ذَهَبْتُ السُّوقِ. ( إِلَى / عَلَى )
  2. رَجَعَتْ أُمِّي العَمَلِ. ( مِنَ / فِي )
  3. أَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ أَصْدِقَائِي. ( مَعَ / مِنْ )
  4. قَرَأْتُ قِصَّةً الطُّيُورِ. ( عَنِ / إِلَى )
  5. الصُّحُونُ المَطْبَخِ. ( فِي / عَنْ )
١) إِلَى ٢) مِنَ ٣) مَعَ ٤) عَنِ ٥) فِي

2Write the word in brackets with the right ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اكْتُبِ الكَلِمَةَ بِالحَرَكَةِ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. أَنَا فِي . ( البَيْتُ )
  2. الكِتَابُ عَلَى . ( الطَّاوِلَةُ )
  3. رَجَعْتُ مِنْ . ( المَدْرَسَةُ )
  4. ذَهَبَ إِلَى . ( الطَّبِيبُ )
  5. جَلَسْتُ مَعَ . ( صَدِيقٌ )
١) البَيْتِ ٢) الطَّاوِلَةِ ٣) المَدْرَسَةِ ٤) الطَّبِيبِ ٥) صَدِيقٍ

3Complete with a word from the box.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: أَكْمِلْ مِنَ الصُّنْدُوق.

قَبْلَ — بَعْدَ — تَحْتَ — بَيْنَ — حَوْلَ
  1. أَتَوَضَّأُ الصَّلَاةِ.
  2. القِطَّةُ السَّرِيرِ.
  3. نَجْلِسُ الطَّاوِلَةِ.
  4. نَتَنَاوَلُ الفَطُورَ الاسْتِيقَاظِ.
  5. المَطْبَخُ غُرْفَةِ الجُلُوسِ وَالحَمَّامِ.
١) قَبْلَ ٢) تَحْتَ ٣) حَوْلَ ٤) بَعْدَ ٥) بَيْنَ

4Join the preposition and the pronoun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: اجْمَعْ حَرْفَ الجَرِّ وَالضَّمِير.

  1. عَلَى + هُوَ ←
  2. مِنْ + أَنَا ←
  3. إِلَى + أَنْتَ ←
  4. عَنْ + هِيَ ←
  5. فِي + هُوَ ←
١) عَلَيْهِ ٢) مِنِّي ٣) إِلَيْكَ ٤) عَنْهَا ٥) فِيهِ

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. أَنَا فِي البَيْتُ. ←
  2. ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةَ. ←
  3. رَجَعَ مِنْ العَمَلِ. ←
  4. هَذِهِ الحَقِيبَةُ لَهِ. ←
  5. نَلْعَبُ بَعْدَ المَدْرَسَةُ. ←
١) أَنَا فِي البَيْتِ.
٢) ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.
٣) رَجَعَ مِنَ العَمَلِ.
٤) هَذِهِ الحَقِيبَةُ لَهُ.
٥) نَلْعَبُ بَعْدَ المَدْرَسَةِ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. The book is on the desk.
  2. I came back from school after the lesson.
  3. We go to the masjid on Friday.
  4. My house is next to the library.
  5. This gift is for my mother.
١) الكِتَابُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.
٢) رَجَعْتُ مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ.
٣) نَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَسْجِدِ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ.
٤) بَيْتِي بِجَانِبِ المَكْتَبَةِ.
٥) هَذِهِ الهَدِيَّةُ لِأُمِّي.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Circle the correct word. (5 marks)

  1. يَسْكُنُ جَدِّي فِرْجِينْيَا. ( فِي / عَلَى / عَنْ )
  2. ذَهَبْنَا المَطَارِ بِالسَّيَّارَةِ. ( إِلَى / عَنْ / فِي )
  3. الصُّورَةُ الجِدَارِ. ( عَلَى / مِنْ / إِلَى )
  4. تَكَلَّمَ المُعَلِّمُ الطَّقْسِ. ( عَنِ / إِلَى / مَعَ )
  5. أَشْرَبُ الحَلِيبَ النَّوْمِ. ( قَبْلَ / تَحْتَ / بَيْنَ )

Question 2 — Write the word in brackets with the right ending. (5 marks)

  1. جَلَسْنَا فِي . ( الحَدِيقَةُ )
  2. ذَهَبَتْ إِلَى . ( السُّوقُ )
  3. الهَاتِفُ تَحْتَ . ( الكِتَابُ )
  4. نَلْعَبُ بَعْدَ . ( الصَّلَاةُ )
  5. رَجَعْتُ مِنَ . ( المَكْتَبَةُ )

Question 3 — Join the preposition and the pronoun. (5 marks)

  1. مَعَ + أَنَا ←
  2. لِـ + هِيَ ←
  3. عَلَى + أَنْتَ ←
  4. مِنْ + هُوَ ←
  5. إِلَى + أَنَا ←

Question 4 — Write three sentences saying where things are in your room. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) فِي ٢) إِلَى ٣) عَلَى ٤) عَنِ ٥) قَبْلَ

Question 2

١) الحَدِيقَةِ ٢) السُّوقِ ٣) الكِتَابِ ٤) الصَّلَاةِ ٥) المَكْتَبَةِ

Question 3

١) مَعِي ٢) لَهَا ٣) عَلَيْكَ ٤) مِنْهُ ٥) إِلَيَّ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for the kasra after each preposition.

Grammar · Lesson 17 of 20

العَدَدُ وَالمَعْدُود

Numbers & Counting

Counting things in Arabic follows four simple patterns: one and two, three to ten, eleven to ninety-nine, and hundreds and thousands. Plus first, second, third.

In this lesson

  • Say one and two of anything correctly.
  • Use 3–10 with the opposite gender and a plural noun.
  • Use 11–99 with a singular noun ending in ـًا.
  • Use 100 and 1,000 for prices and years.
  • Use the ordinals first to tenth like adjectives.

Words to practise withNumbers & TimeThe FamilyShopping

أ

One and two

الوَاحِدُ وَالاثْنَانِ

One and two behave like adjectives: they come after the noun and match it. For two, the dual (Grammar 8) is usually enough on its own.

NounOneTwoEnglish
كِتَابكِتَابٌ وَاحِدٌكِتَابَانِone book · two books
سَيَّارَةسَيَّارَةٌ وَاحِدَةٌسَيَّارَتَانِone car · two cars
أَخأَخٌ وَاحِدٌأَخَوَانِone brother · two brothers
أُخْتأُخْتٌ وَاحِدَةٌأُخْتَانِone sister · two sisters

For emphasis

You may add اثْنَانِ / اثْنَتَانِ after the dual to stress the number.

عِنْدِي كِتَابَانِ اثْنَانِ فَقَطْ.
I have only two books.
ب

Three to ten: the opposite gender

مِنْ ثَلَاثَةٍ إِلَى عَشَرَةٍ

This is the famous rule: with a masculine noun the number takes ة; with a feminine noun it drops it. Look at the singular to decide. The noun after the number is plural with a kasra.

Numberكِتَاب — masculineسَيَّارَة — feminine
3ثَلَاثَةُ كُتُبٍثَلَاثُ سَيَّارَاتٍ
4أَرْبَعَةُ كُتُبٍأَرْبَعُ سَيَّارَاتٍ
5خَمْسَةُ كُتُبٍخَمْسُ سَيَّارَاتٍ
6سِتَّةُ كُتُبٍسِتُّ سَيَّارَاتٍ
7سَبْعَةُ كُتُبٍسَبْعُ سَيَّارَاتٍ
8ثَمَانِيَةُ كُتُبٍثَمَانِي سَيَّارَاتٍ
9تِسْعَةُ كُتُبٍتِسْعُ سَيَّارَاتٍ
10عَشَرَةُ كُتُبٍعَشْرُ سَيَّارَاتٍ

Ask: what is the singular?

إِخْوَة comes from أَخ (masculine), so: ثَلَاثَةُ إِخْوَةٍ. غُرَف comes from غُرْفَة (feminine), so: أَرْبَعُ غُرَفٍ.

عِنْدِي ثَلَاثَةُ إِخْوَةٍ.
I have three brothers.
فِي بَيْتِنَا أَرْبَعُ غُرَفٍ.
There are four rooms in our house.
فِي الأُسْبُوعِ سَبْعَةُ أَيَّامٍ.
There are seven days in a week.
عُمْرِي عَشْرُ سَنَوَاتٍ.
I am ten years old.
ج

Eleven to ninety-nine: a singular noun

مِنْ أَحَدَ عَشَرَ إِلَى تِسْعَةٍ وَتِسْعِينَ

From eleven up, the noun is singular and ends in ـًا — exactly like after كَمْ (Grammar 15). The numbers 11 to 19 also change gender in a tricky way, so for now learn the examples as they are.

ArabicEnglish
أَحَدَ عَشَرَ لَاعِبًا11 players
اثْنَا عَشَرَ شَهْرًا12 months
عِشْرُونَ طَالِبًا20 students
ثَلَاثُونَ يَوْمًا30 days
أَرْبَعُونَ دَقِيقَةً40 minutes
خَمْسُونَ دُولَارًا50 dollars

The tens change after a preposition

After a preposition, or as an object, ـُونَ becomes ـِينَ — the same ending you know from plurals (Grammar 8).

فِي صَفِّنَا عِشْرُونَ طَالِبًا.
There are twenty students in our class.
اشْتَرَيْتُهُ بِعِشْرِينَ دُولَارًا.
I bought it for twenty dollars.
د

Hundreds and thousands

المِائَةُ وَالأَلْف

مِائَة and أَلْف are followed by a singular noun with a kasra. Two hundred and two thousand are simply the dual.

ArabicEnglish
مِائَةُ طَالِبٍ100 students
مِائَةُ دُولَارٍ100 dollars
مِائَتَا دُولَارٍ200 dollars
أَلْفُ سَنَةٍ1,000 years
أَلْفَا دُولَارٍ2,000 dollars

Prices

بِكَمْ هَذَا الحَاسُوبُ؟ — بِأَلْفِ دُولَارٍ.
How much is this computer? — A thousand dollars.
الدَّرَّاجَةُ بِمِائَةِ دُولَارٍ.
The bicycle costs a hundred dollars.
هـ

First, second, third

العَدَدُ التَّرْتِيبِيّ

Ordinals are adjectives. They come after the noun and match it in gender and in ال (Grammar 7). You already use them to tell the time (Vocabulary 4).

MasculineFeminineEnglish
الأَوَّلالأُولَىfirst
الثَّانِيالثَّانِيَةsecond
الثَّالِثالثَّالِثَةthird
الرَّابِعالرَّابِعَةfourth
الخَامِسالخَامِسَةfifth
السَّادِسالسَّادِسَةsixth
السَّابِعالسَّابِعَةseventh
الثَّامِنالثَّامِنَةeighth
التَّاسِعالتَّاسِعَةninth
العَاشِرالعَاشِرَةtenth

In use

الدَّرْسُ الأَوَّلُ
the first lesson
أَنَا فِي الصَّفِّ السَّادِسِ.
I am in the sixth grade.
هِيَ البِنْتُ الثَّانِيَةُ فِي العَائِلَةِ.
She is the second girl in the family.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. عِنْدِي أَخٌ وَاحِدٌ وَأُخْتَانِ.
    I have one brother and two sisters.
  2. فِي حَقِيبَتِي ثَلَاثَةُ كُتُبٍ وَخَمْسَةُ أَقْلَامٍ.
    In my bag there are three books and five pens.
  3. فِي بَيْتِنَا أَرْبَعُ غُرَفٍ.
    There are four rooms in our house.
  4. عُمْرِي عَشْرُ سَنَوَاتٍ.
    I am ten years old.
  5. فِي صَفِّنَا عِشْرُونَ طَالِبًا.
    There are twenty students in our class.
  6. الدَّرْسُ أَرْبَعُونَ دَقِيقَةً.
    The lesson is forty minutes long.
  7. فِي السَّنَةِ اثْنَا عَشَرَ شَهْرًا.
    There are twelve months in a year.
  8. اشْتَرَى أَبِي حَاسُوبًا بِأَلْفِ دُولَارٍ.
    My father bought a computer for a thousand dollars.
  9. نُصَلِّي خَمْسَ صَلَوَاتٍ فِي اليَوْمِ.
    We pray five prayers a day.
  10. أَنَا فِي الصَّفِّ السَّادِسِ.
    I am in the sixth grade.
  11. أُخْتِي هِيَ الأُولَى فِي صَفِّهَا.
    My sister is first in her class.
  12. فِي فَرِيقِ كُرَةِ القَدَمِ أَحَدَ عَشَرَ لَاعِبًا.
    There are eleven players in a football team.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Choose the right form of the number.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اخْتَرِ العَدَدَ الصَّحِيح.

  1. عِنْدِي إِخْوَةٍ. ( ثَلَاثُ / ثَلَاثَةُ )
  2. فِي البَيْتِ غُرَفٍ. ( خَمْسُ / خَمْسَةُ )
  3. قَرَأْتُ كُتُبٍ. ( أَرْبَعَ / أَرْبَعَةَ )
  4. فِي الأُسْبُوعِ أَيَّامٍ. ( سَبْعُ / سَبْعَةُ )
  5. عُمْرُ أُخْتِي سَنَوَاتٍ. ( تِسْعُ / تِسْعَةُ )
١) ثَلَاثَةُ ٢) خَمْسُ ٣) أَرْبَعَةَ ٤) سَبْعَةُ ٥) تِسْعُ

2Write in Arabic.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اكْتُبْ بِالعَرَبِيَّة.

  1. one book
  2. two cars
  3. one sister
  4. two brothers
  5. one bag
١) كِتَابٌ وَاحِدٌ ٢) سَيَّارَتَانِ ٣) أُخْتٌ وَاحِدَةٌ ٤) أَخَوَانِ ٥) حَقِيبَةٌ وَاحِدَةٌ

3Put the noun in brackets after the number.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: ضَعِ المَعْدُودَ بِالشَّكْلِ الصَّحِيح.

  1. عِشْرُونَ ( طَالِب )
  2. ثَلَاثُونَ ( يَوْم )
  3. مِائَةُ ( دُولَار )
  4. خَمْسَةُ ( كِتَاب )
  5. أَلْفُ ( سَنَة )
١) طَالِبًا ٢) يَوْمًا ٣) دُولَارٍ ٤) كُتُبٍ ٥) سَنَةٍ

4Complete with the ordinal number.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: أَكْمِلْ بِالعَدَدِ التَّرْتِيبِيّ.

  1. أَنَا فِي الصَّفِّ . ( ٦ )
  2. هَذَا الدَّرْسُ . ( ١ )
  3. يَوْمُ الاثْنَيْنِ هُوَ اليَوْمُ فِي الأُسْبُوعِ. ( ٢ )
  4. أُخْتِي فِي السَّنَةِ . ( ٣ )
  5. هِيَ البِنْتُ فِي الصَّفِّ. ( ١ )
١) السَّادِسِ ٢) الأَوَّلُ ٣) الثَّانِي ٤) الثَّالِثَةِ ٥) الأُولَى

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. عِنْدِي ثَلَاثُ إِخْوَةٍ. ←
  2. فِي الفَصْلِ عِشْرُونَ طُلَّابٌ. ←
  3. فِي البَيْتِ أَرْبَعَةُ غُرَفٍ. ←
  4. هَذَا القَمِيصُ بِمِائَةِ دُولَارَاتٍ. ←
  5. عِنْدِي كِتَابٌ وَاحِدَةٌ. ←
١) عِنْدِي ثَلَاثَةُ إِخْوَةٍ.
٢) فِي الفَصْلِ عِشْرُونَ طَالِبًا.
٣) فِي البَيْتِ أَرْبَعُ غُرَفٍ.
٤) هَذَا القَمِيصُ بِمِائَةِ دُولَارٍ.
٥) عِنْدِي كِتَابٌ وَاحِدٌ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I have three brothers.
  2. There are twenty students in our class.
  3. This bag costs fifty dollars.
  4. My sister is in the second grade.
  5. We have two cars.
١) عِنْدِي ثَلَاثَةُ إِخْوَةٍ.
٢) فِي صَفِّنَا عِشْرُونَ طَالِبًا.
٣) هَذِهِ الحَقِيبَةُ بِخَمْسِينَ دُولَارًا.
٤) أُخْتِي فِي الصَّفِّ الثَّانِي.
٥) عِنْدَنَا سَيَّارَتَانِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. عِنْدِي أَخَوَاتٍ. ( ثَلَاثُ / ثَلَاثَةُ / ثَلَاثُونَ )
  2. فِي الشَّهْرِ يَوْمًا. ( ثَلَاثُونَ / ثَلَاثَةُ / ثَلَاثُ )
  3. اشْتَرَيْتُ أَقْلَامٍ. ( خَمْسَ / خَمْسَةَ / خَمْسِينَ )
  4. عِنْدِي أُخْتٌ . ( وَاحِدٌ / وَاحِدَةٌ / اثْنَتَانِ )
  5. أَنَا فِي الصَّفِّ . ( الخَامِسِ / خَمْسَةِ / الخَامِسَةِ )

Question 2 — Put the noun in brackets after the number. (5 marks)

  1. سَبْعَةُ ( يَوْم )
  2. أَرْبَعُونَ ( دَقِيقَة )
  3. مِائَةُ ( طَالِب )
  4. عَشْرُ ( سَنَة )
  5. اثْنَا عَشَرَ ( شَهْر )

Question 3 — Write the ordinal. Match the noun. (5 marks)

  1. الدَّرْسُ ( ٣ )
  2. البِنْتُ ( ٢ )
  3. اليَوْمُ ( ٧ )
  4. السَّاعَةُ ( ١٠ )
  5. الصَّفُّ ( ١ )

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your family or your school. Use a number in each one. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) ثَلَاثُ ٢) ثَلَاثُونَ ٣) خَمْسَةَ ٤) وَاحِدَةٌ ٥) الخَامِسِ

Question 2

١) أَيَّامٍ ٢) دَقِيقَةً ٣) طَالِبٍ ٤) سَنَوَاتٍ ٥) شَهْرًا

Question 3

١) الثَّالِثُ ٢) الثَّانِيَةُ ٣) السَّابِعُ ٤) العَاشِرَةُ ٥) الأَوَّلُ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for the right number pattern.

Grammar · Lesson 18 of 20

كَانَ

Was and Were: كَانَ

Sentences with no verb have no past tense of their own. كَانَ gives them one — was, were — and with a present verb it means used to.

In this lesson

  • Put a no-verb sentence in the past with كَانَ.
  • Change the predicate to the accusative after كَانَ.
  • Conjugate كَانَ with every pronoun.
  • Say will be with سَيَكُونُ and used to with كَانَ + present.
  • Say was not with لَمْ يَكُنْ and مَا كَانَ.

Words to practise withWeather & SeasonsJobs & WorkThe Family

أ

كَانَ makes it past

كَانَ مَعَ الجُمْلَةِ الاسْمِيَّة

Put كَانَ in front of a sentence with no verb. The subject keeps its ـُ, but the predicate changes to the accusative ـًا / ـَةً — the same change you saw with لَيْسَ in Grammar 14. Use كَانَتْ for a feminine subject.

NowIn the pastEnglish
الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ.كَانَ الجَوُّ بَارِدًا.The weather was cold.
أَبِي مُعَلِّمٌ.كَانَ أَبِي مُعَلِّمًا.My father was a teacher.
البَيْتُ صَغِيرٌ.كَانَ البَيْتُ صَغِيرًا.The house was small.
أُمِّي مَرِيضَةٌ.كَانَتْ أُمِّي مَرِيضَةً.My mother was ill.
الطُّلَّابُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.كَانَ الطُّلَّابُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.The students were in the library.

Place phrases do not change

If the predicate is a phrase like فِي المَكْتَبَةِ, there is no ending to change. And when كَانَ comes before a plural subject, it stays singular — just like any verb that comes first.

كَانَ الطُّلَّابُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.
The students were in the library.
الطُّلَّابُ كَانُوا فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.
The students were in the library. (subject first)
ب

كَانَ with every pronoun

تَصْرِيفُ كَانَ

كَانَ is a past-tense verb with a long ا in the middle. When the ending starts with a sukun (ـْتُ، ـْنَا…), the ا drops and the first vowel becomes u: كَانَ → كُنْتُ.

PronounكَانَExampleEnglish
One — singular
أَنَاكُنْتُكُنْتُ مَرِيضًا أَمْسِ.I was ill yesterday.
أَنْتَكُنْتَكُنْتَ فِي المَسْجِدِ.You were at the masjid.
أَنْتِكُنْتِكُنْتِ سَعِيدَةً.You were happy.
هُوَكَانَكَانَ جَائِعًا.He was hungry.
هِيَكَانَتْكَانَتْ فِي المَطْبَخِ.She was in the kitchen.
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاكُنْتُمَاكُنْتُمَا صَغِيرَيْنِ.You two were little.
هُمَاكَانَاكَانَا فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.The two of them were in the garden.
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُكُنَّاكُنَّا مُتْعَبِينَ.We were tired.
أَنْتُمْكُنْتُمْكُنْتُمْ فِي الفَصْلِ.You were in class.
أَنْتُنَّكُنْتُنَّكُنْتُنَّ مَشْغُولَاتٍ.You (women) were busy.
هُمْكَانُواكَانُوا فِي السُّوقِ.They were at the market.
هُنَّكُنَّكُنَّ فِي البَيْتِ.They (women) were at home.
ج

Is usually, will be: يَكُونُ and سَيَكُونُ

يَكُونُ وَسَيَكُونُ

The present يَكُونُ is used for things that are usually true. Add سَـ (Grammar 12) for will be. The predicate is accusative here too.

In use

يَكُونُ الجَوُّ حَارًّا فِي الصَّيْفِ.
The weather is usually hot in summer.
سَيَكُونُ الجَوُّ جَمِيلًا غَدًا.
The weather will be nice tomorrow.
سَأَكُونُ فِي البَيْتِ مَسَاءً.
I will be at home in the evening.
سَتَكُونُ أُخْتِي طَبِيبَةً.
My sister will be a doctor.
د

Used to: كَانَ + the present

كَانَ + المُضَارِع

Put كَانَ before a present-tense verb and it means used to, or was doing. Both verbs agree with the subject.

ArabicEnglish
كَانَ جَدِّي يَعْمَلُ مُزَارِعًا.My grandfather used to work as a farmer.
كُنْتُ أَلْعَبُ فِي هَذِهِ الحَدِيقَةِ.I used to play in this garden.
كَانَتْ أُمِّي تَطْبُخُ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.My mother used to cook every day.
كُنَّا نَسْكُنُ فِي شَقَّةٍ صَغِيرَةٍ.We used to live in a small apartment.
كَانُوا يَدْرُسُونَ عِنْدَمَا دَخَلْتُ.They were studying when I came in.
هـ

Was not: لَمْ يَكُنْ and مَا كَانَ

نَفْيُ كَانَ

Use مَا before كَانَ, or لَمْ before the present يَكُونُ. After لَمْ the long و drops: يَكُونُ → لَمْ يَكُنْ. Before ال it takes a kasra: لَمْ يَكُنِ.

PronounWith لَمْEnglish
أَنَالَمْ أَكُنْI was not
أَنْتَلَمْ تَكُنْyou were not
هُوَلَمْ يَكُنْhe was not
هِيَلَمْ تَكُنْshe was not
نَحْنُلَمْ نَكُنْwe were not
هُمْلَمْ يَكُونُواthey were not

Two ways, same meaning

لَمْ يَكُنِ الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذًا.
The food was not tasty.
مَا كَانَ الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذًا.
The food was not tasty.
لَمْ أَكُنْ فِي البَيْتِ.
I was not at home.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. كَانَ الجَوُّ بَارِدًا أَمْسِ، وَنَزَلَ الثَّلْجُ.
    The weather was cold yesterday, and snow fell.
  2. كُنْتُ مَرِيضًا يَوْمَ الاثْنَيْنِ.
    I was ill on Monday.
  3. كَانَتْ أُمِّي فِي المَطْبَخِ.
    My mother was in the kitchen.
  4. كَانَ جَدِّي يَعْمَلُ مُزَارِعًا فِي مِصْرَ.
    My grandfather used to work as a farmer in Egypt.
  5. كُنَّا نَسْكُنُ فِي شَقَّةٍ صَغِيرَةٍ.
    We used to live in a small apartment.
  6. عِنْدَمَا كُنْتُ صَغِيرًا، كُنْتُ أُحِبُّ الحَلِيبَ.
    When I was little, I used to love milk.
  7. كَانَ الطُّلَّابُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.
    The students were in the library.
  8. لَمْ يَكُنِ الطَّعَامُ حَارًّا.
    The food was not hot.
  9. لَمْ أَكُنْ فِي البَيْتِ عِنْدَمَا اتَّصَلْتَ.
    I was not at home when you called.
  10. سَيَكُونُ الجَوُّ جَمِيلًا غَدًا.
    The weather will be nice tomorrow.
  11. سَأَكُونُ فِي المَسْجِدِ بَعْدَ المَغْرِبِ.
    I will be at the masjid after Maghrib.
  12. يَكُونُ الجَوُّ حَارًّا فِي الصَّيْفِ.
    The weather is usually hot in summer.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Choose the right form of كَانَ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اخْتَرِ الصِّيغَةَ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. الجَوُّ بَارِدًا أَمْسِ. ( كَانَ / كَانَتْ )
  2. أُمِّي فِي السُّوقِ. ( كَانَ / كَانَتْ )
  3. أَنَا مَرِيضًا. ( كَانَ / كُنْتُ )
  4. نَحْنُ فِي المَسْجِدِ. ( كُنَّا / كَانُوا )
  5. الأَوْلَادُ فِي المَلْعَبِ. ( كَانُوا / كُنْتُمْ )
١) كَانَ ٢) كَانَتْ ٣) كُنْتُ ٤) كُنَّا ٥) كَانُوا

2Put each sentence in the past with كَانَ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: أَدْخِلْ (كَانَ) عَلَى الجُمْلَة.

  1. الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذٌ. ←
  2. السَّيَّارَةُ جَدِيدَةٌ. ←
  3. أَنَا جَائِعٌ. ←
  4. الجَوُّ حَارٌّ. ←
  5. نَحْنُ مُتْعَبُونَ. ←
١) كَانَ الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذًا.
٢) كَانَتِ السَّيَّارَةُ جَدِيدَةً.
٣) كُنْتُ جَائِعًا.
٤) كَانَ الجَوُّ حَارًّا.
٥) كُنَّا مُتْعَبِينَ.

3Complete the table with the right form of كَانَ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: أَكْمِلِ الجَدْوَل.

PronounكَانَPronounكَانَ
أَنْتَهُمَا
هِيَأَنْتُمْ
نَحْنُهُنَّ
أَنْتَ كُنْتَ · هِيَ كَانَتْ · نَحْنُ كُنَّا · هُمَا كَانَا · أَنْتُمْ كُنْتُمْ · هُنَّ كُنَّ

4Say what people used to do. Add كَانَ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: أَضِفْ (كَانَ) بِالصِّيغَةِ المُنَاسِبَة.

  1. أَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ. ←
  2. تَسْكُنُ عَائِلَتِي فِي مِصْرَ. ←
  3. يَذْهَبُ أَبِي إِلَى العَمَلِ بِالحَافِلَةِ. ←
  4. نَأْكُلُ مَعًا كُلَّ يَوْمٍ. ←
  5. يَلْعَبُونَ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ. ←
١) كُنْتُ أَلْعَبُ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ.
٢) كَانَتْ عَائِلَتِي تَسْكُنُ فِي مِصْرَ.
٣) كَانَ أَبِي يَذْهَبُ إِلَى العَمَلِ بِالحَافِلَةِ.
٤) كُنَّا نَأْكُلُ مَعًا كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.
٥) كَانُوا يَلْعَبُونَ فِي الحَدِيقَةِ.

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. كَانَ الجَوُّ بَارِدٌ. ←
  2. أَنَا كَانَ فِي البَيْتِ. ←
  3. كَانَتْ أَبِي مُعَلِّمًا. ←
  4. لَمْ يَكُونُ الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذًا. ←
  5. سَيَكُونُ الجَوُّ حَارٌّ غَدًا. ←
١) كَانَ الجَوُّ بَارِدًا.
٢) أَنَا كُنْتُ فِي البَيْتِ.
٣) كَانَ أَبِي مُعَلِّمًا.
٤) لَمْ يَكُنِ الطَّعَامُ لَذِيذًا.
٥) سَيَكُونُ الجَوُّ حَارًّا غَدًا.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I was at home yesterday.
  2. The weather was very cold.
  3. My grandfather was a farmer.
  4. We used to live in a small house.
  5. The shop was not open.
١) كُنْتُ فِي البَيْتِ أَمْسِ.
٢) كَانَ الجَوُّ بَارِدًا جِدًّا.
٣) كَانَ جَدِّي مُزَارِعًا.
٤) كُنَّا نَسْكُنُ فِي بَيْتٍ صَغِيرٍ.
٥) لَمْ يَكُنِ المَتْجَرُ مَفْتُوحًا.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. الطَّالِبُ مُتَأَخِّرًا. ( كَانَ / كَانَتْ / كُنْتُ )
  2. كَانَتِ المُعَلِّمَةُ . ( سَعِيدَةٌ / سَعِيدَةً / سَعِيدًا )
  3. أَنْتِ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ. ( كُنْتَ / كُنْتِ / كَانَتْ )
  4. غَدًا الجَوُّ جَمِيلًا. ( كَانَ / سَيَكُونُ / كُنْتُ )
  5. لَمْ فِي البَيْتِ. ( أَكُنْ / أَكُونُ / كُنْتُ )

Question 2 — Put each sentence in the past with كَانَ. (5 marks)

  1. البَيْتُ كَبِيرٌ. ←
  2. هِيَ مُعَلِّمَةٌ. ←
  3. هُمْ فِي السُّوقِ. ←
  4. أَنْتَ جَائِعٌ. ←
  5. الحَافِلَةُ مُتَأَخِّرَةٌ. ←

Question 3 — Make each sentence negative with لَمْ. (5 marks)

  1. كَانَ الطَّعَامُ حَارًّا. ←
  2. كُنْتُ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ. ←
  3. كَانَتْ أُمِّي فِي البَيْتِ. ←
  4. كُنَّا مُتَأَخِّرِينَ. ←
  5. كَانَ المَسْجِدُ مُغْلَقًا. ←

Question 4 — Write three sentences about when you were little. Use كُنْتُ and كَانَ. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) كَانَ ٢) سَعِيدَةً ٣) كُنْتِ ٤) سَيَكُونُ ٥) أَكُنْ

Question 2

١) كَانَ البَيْتُ كَبِيرًا.
٢) كَانَتْ مُعَلِّمَةً.
٣) كَانُوا فِي السُّوقِ.
٤) كُنْتَ جَائِعًا.
٥) كَانَتِ الحَافِلَةُ مُتَأَخِّرَةً.

Question 3

١) لَمْ يَكُنِ الطَّعَامُ حَارًّا.
٢) لَمْ أَكُنْ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
٣) لَمْ تَكُنْ أُمِّي فِي البَيْتِ.
٤) لَمْ نَكُنْ مُتَأَخِّرِينَ.
٥) لَمْ يَكُنِ المَسْجِدُ مُغْلَقًا.

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for the right form of كَانَ and the accusative ending.

Grammar · Lesson 19 of 20

اسْمُ التَّفْضِيل

Comparing: Bigger and Best

One pattern — أَفْعَلُ — gives you both bigger and biggest. Learn how to build it, how to say than, and what to do with adjectives that do not fit.

In this lesson

  • Build the أَفْعَلُ form from common adjectives.
  • Say -er than with أَفْعَلُ مِنْ.
  • Say the -est with أَفْعَلُ + a noun, or with ال.
  • Use أَكْثَرُ + a noun for adjectives that do not fit the pattern.

Words to practise withThe FamilyTransport & TravelWeather & SeasonsHobbies & Sport

أ

The أَفْعَلُ pattern

وَزْنُ أَفْعَلَ

Take the three root letters of the adjective, put أَ in front, a sukun on the first letter and a fatha on the second: كَبِير → أَكْبَر. Adjectives whose last two root letters are the same join them: قَلِيل → أَقَلّ.

AdjectiveEnglishComparativeEnglish
كَبِيرbig, oldأَكْبَرbigger, older
صَغِيرsmall, youngأَصْغَرsmaller, younger
طَوِيلtall, longأَطْوَلtaller, longer
قَصِيرshortأَقْصَرshorter
جَمِيلbeautifulأَجْمَلmore beautiful
سَرِيعfastأَسْرَعfaster
قَدِيمold (things)أَقْدَمolder
سَهْلeasyأَسْهَلeasier
صَعْبdifficultأَصْعَبmore difficult
رَخِيصcheapأَرْخَصcheaper
حَسَنgoodأَحْسَنbetter
كَثِيرmany, muchأَكْثَرmore
قَلِيلfew, littleأَقَلّfewer, less
ب

Bigger than: أَفْعَلُ مِنْ

أَفْعَلُ مِنْ

Put مِنْ (than) after the comparative. The comparative never changes — the same أَكْبَرُ for a man, a woman or a group. After مِنْ use a noun with a kasra, or a pronoun ending: مِنِّي، مِنْكَ، مِنْهُ، مِنْهَا (Grammar 16).

One form for everyone

أَخِي أَطْوَلُ مِنِّي.
My brother is taller than me.
أُخْتِي أَكْبَرُ مِنِّي.
My sister is older than me.
الطَّائِرَةُ أَسْرَعُ مِنَ القِطَارِ.
The plane is faster than the train.
هَذِهِ الشَّقَّةُ أَصْغَرُ مِنْ بَيْتِنَا.
This apartment is smaller than our house.
الطُّلَّابُ أَكْثَرُ مِنَ المُعَلِّمِينَ.
The students are more than the teachers.

Better than

For better you can use أَحْسَنُ or the short word خَيْرٌ. Both are followed by مِنْ.

المَشْيُ خَيْرٌ مِنَ الجُلُوسِ.
Walking is better than sitting.
هَذَا الحَاسُوبُ أَحْسَنُ مِنْ ذَلِكَ.
This computer is better than that one.
ج

The biggest: أَفْعَلُ + a noun

التَّفْضِيلُ المُطْلَق

For the -est, put the أَفْعَلُ form before a singular noun without ال. The noun takes a kasra: أَكْبَرُ بَيْتٍ = the biggest house.

ArabicEnglish
أَكْبَرُ بَيْتٍthe biggest house
أَطْوَلُ طَالِبٍthe tallest student
أَجْمَلُ حَدِيقَةٍthe most beautiful garden
أَسْرَعُ سَيَّارَةٍthe fastest car
أَصْعَبُ سُؤَالٍthe hardest question

In a sentence

مُحَمَّدٌ أَطْوَلُ طَالِبٍ فِي الصَّفِّ.
Muhammad is the tallest student in the class.
هَذَا أَجْمَلُ يَوْمٍ فِي الأُسْبُوعِ.
This is the nicest day of the week.
د

The older one: ال + أَفْعَل

أَفْعَلُ مَعَ ال

With ال, the form becomes an adjective after the noun: أَخِي الأَكْبَرُ = my older (oldest) brother. With a feminine noun, a few have their own feminine form — the two you will hear most are الكُبْرَى and الصُّغْرَى.

MasculineFeminineEnglish
أَخِي الأَكْبَرُأُخْتِي الكُبْرَىmy older brother · my older sister
أَخِي الأَصْغَرُأُخْتِي الصُّغْرَىmy younger brother · my younger sister

In use

أَخِي الأَكْبَرُ يَعْمَلُ مُهَنْدِسًا.
My older brother works as an engineer.
أُخْتِي الصُّغْرَى فِي الصَّفِّ الثَّانِي.
My younger sister is in the second grade.
هـ

More + a noun: أَكْثَرُ …

أَكْثَرُ + تَمْيِيز

Long adjectives like مُزْدَحِم (crowded) or مُفِيد (useful) cannot fit the أَفْعَلُ pattern. Use أَكْثَرُ + a noun with ـًا / ـَةً instead — just like more crowded in English.

AdjectiveMore…English
مُزْدَحِمأَكْثَرُ ازْدِحَامًاmore crowded
مُفِيدأَكْثَرُ فَائِدَةًmore useful
مُمْتِعأَكْثَرُ مُتْعَةًmore fun

In a sentence

المَدِينَةُ أَكْثَرُ ازْدِحَامًا مِنَ القَرْيَةِ.
The city is more crowded than the village.
كُرَةُ القَدَمِ أَكْثَرُ مُتْعَةً مِنَ السِّبَاحَةِ.
Football is more fun than swimming.
و

Model sentences

جُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
  1. أَخِي أَطْوَلُ مِنِّي، وَأَنَا أَطْوَلُ مِنْ أُخْتِي.
    My brother is taller than me, and I am taller than my sister.
  2. أُخْتِي أَكْبَرُ مِنِّي بِسَنَتَيْنِ.
    My sister is two years older than me.
  3. الطَّائِرَةُ أَسْرَعُ مِنَ القِطَارِ.
    The plane is faster than the train.
  4. الشِّتَاءُ فِي فِرْجِينْيَا أَبْرَدُ مِنَ الخَرِيفِ.
    Winter in Virginia is colder than autumn.
  5. هَذِهِ الحَقِيبَةُ أَرْخَصُ مِنْ تِلْكَ.
    This bag is cheaper than that one.
  6. الدَّرْسُ اليَوْمَ أَسْهَلُ مِنْ دَرْسِ أَمْسِ.
    Today's lesson is easier than yesterday's.
  7. مُحَمَّدٌ أَسْرَعُ لَاعِبٍ فِي الفَرِيقِ.
    Muhammad is the fastest player in the team.
  8. هَذَا أَجْمَلُ يَوْمٍ فِي الأُسْبُوعِ.
    This is the nicest day of the week.
  9. أَخِي الأَكْبَرُ يَعْمَلُ مُهَنْدِسًا.
    My older brother works as an engineer.
  10. أُخْتِي الصُّغْرَى فِي الصَّفِّ الثَّانِي.
    My younger sister is in the second grade.
  11. المَدِينَةُ أَكْثَرُ ازْدِحَامًا مِنَ القَرْيَةِ.
    The city is more crowded than the village.
  12. القِرَاءَةُ أَكْثَرُ فَائِدَةً مِنْ أَلْعَابِ الفِيدْيُو.
    Reading is more useful than video games.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Write the أَفْعَلُ form.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اكْتُبِ اسْمَ التَّفْضِيل.

  1. كَبِير ←
  2. صَغِير ←
  3. سَرِيع ←
  4. سَهْل ←
  5. قَصِير ←
  6. جَمِيل ←
١) أَكْبَرُ ٢) أَصْغَرُ ٣) أَسْرَعُ ٤) أَسْهَلُ ٥) أَقْصَرُ ٦) أَجْمَلُ

2Choose the right word.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: اخْتَرِ الكَلِمَةَ الصَّحِيحَة.

  1. أُخْتِي مِنِّي. ( أَكْبَرُ / كُبْرَى )
  2. الطَّائِرَةُ أَسْرَعُ السَّيَّارَةِ. ( مِنَ / فِي )
  3. هَذَا يَوْمٍ فِي حَيَاتِي. ( أَجْمَلُ / جَمِيلٌ )
  4. الرِّيَاضِيَّاتُ مِنَ العُلُومِ. ( أَصْعَبُ / صَعْبَةٌ )
  5. أَخِي يَعْمَلُ مُهَنْدِسًا. ( الأَكْبَرُ / أَكْبَرُ )
١) أَكْبَرُ ٢) مِنَ ٣) أَجْمَلُ ٤) أَصْعَبُ ٥) الأَكْبَرُ

3Complete with مِنْ + the right pronoun ending.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: أَكْمِلْ بِـ (مِنْ) وَالضَّمِير.

  1. أَخِي أَطْوَلُ . ( me )
  2. أَنْتَ أَسْرَعُ . ( him )
  3. هِيَ أَصْغَرُ . ( you, m. )
  4. نَحْنُ أَكْبَرُ . ( them )
  5. هُوَ أَقْصَرُ . ( her )
١) مِنِّي ٢) مِنْهُ ٣) مِنْكَ ٤) مِنْهُمْ ٥) مِنْهَا

4Make the -est form with the noun.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: كَوِّنِ التَّفْضِيلَ مَعَ الاسْم.

  1. طَوِيل + طَالِب ←
  2. كَبِير + بَيْت ←
  3. جَمِيل + حَدِيقَة ←
  4. سَرِيع + سَيَّارَة ←
  5. صَغِير + غُرْفَة ←
١) أَطْوَلُ طَالِبٍ ٢) أَكْبَرُ بَيْتٍ ٣) أَجْمَلُ حَدِيقَةٍ ٤) أَسْرَعُ سَيَّارَةٍ ٥) أَصْغَرُ غُرْفَةٍ

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. أُخْتِي كُبْرَى مِنِّي. ←
  2. الطَّائِرَةُ أَسْرَعُ مِنْ القِطَارِ. ←
  3. هَذِهِ أَجْمَلُ حَدِيقَةٌ. ←
  4. أَخِي أَطْوَلُ مِنْ أَنَا. ←
  5. هُوَ أَطْوَلُ طُلَّابٍ فِي الصَّفِّ. ←
١) أُخْتِي أَكْبَرُ مِنِّي.
٢) الطَّائِرَةُ أَسْرَعُ مِنَ القِطَارِ.
٣) هَذِهِ أَجْمَلُ حَدِيقَةٍ.
٤) أَخِي أَطْوَلُ مِنِّي.
٥) هُوَ أَطْوَلُ طَالِبٍ فِي الصَّفِّ.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. My brother is older than me.
  2. The plane is faster than the car.
  3. Winter is colder than autumn.
  4. This is the biggest room in the house.
  5. The city is more crowded than the village.
١) أَخِي أَكْبَرُ مِنِّي.
٢) الطَّائِرَةُ أَسْرَعُ مِنَ السَّيَّارَةِ.
٣) الشِّتَاءُ أَبْرَدُ مِنَ الخَرِيفِ.
٤) هَذِهِ أَكْبَرُ غُرْفَةٍ فِي البَيْتِ.
٥) المَدِينَةُ أَكْثَرُ ازْدِحَامًا مِنَ القَرْيَةِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Write the أَفْعَلُ form. (5 marks)

  1. طَوِيل ←
  2. قَدِيم ←
  3. سَهْل ←
  4. صَعْب ←
  5. كَثِير ←

Question 2 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. الفِيلُ مِنَ القِطَّةِ. ( أَكْبَرُ / كَبِيرٌ / الأَكْبَرُ )
  2. أُمِّي أَطْوَلُ . ( مِنِّي / مِنْ أَنَا / أَنَا )
  3. هَذَا أَحْسَنُ فِي المَدِينَةِ. ( مَطْعَمٍ / مَطْعَمٌ / المَطْعَمُ )
  4. بِنْتُ عَمِّي مِنِّي. ( أَصْغَرُ / صُغْرَى / صَغِيرَةٌ )
  5. كُرَةُ القَدَمِ أَكْثَرُ مِنَ الشِّطْرَنْجِ. ( مُتْعَةً / مُمْتِعٌ / مُتْعَةٌ )

Question 3 — Make the -est form with the noun. (5 marks)

  1. سَرِيع + لَاعِب ←
  2. جَمِيل + يَوْم ←
  3. صَعْب + سُؤَال ←
  4. قَدِيم + مَسْجِد ←
  5. كَبِير + مَدِينَة ←

Question 4 — Compare three people or places you know. Write three sentences. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) أَطْوَلُ ٢) أَقْدَمُ ٣) أَسْهَلُ ٤) أَصْعَبُ ٥) أَكْثَرُ

Question 2

١) أَكْبَرُ ٢) مِنِّي ٣) مَطْعَمٍ ٤) أَصْغَرُ ٥) مُتْعَةً

Question 3

١) أَسْرَعُ لَاعِبٍ ٢) أَجْمَلُ يَوْمٍ ٣) أَصْعَبُ سُؤَالٍ ٤) أَقْدَمُ مَسْجِدٍ ٥) أَكْبَرُ مَدِينَةٍ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for the أَفْعَلُ form and مِنْ.

Grammar · Lesson 20 of 20

أَنْ + المُضَارِع

Want to, Like to, Can

Say what you want to do, like to do, can do and must do. Two verbs side by side, joined by أَنْ — and one small change to the second verb.

In this lesson

  • Use أُرِيدُ، أُحِبُّ، أَسْتَطِيعُ، أَحْتَاجُ، أُحَاوِلُ and يَجِبُ with أَنْ.
  • Change the present-tense ending after أَنْ: ـُ to ـَ, ـُونَ to ـُوا.
  • Make both verbs agree with the person.
  • Ask and answer: Do you want to…? Can you…?

Words to practise withHobbies & SportFood & DrinkMy DayTransport & Travel

أ

Verbs that need أَنْ

أَفْعَالٌ يَتْبَعُهَا (أَنْ)

English says I want to go. Arabic says I want that I go: أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ. The word أَنْ joins the two verbs, and both verbs show the person.

ArabicEnglishExampleMeaning
أُرِيدُ أَنْI want toأُرِيدُ أَنْ أَشْرَبَ مَاءً.I want to drink water.
أُحِبُّ أَنْI like toأُحِبُّ أَنْ أَقْرَأَ.I like to read.
أَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْI canأَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ أَسْبَحَ.I can swim.
أَحْتَاجُ أَنْI need toأَحْتَاجُ أَنْ أَنَامَ مُبَكِّرًا.I need to sleep early.
أُحَاوِلُ أَنْI try toأُحَاوِلُ أَنْ أَتَكَلَّمَ العَرَبِيَّةَ.I try to speak Arabic.
يَجِبُ أَنْmust, have toيَجِبُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ الآنَ.I have to go now.

Both verbs change with the person

The first verb and the second verb both carry the person. Only يَجِبُ never changes — the second verb shows who must.

تُرِيدُ أَنْ تَذْهَبَ.
You want to go.
يُرِيدُ أَنْ يَذْهَبَ.
He wants to go.
يَجِبُ أَنْ تَدْرُسَ.
You must study.
يَجِبُ أَنْ يَدْرُسُوا.
They must study.
ب

What أَنْ does to the verb

المُضَارِعُ بَعْدَ (أَنْ)

After أَنْ the present tense changes its ending. There are only four changes to learn. The forms ending in ـْنَ (for women) do not change.

Normal presentAfter أَنْThe change
أَذْهَبُأَنْ أَذْهَبَـُ becomes ـَ
يَذْهَبُونَأَنْ يَذْهَبُواـُونَ becomes ـُوا
تَذْهَبِينَأَنْ تَذْهَبِيـِينَ becomes ـِي
يَذْهَبَانِأَنْ يَذْهَبَاـَانِ becomes ـَا

You have seen this before

لَنْ (will not) uses exactly the same form — Grammar 14. And the future سَـ (Grammar 12) is never used after أَنْ.

لَنْ أَذْهَبَ.
I will not go.
أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ.
I want to go.
ج

أَنْ أَذْهَبَ with every pronoun

تَصْرِيفُ (أَنْ يَذْهَبَ)

Here is the full pattern for ذَهَبَ / يَذْهَبُ (to go). Compare the two columns: the change is always at the end.

PronounPresentAfter أَنْEnglish
One — singular
أَنَاأَذْهَبُأَنْ أَذْهَبَ(that) I go
أَنْتَتَذْهَبُأَنْ تَذْهَبَ(that) you go (m.)
أَنْتِتَذْهَبِينَأَنْ تَذْهَبِي(that) you go (f.)
هُوَيَذْهَبُأَنْ يَذْهَبَ(that) he goes
هِيَتَذْهَبُأَنْ تَذْهَبَ(that) she goes
Two — dual
أَنْتُمَاتَذْهَبَانِأَنْ تَذْهَبَا(that) you two go
هُمَايَذْهَبَانِأَنْ يَذْهَبَا(that) the two of them go
Three or more — plural
نَحْنُنَذْهَبُأَنْ نَذْهَبَ(that) we go
أَنْتُمْتَذْهَبُونَأَنْ تَذْهَبُوا(that) you go (pl.)
أَنْتُنَّتَذْهَبْنَأَنْ تَذْهَبْنَ(that) you (women) go
هُمْيَذْهَبُونَأَنْ يَذْهَبُوا(that) they go
هُنَّيَذْهَبْنَأَنْ يَذْهَبْنَ(that) they (women) go
د

Asking, offering, saying no

السُّؤَالُ وَالعَرْضُ وَالرَّفْض

Put هَلْ in front to ask (Grammar 15). Put لَا in front of the first verb to say you don't want to or can't.

Everyday questions and answers

هَلْ تُرِيدُ أَنْ تَلْعَبَ مَعَنَا؟
Do you want to play with us?
نَعَمْ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَلْعَبَ.
Yes, I want to play.
هَلْ تَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ تُسَاعِدَنِي؟
Can you help me?
لَا أَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ أَحْضُرَ غَدًا.
I can't come tomorrow.
مَاذَا تُحِبِّينَ أَنْ تَأْكُلِي؟
What do you (f.) like to eat?
هـ

Conversation and model sentences

حِوَارٌ وَجُمَلٌ نَمُوذَجِيَّة
سَلْمَى: مَاذَا تُرِيدِينَ أَنْ تَفْعَلِي يَوْمَ السَّبْتِ؟
Salma: What do you want to do on Saturday?
لَيْلَى: أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ، وَبَعْدَ ذَلِكَ أُحِبُّ أَنْ أَسْبَحَ.
Layla: I want to go to the library, and after that I'd like to swim.
سَلْمَى: هَلْ تَسْتَطِيعِينَ أَنْ تَسْبَحِي جَيِّدًا؟
Salma: Can you swim well?
لَيْلَى: نَعَمْ، وَأُحَاوِلُ أَنْ أَسْبَحَ كُلَّ أُسْبُوعٍ.
Layla: Yes, and I try to swim every week.
سَلْمَى: أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَتَعَلَّمَ السِّبَاحَةَ أَيْضًا!
Salma: I want to learn to swim too!
لَيْلَى: إِذَنْ يَجِبُ أَنْ تَأْتِي مَعِي!
Layla: Then you have to come with me!

Model sentences

  1. أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَشْرَبَ مَاءً، أَنَا عَطْشَانُ.
    I want to drink water — I am thirsty.
  2. أُحِبُّ أَنْ أَقْرَأَ قَبْلَ النَّوْمِ.
    I like to read before bed.
  3. أَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ أَسْبَحَ جَيِّدًا.
    I can swim well.
  4. يَجِبُ أَنْ نَتَوَضَّأَ قَبْلَ الصَّلَاةِ.
    We must make wudu before the prayer.
  5. أُخْتِي تُرِيدُ أَنْ تَكُونَ طَبِيبَةً.
    My sister wants to be a doctor.
  6. يُحِبُّ أَخِي أَنْ يَلْعَبَ كُرَةَ السَّلَّةِ.
    My brother likes to play basketball.
  7. نُحَاوِلُ أَنْ نَتَكَلَّمَ العَرَبِيَّةَ فِي الفَصْلِ.
    We try to speak Arabic in class.
  8. هَلْ تَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ تُسَاعِدَنِي، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ؟
    Can you help me, please?
  9. يُرِيدُونَ أَنْ يُسَافِرُوا إِلَى مِصْرَ فِي الصَّيْفِ.
    They want to travel to Egypt in the summer.
  10. أَحْتَاجُ أَنْ أَشْتَرِيَ دَفْتَرًا جَدِيدًا.
    I need to buy a new notebook.
  11. لَا أَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ أَنَامَ، الجَوُّ حَارٌّ.
    I can't sleep — it is hot.
✎

Exercises

التَّدْرِيبَات

1Choose the right form after أَنْ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الأَوَّل: اخْتَرِ الفِعْلَ الصَّحِيحَ بَعْدَ (أَنْ).

  1. أُرِيدُ أَنْ . ( أَنَامُ / أَنَامَ )
  2. يُحِبُّ أَنْ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ. ( يَلْعَبَ / يَلْعَبُ )
  3. نَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ العَرَبِيَّةَ. ( نَقْرَأَ / نَقْرَأُ )
  4. هَلْ تُرِيدِينَ أَنْ ؟ ( تَأْكُلِينَ / تَأْكُلِي )
  5. يُرِيدُونَ أَنْ . ( يُسَافِرُونَ / يُسَافِرُوا )
١) أَنَامَ ٢) يَلْعَبَ ٣) نَقْرَأَ ٤) تَأْكُلِي ٥) يُسَافِرُوا

2Start each sentence with أُرِيدُ أَنْ.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّانِي: ابْدَأِ الجُمْلَةَ بِـ (أُرِيدُ أَنْ).

  1. أَشْرَبُ مَاءً. ← أُرِيدُ أَنْ
  2. أَذْهَبُ إِلَى البَيْتِ. ← أُرِيدُ أَنْ
  3. أَتَعَلَّمُ السِّبَاحَةَ. ← أُرِيدُ أَنْ
  4. أَلْبَسُ قَمِيصًا جَدِيدًا. ← أُرِيدُ أَنْ
  5. أَكْتُبُ رِسَالَةً لِجَدَّتِي. ← أُرِيدُ أَنْ
١) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَشْرَبَ مَاءً.
٢) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلَى البَيْتِ.
٣) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَتَعَلَّمَ السِّبَاحَةَ.
٤) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَلْبَسَ قَمِيصًا جَدِيدًا.
٥) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَكْتُبَ رِسَالَةً لِجَدَّتِي.

3Write the verb in brackets to match the person.

التَّدْرِيبُ الثَّالِث: اكْتُبِ الفِعْلَ المُنَاسِبَ لِلضَّمِير.

  1. أُخْتِي تُرِيدُ أَنْ طَبِيبَةً. ( تَكُون )
  2. الطُّلَّابُ يُحِبُّونَ أَنْ فِي المَلْعَبِ. ( يَلْعَب )
  3. أَنْتِ تَسْتَطِيعِينَ أَنْ جَيِّدًا. ( تَسْبَح )
  4. نَحْنُ نُحَاوِلُ أَنْ العَرَبِيَّةَ. ( نَتَكَلَّم )
  5. هُمَا يُرِيدَانِ أَنْ مَعًا. ( يَدْرُس )
١) تَكُونَ ٢) يَلْعَبُوا ٣) تَسْبَحِي ٤) نَتَكَلَّمَ ٥) يَدْرُسَا

4Complete the table.

التَّدْرِيبُ الرَّابِع: أَكْمِلِ الجَدْوَل.

PronounPresentAfter أَنْ
أَنْتَتَكْتُبُ
أَنْتِتَكْتُبِينَ
هُمَايَكْتُبَانِ
نَحْنُنَكْتُبُ
هُمْيَكْتُبُونَ
أَنْ تَكْتُبَ · أَنْ تَكْتُبِي · أَنْ يَكْتُبَا · أَنْ نَكْتُبَ · أَنْ يَكْتُبُوا

5Each sentence has one mistake. Write it correctly.

التَّدْرِيبُ الخَامِس: صَحِّحِ الخَطَأَ.

  1. أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبُ. ←
  2. يُحِبُّونَ أَنْ يَلْعَبُونَ. ←
  3. هَلْ تَسْتَطِيعِينَ أَنْ تُسَاعِدِينَ أُمَّكِ؟ ←
  4. أَسْتَطِيعُ أَسْبَحَ. ←
  5. يَجِبُ أَنْ نَنَامُ مُبَكِّرًا. ←
١) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ.
٢) يُحِبُّونَ أَنْ يَلْعَبُوا.
٣) هَلْ تَسْتَطِيعِينَ أَنْ تُسَاعِدِي أُمَّكِ؟
٤) أَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ أَسْبَحَ.
٥) يَجِبُ أَنْ نَنَامَ مُبَكِّرًا.

6Translate into Arabic. Use the vowel marks.

التَّدْرِيبُ السَّادِس: تَرْجِمْ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ مَعَ التَّشْكِيل.

  1. I want to drink water.
  2. Can you help me? (to a man)
  3. We like to play football.
  4. You must sleep early. (to a boy)
  5. They want to travel in the summer.
١) أُرِيدُ أَنْ أَشْرَبَ مَاءً.
٢) هَلْ تَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ تُسَاعِدَنِي؟
٣) نُحِبُّ أَنْ نَلْعَبَ كُرَةَ القَدَمِ.
٤) يَجِبُ أَنْ تَنَامَ مُبَكِّرًا.
٥) يُرِيدُونَ أَنْ يُسَافِرُوا فِي الصَّيْفِ.
★

Short quiz

الاخْتِبَارُ القَصِير

Score: ____ / 20

Name: ______________________ Date: ____________

Question 1 — Circle the correct answer. (5 marks)

  1. أُحِبُّ أَنْ القِصَصَ. ( أَقْرَأَ / أَقْرَأُ / قَرَأْتُ )
  2. هِيَ تُرِيدُ أَنْ . ( تَنَامُ / تَنَامَ / يَنَامَ )
  3. نَحْنُ نَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ . ( نَسْبَحَ / نَسْبَحُ / يَسْبَحُوا )
  4. يَا أَوْلَادُ، يَجِبُ أَنْ الآنَ. ( تَنَامُوا / تَنَامُونَ / تَنَامَ )
  5. يَا مَرْيَمُ، هَلْ تُرِيدِينَ أَنْ مَعَنَا؟ ( تَأْكُلِينَ / تَأْكُلِي / تَأْكُلَ )

Question 2 — Write the verb in brackets in the form it takes after أَنْ. (5 marks)

  1. يُرِيدُ أَنْ ( يُسَافِرُ )
  2. تُحَاوِلِينَ أَنْ ( تَفْهَمِينَ )
  3. يُحِبُّونَ أَنْ ( يَرْسُمُونَ )
  4. هُمَا يَسْتَطِيعَانِ أَنْ ( يَرْكَبَانِ )
  5. أَحْتَاجُ أَنْ ( أَشْرَبُ )

Question 3 — Complete with a verb from the box. (5 marks)

أَسْبَحَ — أَنَامَ — أَشْرَبَ — أَقْرَأَ — أَلْعَبَ
  1. أَنَا عَطْشَانُ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ .
  2. أَنَا مُتْعَبٌ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ .
  3. أُحِبُّ المَاءَ، أُحِبُّ أَنْ .
  4. عِنْدِي كِتَابٌ جَدِيدٌ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ .
  5. عِنْدِي كُرَةٌ جَدِيدَةٌ، أُرِيدُ أَنْ .

Question 4 — Write three sentences about your plans. Use أُرِيدُ أَنْ، أُحِبُّ أَنْ and أَسْتَطِيعُ أَنْ. (5 marks)

Question 1

١) أَقْرَأَ ٢) تَنَامَ ٣) نَسْبَحَ ٤) تَنَامُوا ٥) تَأْكُلِي

Question 2

١) يُسَافِرَ ٢) تَفْهَمِي ٣) يَرْسُمُوا ٤) يَرْكَبَا ٥) أَشْرَبَ

Question 3

١) أَشْرَبَ ٢) أَنَامَ ٣) أَسْبَحَ ٤) أَقْرَأَ ٥) أَلْعَبَ

Question 4 — open answer. One mark per correct sentence, two for the ending after أَنْ.